Baldor Universal Remote mn792 User manual

Series 29
Digital DC Control
Installation & Operating Manual
9/03
MN792
Table of Contents
Section 1
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Minimum Connection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Power and Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Reference and Jumpers for Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Parameter Settings (for Keypad Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Reference and Jumpers for Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Serial Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Section 2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Enclosure Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Product Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Section 3
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Control Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Control and Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Local and Remote Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Source / Destination Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Programming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Section 4
Receiving and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Receiving & Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
External Vent Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Optional Remote Keypad Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
MN792
Line Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Power Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Isolation Transformer Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Single Phase Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Logic Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
M-Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Table of Contents i
Blower Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Encoder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Tachometer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
Control I/O Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
RS232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
System Port (P3) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
Section 5
Switch Setting and Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Pre–Operation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Speed Loop Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
Starting and Stopping Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
Upload/Download Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17
DUMP Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18
Section 6
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
AUX I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Configure Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Current Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Current Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Field Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Jog/Slack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
OP Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
ii Table of Contents
MN792
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Raise/Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Setpoint Sum 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
Speed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
Standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
Stop Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
System Port P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
5703 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
TEC Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Section 7
Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
Keypad LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
L/R Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
PROG Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Quick Tag Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Restore Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
3 button reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
Operation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Select a Menu View Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Deactivate a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
Section 8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Reset a Trip Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Serial (P3) Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Last Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Health Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Health Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4 and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
MN792
Table of Contents iii
Manage Trips from the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Trip Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Symbolic Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
Self Test Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
Setting Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
Viewing Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
Inhibiting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Section 9
Specifications & Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
Keypad Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
Control Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
Terminal Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
EMC Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
Appendix A
CE Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
CE Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
EMC – Conformity and CE – Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
EMC Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
Appendix B
Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Parameters Listed by Tag Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Parameters Listed by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-19
Parameters Listed by WB Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-28
Appendix C
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
iv Table of Contents
MN792
Section 1
Quick Start
The basic steps for connection and setup are provided in this section. Detailed descriptions of each step and
parameter settings are provided later in this manual. Be sure to comply with all applicable codes when installing
this control. The Series 29 DC control is a one way control. That is, it is non–regen and cannot reverse
direction. It operates in the forward direction only. All references to reverse operation or regen operation apply
to the Series 30 DC Control only.
Minimum Connection Requirements Refer to Section 4 for cover removal procedure.
Power and Motor Connections
Figure 1-1 shows the minimum connections required at the power connector.
Figure 1-1 Power Connections
For Size 1 & 2 controls, be sure the
logic power jumper is in the correct
position. Refer to Figure 4-9.
3 Phase
Power
To 1 Phase 115VAC Control Power
(except units with internal
control transformer,
100hp and less)
L1
L2
L3
GND
or jumper TH1 to TH2 if
motor thermistor is not connected.
Thermistor
Motor Blower connections when using optional
Motor Starter on Size 1 & 2 controls.
Field
Armature
Reference and Jumpers for Keypad Operation
For keypad operation, the speed reference connections are not required. Speed is set at the keypad. Figure
1-2 shows the minimum connections required A, B and C signal connectors for Keypad operation.
Figure 1-2 Reference and Jumper Connections
If Optional Speed Feedback Board is used, refer
to Speed Feedback at the end of this section.
+24V 9
DigIn 3 8
DigIn 1 6
DigIn 2 7
DigIn R 5
Start 3
DigIn E 4
0V 1
C
Ext Trip 2
Coast Stop 9
DigOut 3 7
Prog Stop 8
DigOut 2 6
DigOut 1 5
-10V Ref 4
+10V Ref 3
0V 1
Not Used 2
AnOut 2 8
Arm I Fbk 9
AnIn 5 6
AnOut 1 7
AnIn 4 5
AnIn 3 4
AnIn 2 3
B
500
A
Minimum jumper connections:
A1 to A2 – 500 ohm jumper for 20mA input
A6 to B3 – Analog Input 5 = +10VDC
B8 to C9 – PROG Stop = +24VDC
B9 to C9 – Coast Stop = +24VDC
C4 to C9 – Enable = +24VDC
C1 to C2 – No External Trip
0V 1
AnIn 1 2
Signal Connections
500 ohm
Jumper for
0-20mA
Parameter Settings (for Keypad Operation)
The factory settings should be sufficient to operate the control using the “Local” mode with the keypad. Only a
few changes to the motor data parameters must be made. Before any parameters can be changed, set
System::Configure I/O::Configure Enable to enable. All LEDs will blink during configuration.
Note: To separate the various menu level designation, a double colon is used (System::Configure I/O).
MN792
Quick Start 1-1
Reference and Jumpers for Remote Operation
For remote operation, the speed reference and other connections are made at the terminal strip connector. Not
all of these connections are shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Reference and Jumper Connections
+24V 9
DigIn 3 8
DigIn 1 6
DigIn 2 7
DigIn R 5
Start 3
DigIn E 4
0V 1
C
Ext Trip 2
Coast Stop 9
DigOut 3 7
Prog Stop 8
DigOut 2 6
DigOut 1 5
-10V Ref 4
+10V Ref 3
0V 1
Not Used 2
AnOut 2 8
Arm I Fbk 9
AnIn 5 6
AnOut 1 7
AnIn 4 5
B
The Health relay (24VDC coil) may be installed between B6 and C1
to provide fault indication to an external device or circuit.
Jog
Start
DH
PROG Stop
Coast Stop
500 ohm
Jumper for
0-20mA
Health Relay
Jumper if contacts are not used:
B8 to C9 – PROG Stop = +24VDC
B9 to C9 – Coast Stop = +24VDC
AnIn 3 4
Minimum jumper connections:
A1 to A2 – 500 ohm jumper for 20mA input
A6 to B3 – Analog Input 5 = +10VDC
C4 to C9 – Enable = +24VDC
C1 to C2 – No External Trip
A
AnIn 2 3
Signal
Connections
500
Speed Reference connections:
A1
– one end of Pot
B3
– one end of Pot
A4
– wiper of Pot
C1 to C2 – No External Trip
0V 1
AnIn 1 2
Optional Speed
Feedback Board
Speed Feedback The factory setting for speed feedback is Armature Voltage which does not require an optional feedback
board. If an optional board must be used, refer to its manual to install and set the board configuration.
Serial Link
1-2 Quick Start
A PC COM port may be connected to the control at the System Port (P3). At Menu Level : Serial Links, all of
the parameters can be set for your application.
MN792
and scroll the menu choices, and “M” goes to next level menu and “E” comes back up one menu level.
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
Comments
Local control display.
0.00%
Press “PROG” key
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 15A
Press “M” key
DC 4Q 15A
MENU LEVEL
This message may be different for
each control size.
Press “M” key
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Press “M” key
Access the Configure Drive Menu
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press M twice to go down 2 menu
levels
Press “M” key
Access Configure Enable.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLED
Press key
Change Disabled to Enabled.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
Configure enable is disabled and
no parameter value can be
changed.
Configure enable must be enabled
to allow a change to any parameter
value. All LED’s on keypad are
blinking to show it is enabled.
Press “E” key
Return to the Configure Drive Menu
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press Set the motor volts.
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
Use up and down arrows to set the
motor voltage.
Press Set the armature current.
ARMATURE CURRENT
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Set the field current (skip if field is
in voltage mode.
FIELD CURRENT
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Set the field control mode (voltage
or current).
FLD. CTRL MODE
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Field Volts Ratio=
(field volts/AC supply)*100
FLD. VOLTS RATIO
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Set the current limit
(normally 100%).
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Leave autotune off.
AUTOTUNE
Autotune after calibration is
complete.
Press Select Armature Volts, Analog
TACH or Encoder.
SPEED FBK SELECT
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Set the pulses per REV of the
encoder.
ENCODER LINES
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Set the encoder max speed (100%
speed).
ENCODER RPM
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press Change the polarity of the encoder
signal if needed.
ENCODER SIGN
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press The Speed Loop Integral Gain.
SPD INT TIME
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
Press The Speed Loop Proportional Gain.
SPEED PROP GAIN
Use up and down arrows to set.
Press “E” when done.
MN792
Quick Start 1-3
Configure the drive parameters and block diagram connections.
Action
Description
Press “M” key
Display
Comments
DC 4Q 15A
MENU LEVEL
Press “M” key
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press or Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
MENU LEVEL
SETUP PARAMETERS
Press “E” when done.
Setup Parameters
At Menu Level : Setup Parameters, several sub menus set values for your application:
Ramps, AUX I/O, Op Station, Jog/Slack, Raise/Lower, Special Blocks, Field Control, Current Profile, Inverse
Time, Stop Rates, Calibration, Inhibit Alarms, Current Loop, Speed Loop, Standstill and Setpoint Sum 1.
Password
At Menu Level : Password, a password can be set to prevent unauthorized access to the setup and other
parameters.
Configure I/O
At Menu Level : System : Configure I/O, make the connections using the Tags to configure the block diagram to
your application.
Autotune
At Menu Level : Configure Drive, set Autotune to On, press “E” to exit configure menu. At the keypad, press L/R
for local mode. Press Run, the drive will autotune. When the drive stops and no error messages are displayed,
autotune was successful. Repeat the Save Parameters procedure to ensure the new values are saved.
When completed, change the Configure Enable parameter from Enabled to Disabled.
Action
Description
Display
Comments
Press or Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Press “M” key
Access the Configure Drive Menu
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press M twice to go down 2 menu
levels
Press “M” key
Access Configure Enable.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
Press key
Change Disabled to Enabled.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLED
Configure enable is disabled and
no parameter value can be
changed.
Configure enable must be enabled
to allow a change to any parameter
value. All LED’s on keypad are
blinking to show it is enabled.
Press “E” key 2 times
Return to the Menu Level.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Save Parameters
At Menu Level : Save Parameters, save the settings you have programmed into the control. This will be the
parameters that are restored for use after power up. If you do not save the parameters, the factory settings (or
the last saved) will be used after a power up.
Action
Description
Start at Menu
Level 1
Press Comments
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.
Press “M” key
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
UP TO ACTION
Press Press to save parameters.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
1-4 Quick Start
Display
PARAMETER SAVE
REQUESTED
Parameters are saved. Except the
“Local Setpoint”.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
MN792
Section 2
General Information
Overview
CE Compliance
Enclosure Sizes
Copyright Baldor  2002. All rights reserved.
This manual is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied or
reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Baldor.
Baldor makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any
implied warranties of fitness for any particular purpose. The information in this document is subject to change
without notice. Baldor assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Microsoft and MS–DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. UL
and cUL are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratories.
The Series 29 DC control is a one way control. That is, it is non–regen and cannot reverse direction. It
operates in the forward direction only. All references to reverse operation or regen operation apply to the Series
30 DC Control only. The Baldor Digital DC control is a three phase, full wave, DC motor armature and field
control. The SCR bridge converts three phase AC power to controlled DC to operate the DC motor armature.
The AC input is also used for the reference transformer input to operate power supplies and synchronize to the
AC input line. This control is of the NEMA Type C designation.
The control may also be used with permanent magnet field motors and DC spindle drive motors. In addition,
standard feedback from armature may be used. An optional Encoder, Tachometer or resolver feedback is
available with optional expansion boards. The control can be configured to operate in a number of modes
depending upon the application requirements and user preference.
It is the responsibility of the user to determine the correct operating mode to use for the application. These
choices are made using the keypad as explained in this manual.
A custom unit may be required, contact Baldor. Compliance to Directive 89/336/EEC is the responsibility of the
system integrator. A control, motor and all system components must have proper shielding, grounding, and
filtering as described in MN1383. Please refer to MN1383 for installation techniques for CE compliance. For
additional information, refer to Section 4 and Appendix A of this manual.
Five enclosure sizes are available:
Size 1
15A to 35A
Size 2
40A to 165A
Size 3
180A to 270A
Size 4
380A to 830A
Size 5
850A and larger
Limited Warranty
For a period of one (1) year from the date of original purchase, BALDOR will repair or replace
without charge controls and accessories which our examination proves to be defective in
material or workmanship. This warranty is valid if the unit has not been tampered with by
unauthorized persons, misused, abused, or improperly installed and has been used in
accordance with the instructions and/or ratings supplied. This warranty is in lieu of any other
warranty or guarantee expressed or implied. BALDOR shall not be held responsible for any
expense (including installation and removal), inconvenience, or consequential damage,
including injury to any person or property caused by items of our manufacture or sale. (Some
states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above
exclusion may not apply.) In any event, BALDOR’s total liability, under all circumstances, shall
not exceed the full purchase price of the control. Claims for purchase price refunds, repairs, or
replacements must be referred to BALDOR with all pertinent data as to the defect, the date
purchased, the task performed by the control, and the problem encountered. No liability is
assumed for expendable items such as fuses.
Goods may be returned only with written notification including a BALDOR Return Authorization
Number and any return shipments must be prepaid.
MN792
General Information 2-1
Product Notice
Intended use:
These drives are intended for use in stationary ground based applications in industrial power installations
according to the standards EN60204 and VDE0160. They are designed for machine applications that require
variable speed controlled three phase brushless AC motors.
These drives are not intended for use in applications such as:
–
Home appliances
–
Mobile vehicles
–
Ships
–
Airplanes
Unless otherwise specified, this drive is intended for installation in a suitable enclosure. The enclosure must
protect the control from exposure to excessive or corrosive moisture, dust and dirt or abnormal ambient
temperatures.
In the event that a control fails to operate correctly, contact Baldor for return instructions.
Safety Notice:
This equipment contains high voltages. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified
personnel should attempt the start–up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are driven by this
equipment. Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel should attempt the start–up
procedure or troubleshoot this equipment.
–
System documentation must be available at all times.
–
Keep non-qualified personnel at a safe distance from this equipment.
–
Only qualified personnel familiar with the safe installation, operation and maintenance of this device
should attempt start-up or operating procedures.
–
Always remove power before making or removing any connections to this control.
PRECAUTIONS: Classifications of cautionary statements.
WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
injury or death.
Caution:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
damage to property.
Continued on next page.
2-2 General Information
MN792
PRECAUTIONS:
WARNING:
Do not touch any circuit board, power device or electrical connection before you
first ensure that power has been disconnected and there is no high voltage
present from this equipment or other equipment to which it is connected.
Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING:
Be sure that you are completely familiar with the safe operation of this equipment.
This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or
parts that are controlled by this equipment. Improper use can cause serious or
fatal injury.
WARNING:
Be sure all wiring complies with the National Electrical Code and all regional and
local codes or CE Compliance. Improper wiring may cause a hazardous
condition.
WARNING:
Be sure the system is properly grounded before applying power. Do not apply AC
power before you ensure that grounds are connected. Electrical shock can cause
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING:
Do not remove cover for at least five (5) minutes after AC power is disconnected
to allow capacitors to discharge. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal
injury.
WARNING:
Improper operation may cause violent motion of the motor and driven equipment.
Be certain that unexpected movement will not cause injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.
WARNING:
Motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied, even
when motor is not moving. Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
WARNING:
If a motor is driven mechanically, it may generate hazardous voltages that are
conducted to its power input terminals. The enclosure must be grounded to
prevent a possible shock hazard.
WARNING:
The user must provide an external hard-wired emergency stop circuit to disable
the control in the event of an emergency.
Continued on next page.
MN792
General Information 2-3
Caution:
To prevent equipment damage, be certain that the input power has correctly sized protective
devices installed as well as a power disconnect.
Caution:
Avoid locating the control immediately above or beside heat generating equipment, or
directly below water or steam pipes.
Caution:
Avoid locating the control in the vicinity of corrosive substances or vapors, metal particles
and dust.
Caution:
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical short
circuit amperes listed here at rated voltage.
Horsepower RMS Symmetrical Amperes
1.5–50
5,000
51–200
10,000
201–400
18,000
401–600
30,000
601–900
42,000
Caution:
Baldor recommends not using “Grounded Leg Delta” transformer power leads that may
create ground loops and degrade system performance. Instead, we recommend using a
four wire Wye.
Caution:
Logic signals are interruptible signals; these signals are removed when power is removed
from the drive.
Caution:
The safe integration of the drive into a machine system is the responsibility of the machine
designer. Be sure to comply with the local safety requirements at the place where the
machine is to be used. In Europe this is the Machinery Directive, the ElectroMagnetic
Compatibility Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. In the United States this is the
National Electrical code and local codes.
Caution:
Controls must be installed inside an electrical cabinet that provides environmental control
and protection. Installation information for the drive is provided in this manual. Motors and
controlling devices that connect to the driver should have specifications compatible to the
drive.
Caution:
Do not tin (solder) exposed wires. Solder contracts over time and may cause loose
connections.
Caution:
Electrical components can be damaged by static electricity. Use ESD (electro-static
discharge) procedures when handling this control.
Caution:
This control is not designed for regenerative use with stabilized shunt or compound wound
motors. If stabilized shunt or compound wound are to be used, the series field must be
isolated and not connected. Contact the motor manufacturer for motor derating
specifications under these conditions.
2-4 General Information
MN792
Section 3
Getting Started
Control Overview
Control Loops
In very simple terms, control of the DC motor is maintained by Control Loops. An inner Current Loop and an
outer Speed Loop are used. These control loops are shown in the Block Diagram of Appendix C. From the
keypad, you can select the control loops to be used by the Control to provide either:
•
Current Control
•
Speed Control (factory setting)
Normally a current or speed feedback signal is applied to the appropriate loop to control the process. While
current feedback sensors are built–in, speed feedback is normally provided directly from the armature sensing
circuit (default), or by “Tachogenerator” or encoder connection to an option board.
Figure 3-1 Speed Control
speed increase due to field weakening
armature voltage remains constant
Armature Voltage 200V
Field Current 5.7A
field current reduced
base
speed
Speed
During speed control the speed of the motor can be increased by adjusting the motor field. Weakening the field
current allows an increase in motor speed beyond that normally achieved for the motor rated armature voltage.
Control and Communications
Some of the internal blocks of this control must be connected for your application. This means that you must
understand the application and how the software blocks should be connected to implement your design. The
block diagram in Appendix C shows the factory set connections. These diagrams assist in understanding this
concept and will be described next.
The Keypad (Operator Station) provides access to parameters, diagnostic messages, trip settings and full
application programming. The heart of the control is a microprocessor that provides advanced features such as:
•
Complex control algorithms not achievable by simple analog techniques.
•
Software configured control circuitry that uses standard software blocks.
•
Serial link communications with other drives or a PC for advanced process systems.
To customize drive performance for optimum use, you may need to configure, or reroute software connections to
and from the drive’s inputs and outputs and to and from the drive’s software blocks. You can configure the drive
and change software block parameter values either using the keypad or with a personal computer (PC) running
the software package Workbench D (see MN794).
MN792
Getting Started 3-1
Local and Remote Modes
Determine what operating mode is best for your application. Four modes are possible, see Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Local and Remote Modes
Local:
Keypad Setting
(Factory Setting)
For local operation, use the keypad to change parameters or control operation.
Remote:
Terminal Strip Setting
Process control and other applications may require the control to be used in remote mode with
analog and digital input/output signals performing all control operations. The control is
configured in this mode from the factory.
Preset
Analog & Digital
Inputs and Outputs
Remote:
Serial Setting
Remote Serial mode is used to initially setup and configure the parameters of the control.
For applications that are controlled by a PC that is running suitable software. Workbench D is
recommended.
Remote:
COMMS Setting
For Baldor RS485/Modbus, Profibus DP and DeviceNet.
Two forms of control are in operation at all times: Start/Stop Control and Speed Control. These are operate by
local or remote control.
Local
The keypad is used to set motor speed and other parameters. The Start, Stop and Jog keys then control motor
rotation.
Remote
A speed reference signal (pot) and the various analog and digital inputs and outputs are used for speed control
and rotation of the motor shaft.
3-2 Getting Started
MN792
Source / Destination Tags
The control is very flexible because of the programming capability. The software block diagram of the control is
shown in Appendix C. Each logic block has inputs and outputs. These I/O points are called “Tags” because
they have a tag number associated with it and shown in brackets “[tag]” . Some tags are read only values and
some are read/write. Besides setting the value of each parameter, its source or destination connections can be
programmed. This means you can connect inputs and outputs of logic blocks as you desire to implement your
application.
Destination Tag example
Consider Digital Input 1. The external connection (input) is made at the C connector pin 6. The block diagram of
this input is shown in Figure 3-3. Tag [102] is the destination tag for the output signal. The destination is
presently set to 90. This connects the output of Digital Input 1 to the Bipolar Clamps [90] input of the Current
Loop Logic Block. The value of [102] Digital output is determined by the switch position, either the value of [103]
or [104] will be applied to the output as the input changes from false to true.
Figure 3-3 Digital Inputs
Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)
Digital
Input 1
Parameter
[102]
[104]
[103]
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
Current Loop
Setting
90
0.00%
0.01%
[102]
[88]
[90]
Bipolar Clamps
Digital IN 1
[48]
NEG I Clamp
Analog IN 4
NEG I Clamp
-1
Tag
C6
[71]
Diagnostic
connection
[87]
POS I Clamp
Source Tag example
Consider Digital Output 1. The external connection (output) is made at the B connector pin 5. The block
diagram of this input is shown in Figure 3-4. Tag [97] is the source tag for the input signal. The source is
presently set to 77. This means that Digital output 1 receives its input signal from [77] At Zero Speed parameter
from the Standstill Logic Block. To connect Digital Output 1 to the At Zero Setpoint parameter, simply change
[97] Source Tag value from 77 to 78.
Figure 3-4 Digital Outputs
Digital Output 1 – DIOUT 1 (B5)
Standstill
[306] Source Tag
[11] Standstill Logic
[12] Zero Threshold
At Zero Setpoint [78]
At Zero Speed [77]
At Standstill [79]
Tag Parameter
[359] Inverted
[195] Threshold (>)
Setting
False
0.00%
[97]
Source Tag
77
[43]
Modulus
True
B5
ABS
Digital
Output 1
From these examples, it is easy to see that several things are required to program the control.
1.
2.
3.
First, you must understand the application and know how to implement it in the control parameters.
Second, layout all of the connections for your application using the block diagrams in Appendix C.
Third, program the connections and parameter preset values. To do this you will need to refer to the
Parameter Values in Appendix B. This will tell you where in the keypad menu system you can locate
each parameter value or [tag].
For example, find [97] in Appendix B, (see Figure 3-5). To locate [97] using the keypad, begin at the System
menu, select Configure I/O menu, then select Digital Outputs menu, finally select Digital Output 1 (B5)
parameter. Change the value of that parameter to the desired value.
Note: Tag number “[97]” is not shown at the keypad for the Digital Output 1 (B5) parameter value. To display
the [TAG] number of the parameter, display the parameter value then press the “M” key to show the
parameters tag number. Appendix B and C are the key to programming your application.
Figure 3-5
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
97
R/W
RW
Name
Source Tag
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL
OUTPUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
4.
MN792
WB Block
Digout 1 (B5)
Range
0 to 549
Factory Setting
77
MN
cp
Notes
2, 3
Select the next parameter and repeat step 3.
Getting Started 3-3
Programming Block A very important step to installing this control is to determine the configuration that will best implement your
application. Each input and output of each block has an assigned tag number. Tags are connected in software
much like jumper wires are used in hardware. The control is shipped with a factory set software connection.
This may be changed at any time. The method of changing these connections (source or destination tags) is
described later in the programming Section 6 of this manual.
Note: It is important to correctly set the software to implement your application in the most efficient way. Some
parameters are Tags (connections) and others are programmed values. Be careful when programming
to be sure the correct input or output is being set.
Example (View Analog Input 1 parameter settings)
As an example, a portion of the block diagram is shown in Figure 3-6. The output of Analog Input 1 [246] is
connected to [100] “Input 1” of Setpoint Sum 1 block. Each input and output shown on these diagrams is
programmable.
Figure 3-6 Analog Input Example
Setpoint Sum 1
Tag Parameter
Analog
Input 1
Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
[231]
[230]
Max Value
Calibration
+100.00%
1.0000
[246]
A2
[232]
[246]
Min Value
Destination Tag
-100.00%
100
[292]
[208]
[309]
[420]
[423]
[6]
[100]
[131]
[419]
[8]
[375]
Sign 0
Ratio 0
Input 0
Divider 0
Input 2
Ratio 1
Input 1
Deadband Width
Divider 1
Sign 1
Limit
Factory Setting
Positive
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
0.00%
0.00%
1.0000
Positive
105.00%
+
A/B
+
A/B
-
+
+
+
-
The parameter values for Analog Input 1 can be changed at the keypad. Figure 3-7 shows a partial map of the
menu levels. The Analog Input 1 parameters are at Level 4 under the Level 3 Analog Inputs. The keypad
operation is shown in Table 3-1. Figure 3-7 can be used to visualize the menu structure that is being navigated
in Table 3-1.
Figure 3-7
1
2
3
4
Menu Levels
Diagnostics
Configure Enable
System
Software
Analog Inputs
ANIN1 (A2)
Calibration
MAX Value
MIN Value
Destination Tag
Configure I/O
Table 3-1 Set Analog Input 1 for 4–20mA
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Press “PROG” key
Display
FORWARD
REF:
Comments
0.00%
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 35A
This message may be different for
each control.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
This is menu level 1. Refer to Figure
3-7 for a description of the menu
levels.
This is menu level 1, System
parameters.
Press M
Access the menus.
Press Scroll to System menu. Press several times.
Press M
Access the System menus.
SYSTEM
SOFTWARE
Press Scroll to Configure I/O menu.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
Press M
Access Configure I/O menu.
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
3-4 Getting Started
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
This is menu level 2.
MN792
Table 3-1 Set Analog Input 1 for 4–20mA Continued
Action
Description
Display
Comments
Press M
Access Configure I/O menu.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLE
Press Change Configure Enable to Enabled.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
This is menu level 3. Before any
parameter values can be changed,
Configure Enable must be “Enabled”
(it is normally disabled”).
Note that the LED’s on Keypad are
flashing until changed back to Disable.
Press E
Access Configure I/O menu.
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Move back one menu level using the
E key.
Press Scroll to analog inputs menu.
CONFIGURE I/O
ANALOG INPUTS
Press M
Access analog inputs 1 menu.
ANALOG INPUTS
ANIN1 (A2)
Press M
Access Calibration menu.
ANIN1 (A2)
CALIBRATION
Press M
View or change the Calibration value.
CALIBRATION
1.0000
Press E
This is menu level 4.
Use the and keys to change the
value. Press E when finished.
ANIN1 (A2)
CALIBRATION
Press Scroll to next menu.
ANIN1 (A2)
MAX VALUE
Press M
View or change the MAX Value menu.
MAX VALUE
100.00%
Press E
Use the and keys to change the
value. Press E when finished.
ANIN1 (A2)
MAX VALUE
Press Scroll to next menu.
ANIN1 (A2)
MIN VALUE
Press M
View or change the MIN Value menu.
MIN VALUE
–100.00%
Press E
Use the and keys to change the
value. Press E when finished.
ANIN1 (A2)
MIN VALUE
Press Scroll to next menu.
ANIN1 (A2)
DESTINATION TAG
Press M
View or change the Destination tag
Value menu.
DESTINATION TAG
100
Press E
Press “E” several times to return to
the Configure Enable menu.
ANIN1 (A2)
DESTINATION TAG
Press M
Access Configure I/O menu.
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
This is menu level 2.
Press M
Access Configure I/O menu.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
Press Change Configure Enable to Disabled.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLED
This is menu level 3. Before the
control can be used again, Configure
Enable must be “Disabled”.
Note when is pressed, the keypad
will briefly display “calibrating”
followed by Disabled and all Keypad
LED’s stop blinking.
Press E
Use the and keys to change the
value. Press E when finished.
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press the “E” key several times to move back through the menu items or press “PROG” to return to control operation.
Note: When changing a numeric value, pressing the “M” key will change the cursor position one digit to the left.
MN792
Getting Started 3-5
3-6 Getting Started
MN792
Section 4
Receiving and Installation
Receiving & Inspection
Location
Baldor Controls are thoroughly tested at the factory and carefully packaged for shipment. When you receive
your control, there are several things you should do immediately.
1.
Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage immediately to the
commercial carrier that delivered your control.
2.
Remove the control from the shipping container and remove all packing materials. The container and
packing materials may be retained for future shipment.
3.
Verify that the part number of the control you received is the same as the part number listed on your
purchase order.
4.
Inspect the control for external physical damage that may have been sustained during shipment and
report any damage immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your control.
5.
If the control is to be stored before use, be sure that it is stored in a location that conforms to
published storage humidity and temperature specifications stated in this manual.
Considerations The location of the control is important. Installation should be in an area that is protected from direct
sunlight, corrosives, harmful gases or liquids, dust, metallic particles, and vibration. Exposure to these can
reduce the operating life and degrade performance of the control.
Several other factors should be carefully evaluated when selecting a location for installation:
1.
For effective cooling and maintenance, the control should be mounted vertically on a smooth
non-flammable surface.
2.
At least 1.0 inches (25mm) top and bottom clearance must be provided for air flow. At least 0.4
inches (10mm) clearance is required between controls (each side).
3.
Operating Altitude derating. Up to 1640 feet (500 meters) no derating required. Derate the
continuous and peak output current by 1% for each 660 feet (200 meters) above 1640 feet.
Maximum operating altitude 16,500 feet (5,000 meters).
4.
Operating Temperature derating. 0°C to 45°C (Sizes 1, 2); 0°C to 40°C (Sizes 3,4,5) ambient.
Above rated temperature, derate the continuous and peak output current by 2% per °C above rating.
Maximum ambient is 55°C.
Table 4-1 Watts Loss Ratings
Catalog No.
BC29D7A35–CO7
BC29D7A70–CO7
BC29D7A110–CO7
BC29D7A165–CO7
BC29D7A243–CO1/CO2
MN792
Output
Current (A)
35
70
110
165
243
Watts Loss
(W)
117
234
354
519
840
Catalog No.
BC29D7A380–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A500–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A725–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A830–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A1580–CO1/CO2
Output
Current (A)
380
500
725
830
1580
Watts Loss
(W)
1230
1590
2265
2580
4890
Receiving & Installation 4-1
Cover Removal To connect power and signal wires, the cover must be removed. This procedure describes how to access all
terminal connections inside the control.
1.
Loosen the two cover screws shown in Figure 4-8, then lift and remove the cover as shown.
Figure 4-1 Top Cover Removal
Lift and
remove cover
Cover
Screws
(2)
2.
Locate the two 1/4 turn screws shown in Figure 4-2. Rotate each screw 1/4 turn CCW. This releases
the control from the base.
Figure 4-2 Signal Connections
Feedback Expansion
Board location
Communications Expansion
Board location
Signal Connections
1/4 Turn Screw
Power Connections (Control and base must
be opened to view, see Figure 4-9)
Power Ground
Motor Ground
4-2 Receiving & Installation
1/4 Turn Screw (1/4 turn to release,
press screw into hole to close).
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
MN792
Cover Removal Continued
3.
The control and base are hinged and are opened as shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Hinged Assembly
Rubber
Grommet
Metal
360 Degree
Coupling Coupling
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ
The knock–out panel is part of the base
assembly to allow connections to be made.
Use the correct size rubber grommet,
conduit coupling or 360 degree coupling.
Raise the control to
expose the base
Hinge
Knock–out
panel
Control
Base
360 Degree Coupling
Mechanical Installation
Mount the control to the mounting surface. The control must be securely fastened to the mounting surface by
the control mounting holes. The location of the mounting holes is shown in Section 9 of this manual.
External Vent Kit (Size 4 & 5 controls only)
Upper Housing
Foam gasket stretches over duct prior to
attaching upper housing.
Duct slides down between duct clip and mounting
panel and fits within the sides of the control housing.
Fit duct clip under fasteners at top of drive.
Be sure it is tight against the mounting panel.
MN792
Receiving & Installation 4-3
Optional Remote Keypad Installation (Enclosure rating of IP54 when correctly mounted). The keypad may be
remotely mounted using optional Baldor keypad extension cable.
Tools Required:
•
Center punch, file and screwdrivers (Phillips and straight) and crescent wrench.
•
#19 drill and drill motor .
Figure 4-4 Remote Keypad Installation
1
2
5
4
3
Keypad ACBD01A01
CBLD030KP
Bezel ACBD02A01
Mounting Instruction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Locate a flat mounting surface. Place the template on the mounting surface (step 1).
Accurately center punch the mounting holes.
Drill holes for the two mounting screws.
Use the drill to remove metal for the 27 x 29 mm rectangular hole (step 2).
Debur the rectangular hole making sure the panel stays clean and flat.
Remove the protective film from the keypad gasket (step 3).
Assemble the keypad to the panel. Use two screws provided (step 4).
Connect the 10 ft. cable at the keypad and P3 of the control (step 5).
1.90 (48.25)
1.57
(40)
3.40
(86.5)
Figure 4-5 Template
4-4 Receiving & Installation
1.14
(29)
Bottom
0.16 (4.0) Dia.
4 Places
5.22
(132.5)
3.78 (96.5)
4.09 (104)
1.06 (27)
1.97
(50)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
MN792
Electrical Installation All interconnection wires between the control, AC power source, motor, host control and any operator
interface stations should be in metal conduits. Use listed closed loop connectors that are of appropriate size for
wire gauge being used. Connectors are to be installed using crimp tool specified by the manufacturer of the
connector. Only class 1 wiring should be used.
System Grounding Baldor controls are designed to be powered from standard single and three phase lines that are electrically
symmetrical with respect to ground. System grounding is an important step in the overall installation. The
recommended grounding method is shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Recommended System Grounding (3 phase) for UL
Note:
Wiring shown for clarity of grounding method only. Not representative of actual terminal block location.
L1
AC
Supply
(Mains)
A+
L2
Disconnect
and Fuses
L1
L2
L3
A–
Control
L3
Earth
F+
F–
Armature
+
Field
+
TH1
TH2
Thermistor
GND
Four Wire “Wye”
Motor
Driven Earth Ground
(Facility Ground)
Route all power wires L1, L2, L3 and Earth
(Ground) together in conduit or cable.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Ungrounded Distribution System
With an ungrounded power distribution system it is possible to have a continuous current path to ground through
the MOV devices. To avoid equipment damage, an isolation transformer with a grounded secondary is
recommended. This provides three phase AC power that is symmetrical with respect to ground.
Input Power Conditioning
Baldor controls are designed for direct connection to standard single and three phase lines that are electrically
symmetrical with respect to ground. Certain power line conditions must be avoided. An AC line reactor or an
isolation transformer may be required for some power conditions.
•
If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the control has permanently connected power
factor correction capacitors, an input AC line reactor or an isolation transformer must be connected
between the power factor correction capacitors and the control.
•
If the feeder or branch circuit that provides power to the control has power factor correction
capacitors that are switched on line and off line, the capacitors must not be switched while the control
is connected to the AC power line. If the capacitors are switched on line while the control is still
connected to the AC power line, additional protection is required. TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressor) of the proper rating must be installed between the AC line reactor or an isolation
transformer and the AC input to the control.
Line Impedance The control requires a 5% maximum line impedance (voltage drop across the reactor is 5% when the control
draws rated input current). If the impedance of the incoming power does not meet the requirement for the
control, a 3 phase line reactor can be used to provide the needed impedance in most cases. Line reactors are
optional and are available from Baldor.
The input impedance of the power lines can be determined as follows:
Measure the line to line voltage at no load and at full rated load.
Use these measured values to calculate impedance as follows:
%Impedance +
(Volts No Load Speed * Volts Full Load Speed)
(Volts No Load Speed)
100
Power Disconnect A power disconnect should be installed between each input power source and the control for a fail–safe
Protection
MN792
method to disconnect power. The control will remain in a powered-up condition until all input power is removed
from the control and the internal voltage is depleted.
Devices The control must have a suitable input power protection device installed. Input and output wire size is
based on the use of copper conductor wire rated at 75 °C. Table 4-3 describes the wire size to be used for
power connections and Table 4-4 describes the ratings of the protection devices.
Recommended fuse sizes are based on the following:
UL 508C suggests a fuse size of four times the continuous output current of the control.
Dual element, time delay fuses should be used to avoid nuisance trips due to inrush current when
power is first applied.
Receiving & Installation 4-5
Electrical Installation Continued
Isolation Transformer Sizing
Use the information in Table 4-2 to select the KVA rating of the transformer based on the HP rating of the
control. The secondary voltage will be the input voltage to the control and the impedance should be 2% or less.
One exception to Table 4-2 is when the DC armature voltage is less than the AC input voltage. If this is the
case, use the following formula:
KVA + 0.00163
VAC Secondary
IDC Secondary
Table 4-2 Isolation Transformer KVA Selection
HP
KVA
5
7.5
7.5
11
10
14
15
20
20
27
25
34
30
40
40
51
50
63
60
75
75
93
100
118
125
145
150
175
200
220
250
275
300
330
Single Phase Power Since the control rectifies all three input power phases, operation from a single phase power source is
not possible.
Table 4-3 Wire Size
Catalog
Number
BC29D7A35-CO7
BC29D7A70-CO7
BC29D7A110-CO7
BC29D7A165-CO7
BC29D7A243-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A380-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A500-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A725-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A830-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A1580-CO1/CO2
Maximum
Output **
HP
20
40
60
100
150
200
300
400
500
900
kW
15
30
50
75
120
150
225
327
335
650
Armature
Current
Wire Size
Cont.
Peak
(Amps)
(Amps)
35
70
110
165
243
380
500
725
830
1580
53
105
165
248
365
570
750
1088
1245
2370
3 AC Input
AWG
8
4
1
3/0
300kcmil
700kcmil
1250kcmil
1″x3″ BB*
1″x3″ BB*
2″x4″ BB*
MM2
8.37
21.2
42.4
85.0
152
355
634
Field Power
Supply
AWG MM2
Armature
AWG
8
3
1/0
4/0
350kcmil
750kcmil
1500kcmil
1″x3″ BB*
1″x4″ BB*
2″x4″ BB*
MM2
8.37
26.7
53.5
107.0
177
380
760
14
14
14
14
8
8
8
8
8
2.08
2.08
2.08
2.08
8.37
8.37
8.37
8.37
8.37
Logic Power
Supply
AWG MM2
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
14
2.08
BL1,BL2,BL3
AWG
12-22
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
MM2
3.31-0.326
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
13.3-0.823
* BB is copper Bus Bar.
** Hp and kW are approximate at 500VDC Armature voltage.
Note: All wire sizes based on 75°C copper wire, 40°C ambient temperature, 4-6 conductors per conduit or raceway.
Table 4-4 Protection Devices
Catalog
Number
BC29D7A35-CO7
BC29D7A70-CO7
BC29D7A110-CO7
BC29D7A165-CO7
BC29D7A243-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A380-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A500-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A725-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A830-CO1/CO2
BC29D7A1580-CO1/CO2
3 AC Line
(Ferraz–Shawmut)
A60Q40
A50QS80-4R
A50QS125-4R
A50QS175-4R
A50QS300-4R
A070URD32KI0400
A070URD32KI0630
A070URD32KI0800
A070URD32KI0900
A070URD32KI0900 *
Fuse Rating
Armature
Field Supply (A)
(Ferraz–Shawmut)
A70QS50-14F
4
A70QS80
10
A70QS150
10
A70QS200
10
A70P350
10
A130URD73LI0450
30
A130URD73LI0700
30
A130URD73LI0900
30
14URD93TTF1250
30
12.5URD94TDF2300M
30
Logic Supply (A)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
* 6 fuses per drive.
4-6 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Electrical Installation Continued
Figure 4-7 Size 1–5 Power Terminal Locations
Size 1 and 2
Size 3
Power Connections
Earth from
AC Main Supply
D3, D4
D1, D2
Motor Ground
A+
Size 4
A–
Field
Connections
D5, D6
D1 = FL1
D2 = FL2
D3 = F–
D4 = F+
D5 = 3
D6 = 4
D7 = N
D8 = L
Size 5
Logic Supply,
Contactor &
Thermistor
Connections
D7, D8
Logic Supply,
Contactor &
Thermistor
Connections
Field
Connections
L1
L1
A+
L2
L3
L1
A-
A+
L2
L3
L1
A+
A-
L2
L3
L2
L3
THERM+ and
THERM– are
on separate bd.
in door assembly
ASee Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Table 4-5 Power Connector Signals
Terminal
L1, L2, L3
A+, A–
F+, F–
FL1, FL2
3, 4
L, N
TH1, TH2
MN792
Description
Main AC input power. A 3–phase AC contactor should be connected in the main AC power supply connections.
(AC Contactor is internal for Size 1 and 2 controls. For other sizes, use terminals 3 and 4).
The motor armature is connected to busbar terminals A+ and A–. If a DC contactor is used the contactor poles
should be interposed between the control terminals and the motor terminals.
Connect the motor field (–) to terminal F– and field (+) to terminal F+. If the motor has no field connections, is a
permanent magnet motor, or if the field is derived externally, you must disable the Field Enable [170] parameter.
An external field supply may be used for Size 2–5 controls. Connect this supply to terminals FL1 and FL2. The
voltage is determined by the desired field voltage. The supply must be protected externally with suitable fuses.
Always derive the supply from the Red and Yellow phases of the main power supply, with the Red phase
connected to terminal FL1 and the Yellow phase connected to FL2.
Size 3–5, the AC Contactor coil can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4 (neutral) and its purpose is to
provide AC power disconnection. Maximum coil inrush current must not exceed 3A.
Single phase AC power for logic circuits. The auxiliary supply must be connected directly to the incoming supply,
(disconnect only). (Logic Supply is internal for Size 1 and 2 controls).
Connection for motor thermal protection. Thermistors must have a combined working resistance of 750 ohms or
less, increasing to at least 4k ohms at over–temperature. The alarm is latched and the contol must be restarted.
Receiving & Installation 4-7
Electrical Installation Continued
Power Connections Single phase operation of this control is not possible.
Power connections are shown in Figure 4-8. (The location of these terminals is shown in Figure 4-9).
Figure 4-8 3 Phase Power Connections
L1
Note 1
L2
L3
Fuse
Connection
Earth
Note 3 & 4
Notes:
1.
See Protection Device description in this section.
2.
Metal conduit or shielded cable should be used. Connect conduits so
the use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
3.
Use the same gauge wire for Earth as used for L1, L2, L3 connections.
4.
Note 2
Start
Contactor
RE
4
3
TB3
5.
6.
Note 6
L1
L2
L3
TB1
Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L and N,
or L1, L2 L3. (VDE (Germany) requires 10mm2 minimum,
6AWG).
Reference EMC wiring in Appendix A for CE compliance.
AC Contactor is internal for size 1 and 2 controls. Size 3–5, the
contactor can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4
(neutral) and its purpose is to provide AC power disconnection.
Maximum inrush current must not exceed 3A.
This figure shows optional components not furnished with control.
Baldor Control
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Figure 4-9 Size 1 & 2 Internal Logic Transformer Jumper Locations
480
400
230
Logic Trans.
Location
Size 1
208
Logic
Transformer
Conn5 Conn4 Conn3 Conn2
Size 1 control
Conn1
Move the jumper to the
correct voltage of the
L1,L2,L3 supply input.
Note: When the internal logic
transformer is installed, FS7
on the main board is
removed. FS1 on the logic
supply board is used.
FS1
Setting
480
400
230
208
FS7
Voltage Range
460–500
380–415
220–240
208
Size 2 control
208
Logic Trans.
Location
Size 2
230
400
480
Logic
Transformer
Power
Connections
Earth from
AC Main Supply
Motor Ground
Move the jumper to the
correct voltage of the
L1,L2,L3 supply input.
(480V position shown.)
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Logic Power For size 1 and 2 controls, the logic transformer is internal. The location is shown in Figure 4-9. Because the
logic transformer is powered from the L1,L2,L3 input AC power, the jumper must be placed in the location that
corresponds to the AC line voltage.
For size 3, 4 and 5 controls the single phase logic power must be supplied by an external source. Normally
115VAC is applied at TB3 terminals L and N, see Figure 4-7 for the location. (Your control may have been
ordered with 230VAC logic power. In that case, 230VAC is applied at TB3 terminals L and N.)
4-8 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Electrical Installation Continued
Motor Connections Motor connections are shown in Figure 4-10. (The location of these terminals is shown in Figure 4-9).
Note: If your motor requires more than 85% of the line voltage as its DC input voltage, a step up transformer is
required. This is added between the incoming line terminals and the L1 and L2 terminals of the field
supply module. This connection is phase sensitive with main input L1 and L2.
Figure 4-10 Motor Connections
A+
A–
Control
+
F+
F–
+
TH1
TH2
Armature
Field
Thermistor
GND
Notes:
1. Shield wires inside a metal conduit.
2. Metal conduit should be used to shield output
wires (between control and motor). Connect
conduits for continuous EMI/RFI shielding.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Motor
Note: The control may be connected to a permanent magnet field DC motor. In this case, the field supply is not
connected and the “Field Enable” [170] parameter must be set to “Disable”.
Shunt Wound
Typical shunt wound motor field connection 120/240V or
150/300V. Consult manufacturers specific motor data for details.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
F1
F2
F3
F4
120V or 150V
F1
F2
F3
F4
240V or 300V
External AC Field (Not available for size 1 controls)
The internal motor field is more widely used, it provides up to 90% of rated AC main voltage to the field
windings. However if an external field supply is required (an application that requires more field voltage than
90% of AC main), terminals FL1 and FL2 can be used. The magnitude of this voltage is determined by the
desired field voltage. The external supply must be protected with suitable fuses and disconnect. Always derive
the supply from the Red and Yellow phases of the main power supply, with the Red phase connected to FL1
and the Yellow phase to FL2 (see jumpers in the External Field Connections diagrams).
Figure 4-11 External Field Connections
L1
Note 1
L2
L3
Earth Note 3 & 4
Fuse
Connection
External
Field Supply
Notes:
1.
See Protection Device description in this section.
2.
Metal conduit or shielded cable should be used. Connect conduits so
the use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
3.
Use the same gauge wire for Earth as used for L1, L2, L3 connections.
4.
Note 2
5.
6.
Start
Contactor
RE
Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L and N.
(VDE (Germany) requires 10mm2 minimum, 6AWG).
Reference EMC wiring in Appendix A for CE compliance.
AC Contactor is internal for size 1 and 2 controls. Size 3–5, the
contactor can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4
(neutral) and its purpose is to provide AC power disconnection.
Maximum inrush current must not exceed 3A.
Note 6
4
3
L1
L2
L3
FL1
FL2
This figure shows optional components not furnished with control.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
TB3
TB1
Baldor Control
MN792
Receiving & Installation 4-9
Electrical Installation Continued
External Field Terminal and Jumper Locations – Size 2
The position of the jumper selects the board to use either an internal or external motor field.
Figure 4-12 External Field Sensor Plug Jumper Settings
PLG1 to Power Board
PLG2 to Power Board
PLG3 to Power Board
Motor Vent Fan Circuit Breaker
External Field Selector Plug
L N 3 4 TH1 TH2
FL1 FL2
F+
F–
M1
M2
M3
Terminal Board
Field Bridge
FL1 FL2
Field Bridge
L1
L2
FL1 FL2
L1
L2
Connection
No Connection
Jumper selecting external field supply
Jumper selecting internal field supply
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
External Field Terminal and Jumper Locations – Size 3
Relocating the Red and Yellow phase wires (as shown in Figure 4-13) allows terminals D1 and D2 on the Power
Board to be used as the external field AC supply connections. External fuse must not exceed 10A.
Figure 4-13 External Field Connections
Yellow
Power Board
D1
F8
D2
D3
D4
F8 & F16 = Internal Field Supply.
F18 & F19 = External Field Supply.
Red
F19
F1 8
Red = FL1
Yellow = FL2
F1 6
Procedure:
1.
Remove the control board (2 screws secure it) to allow access to the power board.
2.
Remove the red phase lead from connector “F16” on the left–hand side of the board.
3.
Connect the red phase lead to connector “F19” located below D1.
4.
Remove the yellow phase lead to connector “F8” on the left–hand side of the board.
5.
Connect the yellow phase lead to connector “F18” located below D2.
6.
Connect L1 to D1, and L2 to D2. When using an external AC input it is important to have the correct
phase relationship on the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow)
phases directly or indirectly through a single phase transformer. L1 must be connected to D1, and L2
connected to D2.
4-10 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Electrical Installation Continued
External Field Terminal and Jumper Locations – Size 4 and 5
Relocating the Red and Yellow phase wires (as shown in Figure 4-14) allows terminals FL1 and FL2 to be used
as the external field AC supply connections. External fuse must not exceed 30A.
Figure 4-14 External Field Connections
Yellow
ye
llo
Red
r ed
w
F4
F4
F2 & F5 = Internal Field Supply.
F3 & F6 = External Field Supply.
F5
F5
F6
F6
Red = FL1
Yellow = FL2
EXL2
L2
EX
F1
F2
F2
F1
F13
F13
F14
F14
EX
A– EX
EX A–
EX A+
F3
F3
EX L1
EX L1
FL1 FFL2
FL1
L2
F+
F+
F–
F–
Procedure:
1.
Remove the control board (2 screws secure it) to allow access to the power board.
2.
Remove the red phase lead from connector “F2” on the left–hand side of the board.
3.
Connect the red phase lead to connector “F3” located near the EX L1 terminal.
4.
Remove the yellow phase lead to connector “F5” on the left–hand side of the board.
5.
Connect the yellow phase lead to connector “F6” located near the EX L2 terminal.
6.
Connect L1 to FL1, and L2 to FL2. When using an external AC input it is important to have the
correct phase relationship on the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2
(Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a single phase transformer. L1 must be connected to
FL1, and L2 connected to FL2.
M-Contactor
If required by local codes or for safety reasons, an M-Contactor (motor circuit contactor) may be installed.
However, incorrect installation or failure of the M-contactor or wiring may damage the control. If an M-Contactor
is installed, the control must be disabled for at least 20msec before the M-Contactor is opened or the control
may be damaged. M-Contactor connections are shown in Figure 4-15.
Figure 4-15 Optional M–Contactor Connections
F+
A+
F–
*
F+
*M
A–
* Optional
To Customer Provided
Power Source
(Rated Coil Voltage)
* M-Contactor
F–
+
M=Contacts of optional M-Contactor
C
*
M Enable 3
4
5
RC Device
Electrocube
RG1781-3
Note: Close “Enable”
after “M” contact closure.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Control faults may occur if the control is enabled before the M Contactor is closed. The timing diagram shown in
Figure 4-16 defines the correct operating sequence.
At Turn ON
Allow 20 milli seconds for the coil of the M contactor to energize and close the contactor before the Enable input
at C–4 is issued.
At Turn OFF
Do not allow the M Contactor to open until motor shaft rotation has stopped and the Enable at C–4 has been
removed. If this sequence does not occur, a TACH LOSS fault may be issued by the control.
Note: This example shows a “Drive ON” output to a PLC that is used to command the DC control and the
holding brake.
MN792
Receiving & Installation 4-11
Electrical Installation Continued
Figure 4-16 M Contactor Operation Sequence
Turn-ON
Run Time
Turn-OFF
M Contact
20 msec.
Enable
Motor Flux
“Drive ON”
Output
Mech. Brake Release
(If user installed)
50 msec.
Brake Set Time
Speed/Torque
Command
Blower Motor Starter Optional Size 1 and 2 controls only.
Size 1 and 2 controls can be equipped with an optional blower motor starter that uses a manual motor circuit
controller to provide motor overload and branch circuit protection for a single or three phase AC blower motor.
The starter assembly is fully wired and ready for site installation. This option offers
Branch circuit protection
Instantaneous magnetic short circuit protection
Thermal overload protection, Class 10, with adjustable trip current settings
Start/Stop/Reset switching with “tripped“ pushbutton indication
Normally open auxiliary contact wired into the drive logic to indicate “Motor Overtemperature“ trip
Installation
1.
Open the cover to view the fuse board (Figure 4-3).
2.
Position the starter assembly horizontally across the top of the drive so that the harness points
downward toward the power terminals.
3.
Align the bracket with its mounting slots on the inside walls of the drive. Snap into place with a firm
push until the tabs engage.
4.
Locate the 14 pin header for the blower motor starter connections.
For size 1, this connector is CONN 2, located at the top left corner of the fuse board.
For size 2, this connector is CONN 44 located at the right edge of the terminal board.
5.
This connector has a jumper installed at the right most two pins. Remove and save this jumper.
6.
Plug the 14 pin connector from the blower motor starter onto this connector.
7.
Use a small screwdriver to set the full load current of the blower motor on the dial of the blower motor
starter.
8.
Connect the blower motor leads to terminals BL1, BL2, BL3 (Figure 4-7).
9.
Press the Start button on the blower motor starter. Installation is now complete.
4-12 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Electrical Installation Continued
Thermal Protection Terminals TB3 TH1 and TH2 are available for connection to a normally closed thermostat or overload
relay in all operating modes as shown in Figure 4-17. The thermostat or overload relay should be a dry contact
type with no power available from the contact. If the motor thermostat or overload relay activates (opens), the
control will automatically shut down and give an Thermistor fault. The optional relay (CR1) shown provides the
isolation required and the N.O. contact is closed when power is applied to the relay and the motor is cold. If the
motor thermostat is tripped, CR1 is de-energized and the N.O. contact opens.
Connect the motor thermal wires (N.O. relay contact) to TH1 and TH2. Do not place these wires in the same
conduit as the motor power leads.
Figure 4-17 Motor Temperature Relay
Customer Provided
Source Voltage
If the motor thermostat is not used,
TH1 and TH2 must be jumpered
together to allow operation.
Note: Add appropriately rated protective
device for AC relay (snubber)
or DC relay (diode).
TB3
*
CR1
See recommended terminal
tightening torques in Section 9.
Motor Thermostat Leads
* Motor
TH1
TH2
* Optional hardware.
Must be ordered separately.
Thermostat
Do not run these wires in same conduit
as motor leads or AC power wiring.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Encoder Installation Electrical isolation of the encoder shaft and housing from the motor is required. Electrical isolation
prevents capacitive coupling of motor noise that will corrupt the encoder signals. Baldor provides shielded wire
for encoder connection. Table 4-6 defines the encoder connections to the encoder receiver expansion board.
Figure 4-18 shows the electrical connections of the encoder. The expansion board is installed in the feedback
EXB location shown in Figure 4-2.
1.
Open the top cover (Figure 4-1).
2.
Align the 10 pin connector on the board with the connector on the left side of the control.
3.
Carefully push the encoder board into position being careful not to bend any pins. All four stand–offs
should contact the control.
4.
Connect the encoder wires to the expansion board, see Table 4-6 and Figure 4-18.
Table 4-6 Encoder Connection Descriptions
Description
A
A
B
B
C
C
+VCC Supply
Not used (VCC Sensor)
0VDC
Not used (0VDC Sensor)
Cable Shield
Encoder Connector
No.
A
A
B
B
C
C
+VCC Supply
Not used (VCC Sensor)
0VDC
Encoder Receiver
Board Pin.
3
4
5
6
2
1
Figure 4-18 Differential Encoder Connections
Align the 10 pin connector to the 10 pin connector
of the control (see Figure 4-2 for location). Carefully
seat the board onto the pins until all four standoffs
contact the control surface.
To Encoder
MN792
0VDC (Isolated)
+VCC (Isolated)
Channel A
Channel A
Channel B
Channel B
Encoder Case
Encoder
Expansion
Board
Potentiometer (VCC Adjust)
Torque to 3.5 lb-in (0.4Nm)
16-22AWG
Receiving & Installation 4-13
Electrical Installation Continued
Tachometer Installation The tachometer expansion board can be used to connect either an AC Tach or a DC Tach to the
control (only one may be used). Shielded wire must be used for tachometer connection. Table 4-7 defines the
tachometer connections to the tachometer expansion board. Figure 4-19 shows the electrical connections of
the tachometer. Figure 4-20 shows the settings for this board.
Note: DC Tachometers provide speed and direction feedback. AC tachometers provide only speed feedback.
Table 4-7 Tachometer Connection Descriptions
Description
AC Tach Input
AC Tach Input
DC Tach Input +
DC Tach Input – (0VDC)
Tachometer Receiver
Board Pin.
1
2
3
4
Figure 4-19 Tachometer Connections
Align the 10 pin connector to the 10 pin connector of the
control (see Figure 4Ć2 for location). Carefully seat the board
onto the pins until all four standoffs contact the control surface.
OR
Tachometer
Expansion
Board
To AC Tach
G G G G
1 2 3 4
To DC Tach
Torque to 5.3 lb-in (0.6Nm)
Figure 4-20 Switch Settings
Calibration
Switches
SW1 = Ones calibration switches.
SW2 = Tens calibration switches.
SW3 = Down adds 100 VDC in the down position (100's position).
SW4 = Up for AC Tach; Down for DC Tach.
As shown, switches are set for 188VDC for a DC tach:
(SW3 + SW2 + SW1 = 100 + 80 + 8 = 188)
SW1
SW4
1"
SW2
SW4
10"
AC
The jumper is always used. It plugs onto the control PCB in just about the
position shown. This jumper is where the actual scaled signal connects from
the Tach board to the controller PCB.
Jumper
SW3
0
SW4
100"
DC
For full speed tach voltages greater than 200V, an external resistor of value
RE must be used in series with the DC Tach connection at G3. The value
RE is calculated as follows:
RE ohms =
(Max Tach Volts * 200)
kW
5
RE Watts = (Max Tach Volts * 200)
5 milliwatts
G1
G2
G3
G4
Torque to 5.3 lb-in (0.6Nm)
In general, the voltage output of an analog AC or DC tachometer generator is a function of speed and is rated in
volts per 1000 RPM so that:
Speed Feedback Voltage Max(volts) + Motor Speed Max (RPM) x Tach Rating
The Tach Rating should be on the nameplate of the tachometer generator. Fine tuning is performed within the
software (refer to the Speed Feedback Calibration). If the full speed feedback voltage exceeds 200 VDC, use an
external resistive scaling network to drop the feedback voltage to within this range.
For AC tachometer generators, the switch settings will be about 1.3 times greater than the voltage measured at
the input terminals G1 and G2 due to the rectifier offset. For example, for 90V feedback, the switch setting is:
Ǹ2
Required Voltage Feedback + Ǹ2 90 + 127V.
4-14 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Control I/O Signal Connections
All connections made to terminal blocks A, B and C must be isolated signal voltages. If in doubt a connection,
contact Baldor. Only shielded, twisted pair cables should be use. Minimum wire size is 18AWG (0.75mm2). All
cables should be installed using the appropriate coupling in the knock out panel, shown in Figure 4-3.
Analog Inputs Five analog inputs are available, AnIn1 – AnIn5 (AnIn4 and AnIn5 are factory set for current limits).
Connector Signal Description
Terminal
A1
0V common reference point for all analog signals.
A2
Analog Input 1. 0–20 or 4–20mA analog input speed input. Used as a unipolar 0–20mA ramped speed command
channel. 4–20mA requires manually setting Min value to 25%, Max Value to 125% and setting Setpoint Sum1, Input
2 to (–)25%. These settings will provide the proper scaling and offset to set 4mA to zero command. Any input less
than 4mA will result in a Min Value of 25% being added to (–)25% at the Setpoint Sum 1 summing junction.
A3
Analog Input 2. ±10V analog input speed or torque reference without Accel/Decel ramps. +10V = maximum forward
speed demand. –10V = maximum reverse speed demand.
Closing C8 (Digital Input 3) selects Torque Command Mode by enabling the IDMD Isolate input (Current Loop Block).
Opening C8 selects Speed Command Mode by disabling the IDMD Isolate input.
In all cases this analog command channel bypasses the Ramps Block.
A4
Analog Input 3. ±10V analog input speed or torque reference with Accel/Decel ramps.
By closing the Reverse input at C5, the direction of the unipolar command can changed. Output of Ramps block is
connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block. Various voltage range, and bipolar or unipolar commands can be
accepted by adjusting Calibration, Max Value, and Min Value parameters of Analog Input 3.
A5
Analog Input 4. Optional Negative Current Clamp. Inactive until Bipolar Clamps parameter is set to Enable. When
enabled, this input is the value of the negative current limit.
A6
Analog Input 5. External Current Limit / Optional Positive Current Clamp. A jumper is supplied from B3 (+10V Ref) to
A5 to allow full rated 150% current. When Bipolar Clamps parameter is set to Disabled, this input is the main current
limit value. When Bipolar Clamps parameter is set to Enable, this input value is the positive or
forward current limit.
Note: The settings for AnIn1 – AnIn5 are factory set but can be changed to suit your application.
Speed Setpoint
The speed demand signal can be generated using an external 10K potentiometer as shown in Figure 4-21. The wiper is the
speed reference.
+24V 9
DigIn 3 8
DigIn 1 6
DigIn 2 7
DigOut R 5
Start 3
DigOut E 4
0V 1
C
Ext Trip 2
Coast Stop 9
DigOut 3 7
Prog Stop 8
DigOut 2 6
DigOut 1 5
-10V Ref 4
+10V Ref 3
0V 1
Not Used 2
AnOut 2 8
B
Arm I Fbk 9
AnIn 5 6
AnOut 1 7
AnIn 4 5
AnIn 3 4
Control I/O
Connectors
AnIn 2 3
A
0V 1
AnIn 1 2
Figure 4-21 Analog Inputs
Setpoint Ramp Input
A1
0-20 mA or
4-20 mA Input
500
A2
A1
0V
Analog Input
A4
AnIn3
Pot Reference
B3
+10VDC
Command Pot
10KW
AnIn1
Control
0–10VDC or ±10VDC Input
0–10VDC or ±10VDC Input
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
MN792
Analog GND
0V
Multiple Speed Setpoints
Control
A1
0V
A3
AnIn2
Speed Setpoint 1 (Non-Ramped)
A4
AnIn3
Speed Setpoint 2 (Ramped)
Control
Receiving & Installation 4-15
Control I/O Signal Connections Continued
Analog Outputs
Connector
Terminal
A7, A8, A9
Signal Description
Three analog outputs are available, AnOut1 – AnOut3. A1 is the 0V common reference point.
Figure 4-22 Analog Outputs
Analog Outputs
0V
Digital Inputs
Connector
Terminal
B8
B9
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
A1
AnOut1
A7
Analog Output 1 (±10VDC)
AnOut2
A8
Analog Output 2 (±10VDC)
Arm I Fbk
Control
A9
Analog Output 3 (±10VDC)
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
C4 (Enable) must be connected to C9 (+24V) to allow the drive to run when start command is given.
Signal Description (factory settings)
Program Stop. When opened runs a decel rate set by Stop Rates, Prog Stop Time.
Coast Stop. When opened disables the drive output.
External Trip. When opened disables the drive output and creates an External Trip Fault.
Start/Stop. Closed initiates a Start/Run forward sequence. When opened commands Stop and decels at Stop Rates,
Stop Time setting.
Enable. Closed enables the drive and allows output to the motor.
Reverse. Closed changes the slope of the speed command signal from Analog Input 1 and Analog Input 2.
Accomplished by activating the “Ramp Invert” input of the Ramps block.
Jog / Slack.
If terminal C4 is closed and Start/Stop terminal C3 is open, motor will be commanded to run forward at Jog Speed 1.
If terminal C4 is closed and Start/Stop terminal C3 is closed, motor will be commanded to run forward at active speed
setpoint plus Jog/Slack Take Up 1 speed. Various Jog or Slack take–up functions Various Jog or Slack take–up
functions are commanded depending on the various settings of terminals C3, C4 and Jog/Slack Mode C7.
Jog/Slack Mode. See Jog/Slack description in Section 6 for description of modes.
Speed/Torque Select. Open selects speed (velocity) mode. Closed selects current (torque) mode.
Accel/Decel ramps are not used in Torque mode.
Start (C3), Enable (C4), Reverse (C5), Program Stop (B8) and Coast Stop (C9).
The basic Run/Start sequence is initiated by C3 (Start/Run). Other safeguards are provided by B8 (Program
Stop) and B9 (Coast Stop). Assuming that the Program Stop and Coast Stop terminals are held TRUE, then a
single contact connected between C9 (+24V) and C3 (Start/Run) when closed will cause the control to
energize the Main Contactor and when C5 (Enable) is also TRUE the motor will rotate.
When the single contact to C3 (Start/Run) is opened, the controller will decelerate the motor to zero speed at a
rate determined by the STOP TIME parameter value and the MAIN CURR. LIMIT value. If the load is to be
serviced, the control must be securely disabled and isolated, do not rely on this mode.
4-16 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Control I/O Signal Connections Continued
Figure 4-23 Run/Stop Connections
B8
Program Stop
B9
Coast Stop
C3
Start
C4
Enable
C5
Reverse
C6
Jog/Slack
C7
Jog/Slack Mode
C8
Speed/Torque Select
C9
+24VDC
Control
RE
Emergency Stop Relay (Optional)
(Shown in energized - Run position)
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
A regenerative drive can be stopped using a Normal Stop, a Program Stop, or an Emergency Stop.
Normal Stop
If the +24V is removed from C3 during operation, the control will cause the motor to stop at a rate determined by
Stop Limit, Stop Time and Curr. Limit.
Program Stop
If the +24V is removed from B8 during operation, the control will cause the motor to stop at a rate determined by
Prog Stop I Lim, Prog Stop Limit and Prog Stop Time. If +24V is re–applied to B8, the motor remains stationary
until a new Start command is applied to C3 (Start/Run).
Coast Stop
If the +24V is removed from B9 during operation, the control will remove power to the motor and the motor and
load will coast to a stop.
Emergency Stop (Optional)
When the “Emergency Stop Relay” is de–energized its contacts disconnect +24VDC from the inputs shown in
Figure 4-23. The control will remove power to the motor and the motor and load will coast to a stop. The
emergency stop relay should not be part of the normal sequencing of the system, but is an emergency operation
when safety is the main concern. If the load is to be serviced, the control must be securely disabled and
isolated, do not rely on this mode.
Digital Outputs
Connector
Terminal
B5, B6, B7
Signal Description
Three digital outputs are available, DigOut1 – DigOut3. B1 is the 0V common reference point.
These digital output terminals provide a +24VDC output signal under certain conditions. An LED, Lamp, Relay
or other device can be connected at these outputs to indicate the condition of control operation. These are
configurable outputs and can be used as required in the control system design, i.e. panel lamps, connection to a
suitable PLC. Simply connect a 24VDC relay between the output and B1 (0VDC). Be sure to use a reverse
biased diode or other noise elimination device across the relay coil, see Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24 Optional Digital Output Relay Connection
Note: Add appropriately rated protective
device for AC relay (snubber)
or DC relay (diode).
B5
CR1
B1
MN792
Receiving & Installation 4-17
RS232 Connections The keypad connector shown in Figure 4-25 is used for RS232 communications. Workbench D is the
1 SERIAL LINKS
block programming software for Windows PCs. It has a graphical user interface and drawing tools to allow you
to create block programming diagrams quickly and easily.
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
Figure 4-25 System Port (P3) Keypad Connector
3 P3 SETUP
MODE
P3 BAUD RATE
1 2
View into the connector.
3 4
A null modem cable (also called a modem eliminator cable) must be used to connect the control and the
computer COM port. This will ensure that the transmit and receive lines are properly connected. Either a 9 pin
or a 25 pin connector can be used at the computer, Figure 4-26. Maximum recommended length for RS232
cable is 10 ft. (3 meter).
Figure 4-26 9 & 25 Pin RS-232 Cable Connections
9 Pin Connector
Null Modem Cable Connections
RXD
RXD
Control
TXD
TXD
(DCE)
GND
GND
Computer
COM
Port
Pin
2
3
5
Signal
RXD
TXD
GND
Pin
3
2
7
Signal
RXD
TXD
GND
25 Pin Connector
(DTE)
Chassis
Table 4-8 Cable Connections
P3 Connector
Pin
Signal Name
1
GND/0VDC
2
24VDC
3
RXD
4
TXD
DB Connector Type and Pin Number
DB9
DB25
5
7
2
3
3
2
System Port (P3) Configuration
The factory port settings are normally fine. These settings are:
9600 Baud
8 Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
XON/XOFF Handshaking (fixed)
If the port settings must be changed, attach a keypad to the control and change the settings under the P3
SETUP menu. Refer to Keypad Operation for additional information to make these parameter value changes.
4-18 Receiving & Installation
MN792
Section 5
Switch Setting and Start-Up
Pre–Operation Checks
When the installation is complete, several things should be verified before power is applied.
1.
Be sure AC power is off at the main disconnect or circuit breakers.
2.
Measure the main AC supply voltage (to the disconnect or breaker) and verify that it matches the
nameplate rating of the control.
3.
If the catalog number on the nameplate ends with “CO1”, an external 115VAC logic control supply is
required (C02= 230VAC Logic). Verify Auxiliary power supply voltage is correct.
4.
Verify the armature voltage and current ratings of the motor are correct.
5.
Inspect all power connections (line and motor) for accuracy, workmanship tightness and compliance
to codes.
6.
Verify that the control and motor are grounded to each other and that the control is connected to
earth ground.
7.
Verify all signal wiring for accuracy and tightness.
8.
Be certain that all contactor, brake or relay coils have noise suppression. This should be an RC filter
for AC coils or a reverse biased diode for DC coils. MOV type transient suppression is not adequate.
9.
Disconnect the load from the motor shaft if possible.
10. If possible, verify the motor shaft rotates freely.
11. Verify the cooling fan (blower) is free from obstruction.
12. Verify that the external run contacts are open.
13. Verify that external speed setpoints are all zero.
Size 4 and 5 Only – Power Board Calibration
Power Board
IF CAL
SW2
IA CAL
IA CAL – Armature Current Calibration Switch (SW1)
This switch is always set to LO on Frame 4 & 5 drives of less than 500A, and HI for drives greater
than 500A.
F CAL – Field Current Calibration Switch (SW2)
This switch should always be set to HI for Frame 4 & 5 drives. The maximum field current calibration
is 30A.
HI
LO
HI
SW1
LO
Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback
When pre–operation checks are complete, logic power can be applied to terminals L and N to setup the
software parameters (catalog number C01=115VAC, C02=230VAC). For other catalog numbers (100hp and
less), the logic power is provided internally so 3 phase power must be applied at this time.
(The start up mode is defined by Parameter [517] =True for keypad operation which is the same as “SETUP
PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START UP VALUES::LOCAL = TRUE”.)
Note: To separate the various menu level designation, a double colon is used (SETUP PARAMETERS::OP
STATION).
1.
2.
Action
Apply Logic Power
at terminals L and N
Apply logic power.
Verify that the keypad and LED’s display correctly. If not, verify that the logic wiring is correct.
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
If [517] is True, local mode will be
displayed (factory setting)
MN792
Display
Comments
INITIALIZING
LED’s are all ON.
BALDOR DC DRIVE
CALIBRATING
LED’s are flashing. After several
seconds the next screen is displayed.
FORWARD
REF:
The OK, SEQ, REF, FWD and STOP
LED’s are on.
0.00%
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-1
Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback Continued
3.
Action
Apply Logic Power
Set the parameter Configure Enable to “Enabled”.
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
0.00%
Press “PROG” key
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 35A
Press “M” key
DC 4Q 35A
MENU LEVEL
Press “M” key
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Press “M” key
Access Configure Drive menu.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the Configure Enable
parameter.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLED
Press Enable Configure Enable.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
Press “E” key
Returns to previous menu level.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
4.
Action
Description
Display
Scroll to the NOM Motor volts
parameter.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the NOM Motor Volts
parameter
CONFIGURE DRIVE
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
Press “PROG” key
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
180 VOLTS
Action
Display
Press Scroll to the Armature Current
parameter.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the Armature Current
parameter
CONFIGURE DRIVE
ARMATURE CURRENT
5-2 Switch Setting & Start-Up
Comments
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done.
Set the Armature Current. Note the maximum armature current from the motor name plate and set
this value in the Armature Current parameter.
Description
Press “PROG” key
All LED’s are now flashing.
Press “E” when done.
Set the Nominal Motor Volts (Armature Voltage) in the Configure Drive menu.
Press 5.
Comments
LED’s are flashing. After several
seconds the next screen is displayed.
ARMATURE CURRENT
11.5 AMPS
Comments
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done. Max
value is hardware limited.
Note: Holding the M key scrolls the
cursor the left most digit so it can be
changed more quickly.
MN792
Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback Continued
6.
Action
Set the Field Current. Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in
the Field Current parameter.
Description
Press Scroll to the Field Current parameter.
Press “M” key
Access the Field Current parameter
Press “PROG” key
Action
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FIELD CURRENT
Description
Press several
times
Press “M” key
Access the field control mode
Press “PROG” key
Display
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD CTRL MODE
FieldVolts (Nameplate)
Input Volts AC RMS
Description
Scroll to the field volts ratio parameter.
Press “M” key
Display
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD VOLTS RATIO
Access the menus.
FLD VOLTS RATIO
0.00%
Press Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD VOLTS RATIO
9.
10.
Press to increase the value if
desired. Press “E” when done.
Set the Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to disable (see step 3).
Save the settings.
Description
Start at Menu
Level 1
Display
Comments
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.
Press “M” key
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
UP TO ACTION
Press Press to save parameters.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
MN792
Comments
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD CTRL MODE
Press “M” key
Press Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done.
Set the Field Volts Ratio. Enter the calculated ratio into the parameter given by the equation: A
setting of 90% is the maximum value obtainable, i.e. field output = 0.9 x VAC
100
Action
Comments
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
FLD CTRL MODE
VOLTAGE CONTROL
Action
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done. Max
value is hardware limited.
Set the Field Control Mode to Field Voltage or Field Current control. Refer to section 6 for more
information. The factory setting is Voltage Control mode.
Scroll to the field control mode
parameter.
8.
Comments
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
FIELD CURRENT
0.2 AMPS
7.
Press Display
PARAMETER SAVE
REQUESTED
Parameters are saved. Except the
“Local Setpoint”.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-3
Power up in Local Mode with Armature Feedback Continued
The control is now ready to run from the keypad using armature feedback.
1.
The logic power is still applied, the keypad display is normal, the motor is connected but the load is
removed.
2.
Apply 3 phase power.
3.
Verify that the keypad and LED displays are still normal, with no error messages.
4.
Set the Speed Setpoint parameter to zero.
5.
Verify that the Main CURR. Limit is set to 0.00%. View ANIN 5 (A6) parameter in the level 1
Diagnostics menu and verify it displays 0.00V.
6.
Press JOG at the keypad. Verify that 3–phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2 and L3
and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between the control supply terminals F+
and F–. If the field voltage is not correct, check one of the following:
Internally Supplied Field:
a.
Check that 3–phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed.
b.
Check that the fuses on the power board or supression board are healthy.
c.
Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.
d.
Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this
to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration.
If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be
less than the rated value due to a cold field.)
Externally Supplied Field: (not available for size 1and 2 controls)
a.
Refer to Chapter 4 Installation, Motor Field Connections for conversion details.
b.
Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.
c.
Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:
FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.
FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.
d.
Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.
e.
Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?
If set to Voltage Control, check the value of the FLD. Volts Ratio parameter. Set this to 65% to
obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.
If set to Current Control, check the field current calibration set–up, refer to “Calibration”.
7.
Verify that the OK and STOP LEDs are On, also either the FWD or REV LED.
This verifies keypad operation of the control and motor. The control may be used in this mode after the load is
connected or additional wiring changes can be made for operation from the terminal strip.
5-4 Switch Setting & Start-Up
MN792
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback This procedure assumes that the terminal strip (connectors A, B C) are wired
according to the instructions provided in Section 4 and the feedback device is properly installed. (The start up
mode is defined by Parameter [517] =False for remote operation which is the same as “SETUP
PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START UP VALUES::LOCAL = FALSE”.)
When pre–operation checks are complete, logic power can be applied to setup the software parameters. At this
point, 3 phase power should remain off, if possible.
1.
Apply Logic power.
2.
Verify the keypad and LED’s display correctly. If not, verify that the logic wiring is correct.
Action
Apply Logic Power
Description
BALDOR DC DRIVE
CALIBRATING
The local mode (keypad mode) is
displayed
FORWARD
REF:
The OK, SEQ, REF, FWD and STOP
LED’s are on.
Action
0.00%
Set the parameter Configure Enable to “Enabled”.
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
0.00%
Press “PROG” key
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 35A
Press “M” key
DC 4Q 35A
MENU LEVEL
Press “M” key
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Press “M” key
Access Configure Drive menu.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the Configure Enable
parameter.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLED
Press Enable Configure Enable.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
Press “E” key
Returns to previous menu level.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
4.
Action
Description
Display
Scroll to the NOM Motor volts
parameter.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the NOM Motor Volts
parameter
CONFIGURE DRIVE
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
MN792
Comments
LED’s are flashing. After several
seconds the next screen is displayed.
All LED’s are now flashing.
Press “E” when done.
Set the Nominal Motor Volts (Armature Voltage).
Press Press “PROG” key
Comments
LED’s are flashing. After several
seconds the next screen is displayed.
3.
Apply Logic Power
Display
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
NOM MOTOR VOLTS
180 VOLTS
Comments
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done.
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-5
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued
5.
Action
Set the Armature Current. Note the maximum armature current from the motor name plate and set
this value in the Armature Current parameter.
Description
Display
Press Scroll to the Armature Current
parameter.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the Armature Current
parameter
CONFIGURE DRIVE
ARMATURE CURRENT
Press “PROG” key
ARMATURE CURRENT
11.5 AMPS
6.
Action
Press Scroll to the Field Current parameter.
Press “M” key
Access the Field Current parameter
Press “PROG” key
Description
Scroll to the field control mode
parameter.
Press “M” key
Access the field control mode
Press “PROG” key
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FIELD CURRENT
Display
Comments
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD CTRL MODE
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done.
Set the Field Volts Ratio. Enter the calculated ratio into the parameter given by the equation: A
setting of 90% is the maximum value obtainable, i.e. field output = 0.9 x VAC
100
Action
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
FLD CTRL MODE
VOLTAGE CONTROL
8.
Comments
Set the Field Control Mode to Field Voltage or Field Current control. Refer to section 6 for more
information. The factory setting is Voltage Control mode.
Press several
times
Press Display
FIELD CURRENT
0.2 AMPS
Action
Press to change to current control if
desired. Press “E” when done.
Set the Field Current. Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value in
the Field Current parameter.
Description
7.
Comments
FieldVolts (Nameplate)
Input Volts AC RMS
Description
Scroll to the field volts ratio parameter.
Press “M” key
Display
Comments
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD CTRL MODE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD VOLTS RATIO
Press “M” key
Access the menus.
FLD VOLTS RATIO
0.00%
Press Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
FLD VOLTS RATIO
5-6 Switch Setting & Start-Up
Press to increase the value if
desired. Press “E” when done.
MN792
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued
9.
10.
Action
Set the Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to disable (see step 3).
Save the settings.
Description
Start at Menu
Level 1
Press Display
Comments
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.
Press “M” key
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
UP TO ACTION
Press Press to save parameters.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
PARAMETER SAVE
REQUESTED
Parameters are saved. Except the
“Local Setpoint”.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
The control is now ready to run the motor.
1.
The logic power is still applied, the keypad display is normal, the motor is connected but the load is
removed.
2.
Apply 3 phase power.
3.
Verify that the keypad and LED displays are still normal, no error messages.
4.
Set the Speed Setpoint parameter to zero.
5.
Verify that the Main CURR. Limit is set to 0.00%. View ANIN 5 (A6) parameter in the level 1
Diagnostics menu and verify it displays 0.00V.
6.
Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3–phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2
and L3. Initiate “Enable” (C4) and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between
the control supply terminals F+ and F–. If the field voltage is not correct, check one of the following:
Internally Supplied Field:
f.
Check that 3–phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed.
g.
Check that the fuses on the power board or supression board are healthy.
h.
Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.
i.
Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this
to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration.
If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be
lower than the rated value due to a cold field.)
Externally Supplied Field: (not available for size 1 and 2)
a.
Refer to Chapter 4 Installation, Motor Field Connections for conversion details.
b.
Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.
c.
Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:
FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.
FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.
d.
Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.
e.
Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?
If set to Voltage Control, check the value of the FLD. Volts Ratio parameter. Set this to 65% to
obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.
If set to Current Control, check the field current calibration set–up, refer back to “Calibration”.
7.
MN792
Verify that the OK and STOP LEDs are On, also either the FWD or REV LED.
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-7
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued
8.
9.
Action
Verify that C9 is +24VDC (reference to B1), and that B3 is –10VDC (reference to B1).
Select the Speed Feedback type.
Description
Display
Press Scroll to “Configure Drive” menu.
Press “M” key
Access Configure Drive menu.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press “M” key
Access the Configure Enable
parameter.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
DISABLED
Press Enable Configure Enable.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
ENABLED
Press “E” key
Returns to previous menu level.
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Press Scroll to Speed FBK Select
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPEED FBK SELECT
Press “M” key
Access FBK select
SPEED FBK SELECT
ARM VOLTS FBK
10.
11.
12.
13.
Action
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Description
Display
Scroll to “Setup Parameters” menu
Press “M” key
Access the Setup Parameters menus
MENU LEVEL
SETUP PARAMETERS
Press Scroll to Current Loop
SETUP PARAMETERS
CURRENT LOOP
Press “M” key
Access Current Loop parameters
CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CUR LIMIT
Press “M” key
Access Main Current Limit parameter
MAIN CURR LIMIT
90.01%
5-8 Switch Setting & Start-Up
All LED’s are now flashing.
Press “E” when done.
Press to change to Analog Tach,
Encoder or Encoder/Analog.
Press “E” when done.
If using a potentiometer for a setpoint, verify its operation as follows:
a.
Use the keypad to display the value of the Diagnostics::ANIN 3 (A4).
b.
Vary the setpoint potentiometer and observe the input voltage change on the keypad display.
c.
Additional Setpoint Inputs may also appear at ANIN 1 (A2) and ANIN 2 (A3).
Verify these if they are installed.
d.
The sum of all the setpoints is given by the value of the Speed Setpoint parameter. This can be
verified from the keypad display.
Verify External Current Limit settings, if used.
If using a single external clamp, A6 low (0V). Verify ANIN 5 (A6) is +10V or is adjustable up to +10V.
If using dual external clamps, A6 high (+24V). Verify ANIN 5 (A6) is at +10V or is adjustable up to
+10V and that ANIN 4 (A5) is at +10V.
Verify speed feedback device, if possible.
a.
Analog Tachometer – The voltage at G3 (DC Tach Input) should go positive when shaft is
rotated in the forward direction.
b.
Encoder – The ENCODER parameter should give a positive reading when shaft is rotated in the
forward direction. Also check the Speed Feedback parameter is reading a positive value.
Set Main Current Limit to 0.00% to limit the motor current.
Press Press Comments
Comments
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
MAIN CURR LIMIT
0.00%
Change the Main Current Limit to
0.00%. Press “E” when done
MN792
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued
14.
15.
Action
Set the Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to disable (see step 9).
Save the settings.
Description
Start at Menu
Level 1
Press Display
Comments
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.
Press “M” key
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
UP TO ACTION
Press Press to save parameters.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
16.
PARAMETER SAVE
REQUESTED
Parameters are saved. Except the
“Local Setpoint”.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
With +24V present at terminals B8 and B9 (Program Stop and Coast Stop), do the following:
a.
Apply the “Start/Run” command to C3. The main 3–phase contactor should pull–in and remain
energized, (it may de–energize almost immediately due to the 3–phase fail alarm).
b.
Remove the “Start/Run” command from C3. The main 3–phase contactor should drop–out and
remain de–energized.
If the above sequence does not function, remove the Logic power and check start/stop sequencing
and contactor wiring.
If the contactor remains energized for an extended time during this check, the controller will detect
that 3–phase is not connected and switch off the contactor, and the 3–phase alarm is displayed.
The main contactor should never be operated by any means other than the drive internal controls,
nor should any additional circuitry be placed around the contactor coil circuit.
Do not continue unless the Start / Stop circuits are working correctly.
If any problems were found during step 16, correct them or contact Baldor before continuing.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Apply 3 phase power.
Verify that the keypad and LED displays are still normal with no error messages.
Set the Speed Setpoint parameter to zero.
Verify that the Main CURR. Limit is set to 0.00%. View ANIN 5 (A6) parameter in the level 1
Diagnostics menu and verify it displays 0.00V.
Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3–phase mains is applied to Power Terminals L1, L2
and L3. Initiate “Enable” (C4) and immediately check that the correct field voltage appears between
the control supply terminals F+ and F–. If the field voltage is not correct, check one of the following:
Internally Supplied Field:
c.
Check that 3–phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor is closed.
d.
Check that the fuses on the power board or supression board are healthy.
e.
Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.
f.
Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value of the FLD. VOLTS RATIO parameter. Set this
to 65% to obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration.
If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The field current may initially be
less than the rated value due to a cold field.)
Externally Supplied Field: (not available for size 1)
a.
Refer to Chapter 4 Installation, Motor Field Connections for conversion details.
b.
Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals FL1 and FL2.
c.
Check the phasing of voltage applied to FL1 and FL2:
FL1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power terminal L1.
FL2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.
d.
Verify the Field Enable parameter is set to Enable.
MN792
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-9
e.
Is the FLD CTRL Mode parameter set to Voltage Control or Current Control?
If set to Voltage Control, check the value of the FLD. Volts Ratio parameter. Set this to 65% to
obtain 300V fields from 460V lines.
If set to Current Control, check the field current calibration set–up, refer to “Calibration”.
22. Verify that the OK and STOP LEDs are On, also either the FWD or REV LED. Note that all external
interlocks that affect the Enable input C4 will affect the operation of the drive. Verify their connections
and operation.
23. If the Setup Parameters::Standstill::Standstill Logic parameter is Enabled, temporarily set it to
Disabled.
Be ready to stop the control should the motor try to over speed.
24. Set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the Speed Setpoint is 5%, 0.5V at setpoint input.
25. Set Configure Dive::Configure Enable parameter to Enable.
26. Set the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter to ARM VOLTS FBK (because it is hard–wired and
therefore the sign will be correct).
27. Slowly increase the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter to a maximum of 20%. The motor should begin to
rotate if all connections are made correctly. The motor speed will settle at 5% of full speed if the
motor is unloaded. Check the feedback from the Tach or Encoder using the appropriate Diagnostic
menu.
If the motor does not rotate, check the Current Feedback parameter to verify that current is flowing
into the armature. If no current is flowing, disconnect all power and check the armature connections.
28. Stop the drive. Restore the correct Speed FBK Select parameter (if other than ARM Volts FBK) and
perform the same test again.
29. If the test was successful perform a Parameter Save and continue with step 31.
If just direction of rotation is wrong, perform a or b “Reversed Connections”.
a.
Reversed Connections – Analog Tachometer:
Open the main contactor and switch off all supplies, then correct the connections.
If the motor rotates in the correct direction, reverse the tachometer connections only.
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, reverse the field connections only.
If the motor still runs out of control, check the tachometer and the wiring continuity.
b.
Reversed Connections – Encoder
Open the main contactor.
If the motor rotates in the correct direction, change the Configure Drive::Encoder Sign
parameter.
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, disconnect all power to the Control then reverse the
field connections only.
c.
Apply power (logic power then 3 phase power) and repeat step 29.
d.
If the drive trips on speed feedback alarm with tachometer feedback of the correct polarity,
check the armature voltage calibration. Check the SPEED FBK SELECT. This could be set
incorrectly allowing the drive to run open loop.
30. If 5% speed is exceeded and the motor continues to accelerate a reversed connection is implied,
decrease the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter to zero.
Do not continue unless the control and motor are working correctly.
If any problems were found during these steps, correct them or contact Baldor before continuing.
5-10 Switch Setting & Start-Up
MN792
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued
Note: Reverse Operation is possible with the Series 30 REGEN Drives only.
31. With the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter set to 20% or the level required to achieve rotation, set the
value of the Speed Setpoint to 10%, 1.0V at setpoint input. The motor will accelerate to this speed
setting.
32. Adjust the Zero Speed parameter (Ensure Standstill is Disabled).
a.
Non–REGEN, non–reversing applications – Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and
adjust the Zero Speed Offset parameter until the shaft is just rotating then reduce level until the
shaft stops.
b.
REGEN, non–reversing applications – Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and adjust
the Zero Speed Offset parameter for minimum shaft rotation. (Series 30 REGEN Drives only).
c.
REGEN, reversing applications – Set the Zero Speed Offset parameter to balance maximum
speed in forward and reverse directions. (Series 30 REGEN Drives only).
You can set the Standstill Logic parameter to Enable if a stationary shaft is required.
33. For reversing applications set the value of the Speed Setpoint to –10% and check that motor runs in
the reverse direction.
34. Gradually increase the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the Speed Setpoint (Diagnostic menu) is
at maximum. Verify that shaft speed is correct. If fine adjustment is required, adjust the calibration
as appropriate to the speed feedback selection:
a.
Armature Voltage feedback has a +2/–10% trim, greater changes outside this range require a
change of the calibration switches.
b.
Analog tachometer has a +2/–10% trim, greater changes outside this range require a change of
the calibration switches.
c.
An Encoder should give an absolute rotational speed for which adjustment is unnecessary .
Adjustment for Field Weakening.
If the drive is to run with a top speed greater than the base speed, “field weakening” is used to achieve the top
speed. The field must be operating in Current Control mode. Select Current Control in the
Configure Drive::FLD CTRL Mode parameter.
Note: Field weakening cannot be used if you have Armature Voltage feedback selected. Adjust the maximum
armature volts to the required scaled level by setting the MAX VOLTS parameter.
1.
Operate the control at base speed and verify the motor volts are correct.
2.
In the Level 4 FLD WEAK VARS menu, verify that field weakening is selected (FIELD WEAK
ENABLE) and that the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter is set appropriately.
3.
Increase the speed above the base speed. Verify that the armature volts remain constant while the
field current reduces.
4.
Gradually increase to maximum speed. Monitor the armature volts at maximum speed. If necessary,
trim the speed feedback as previously detailed in Step 34 a, b or c.
5.
Adjust the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter to the appropriate setting to limit maximum motor speed.
PROCEED WITH CARE – Make Small Adjustments.
6.
IR COMPENSATION (CALIBRATION function block) is also used in field weakening applications to
improve dynamic response and speed holding stability. Set the IR Compensation as follows
a.
Set Field Enable to Disabled (Field Control function block).
b.
Start the drive with a 5% speed command and ensure the ACTUAL POS I LIMIT is 100%
(diagnostic). This should stall the drive at zero speed and cause it to pass 100% current.
c.
Monitor the BACK EMF diagnostic parameter and note the value (typically anything up to 17%
is normal).
d.
Stop the drive and enter this value into IR Compensation parameter and repeat the test to
ensure that Back EMF is now zero.
e.
Set Field Enable parameter to Enabled.
7.
For reversing drives, check the maximum reverse speed. Imbalance in reversing applications can
only be corrected by adjusting the ZERO SPD OFFSET parameter, which may be to the detriment of
operation at Zero Setpoint.
MN792
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-11
Power up in Remote Mode with Feedback Continued
Autotune
8.
Reset the MAIN CURR. LIMIT to 100% to correspond to 100% full load current (FLC).
Note: The controller cannot achieve 200% current unless the CUR LIMIT/SCALER parameter is increased to
200% (from its factory setting of 100%). Until this is done, the External Current Clamp will limit the
current to 100%.
a.
If the current limit is set higher (maximum 200%) and the motor runs into an overload condition,
the current is automatically reduced from the current limit level down to 103% FLC (continual
rating).
b.
If the motor is overloaded, the controller will reduce the current to 103% of the current
calibration. (If the motor continues to rotate it may overheat and thermal protection should be
provided).
c.
If the motor is overloaded and the current provided by the controller is not enough to maintain
rotation, i.e. it stalls, the controller will trip out showing Stall Trip alarm, if enabled.
Performance adjustment of the following Current Loop parameters: PROP. Gain, INT. Gain, and Discontinuous.
Initial Conditions
1.
Main contactor open, i.e. no Start/Run signal at terminal C3.
2.
Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to OFF.
3.
Program Stop (terminal B8) and Coast Stop (terminal B9) should be high, i.e. 24V.
4.
If the motor field is supplied by an external supply, remove the field manually. (If the field is internally
regulated, Autotune automatically quenches the field).
Note: The shaft may require clamping for certain motors to prevent rotation >20% during the Autotune
sequence. If using a permanent magnet motor, the shaft MUST be clamped.
5.
Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to ON.
6.
Close the main contactor, i.e. Start/Run signal to terminal C3.
7.
Enable the control, terminal (C4).
8.
The Autotune sequence is initiated. When complete (after approximately 10 seconds), the main
contactor is opened automatically signalling the end of the sequence and the AUTOTUNE parameter
is reset to OFF.
9.
Save parameter settings.
10. If necessary, restore field connections and/or remove the mechanical clamp.
If autotune failed – Refer to the Manual Tuning appendix of this manual.
1.
The keypad displays the message AUTOTUNE ABORTED.
The Autotune sequence is aborted causing the main contactor to drop out if any of the Initial
Conditions are not present, or if the Autotune sequence times out (after 2 minutes).
2.
The Operator Station displays the message AUTOTUNE ERROR.
The Autotune sequence is suspended causing the main contactor to drop out if the motor speed
feedback is greater than 20% of rated speed, or the field current exceeds 6% of rated field current.
5-12 Switch Setting & Start-Up
MN792
Speed Loop Adjustment You will need to adjust the Speed Loop for your application although in most cases the factory
1.
2.
settings are acceptable. The optimum Speed Loop performance is achieved by adjusting the
PROP. Gain and INT. Time CONST. parameters.
Produce a small step–change to the speed setpoint and observe the response on the tachometer
feedback or analog output set to speed feedback.
Adjust PROP. Gain and INT. Time CONST. parameters until you have rapid change of speed
feedback between the setpoint values with minimum overshoot.
Incorrect Speed Response
Speed
Incorrect Speed Response
Speed
Correct Response
Speed
4%
Time
Underdamped response
causing overshoot or ringing
Time
Overdamped response
Time
Critically damped response with no
more than 4% of max speed from 1st
overshoot to first undersoot.
Starting and Stopping Methods
A Series 29 “non–regenerative” (2–quadrant) control coasts to a stop when the current demand reverses. A
Series 30 “regenerative” (4–quadrant) control can stop faster because it uses energy from the load, i.e. reverse
current is allowed to flow. The normal Stop and Program Stop are only relevant for a “regenerative” controller.
The parameters Stop Time and PROG Stop Time have associated timers which initiate a Coast Stop after the
timed period. The Coast Stop has direct control of the Run relay with no intervening electronics. All associated
parameters can be found in the Setup Parameters::Stop Rates menu.
MN792
Terminal
B8
Description
Program Stop
B9
C3
Parameter
PROG STOP TIME
Coast Stop
Function
Motor decelerates at
Program Stop rate
Motor coasts to rest
Start/Run
(Normal Stop)
Motor decelerates at
Normal Stop rate
STOP TIME
Priority
Overrides Normal Stop
Overrides Program Stop
and Normal Stop
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-13
Starting and Stopping Methods Continued
Normal Stop
Action – Remove 24V from Terminal C3 to stop. The motor speed is brought to zero in a time defined by the
Stop Time parameter.
Normal Stop
Speed Setpoint (100%)
Control Signals
Start/Run (C3)
t
0%
Speed Demand
Speed Demand
100% = Speed Setpoint
t
0%
Stop Time (10 Seconds)
Speed Feedback
Actual Speed
Actual stopping rate depends
on load inertia, motor hp, and
overload capability of the drive.
=Speed Setpoint
Drive is disabled below stop
zero speed if set > 0.25%
Stop Zero
Speed (2%)
t
0%
Enable
0%
Time Out in Normal Stop
t
Start/Run (C3)
t
0%
Speed Demand
Speed Demand
Speed Setpoint
t
0%
=Speed Setpoint
Actual Speed
0%
5-14 Switch Setting & Start-Up
t
Drive Enable = Disabled
Speed Setpoint
Control Signals
Drive remains enabled for contactor
delay if stop zero speed < 0.25%
Drive Enable = Enabled
(Display Diagnostic)
Stop Zero Speed (2%)
Contactor will not drop out if
Speed Feedback > Stop Zero Speed
when stop limit timed out
t
Stop Limit (60.0 Seconds)
MN792
Starting and Stopping Methods Continued
Program Stop (terminal B8)
Action – Remove 24V from Terminal B8 to stop. The motor speed is brought to zero by conditions defined in
PROG. Stop Time (ramp rate) and PROG. Stop I Limit parameters.
Program Stop Timing
Speed Setpoint (100%)
Control Signals
Program Stop
0%
Speed Demand
LED
Off
LED On (Program Stop False)
(Program Stop is a latched funtion)
Speed Demand
100% = Speed Setpoint
t
0%
Prog Stop Time
(0.1 Seconds)
Speed Feedback
Actual Speed
t
Current Limit set by
PROG Stop I Limit (100%)
=Speed Setpoint
Actual stopping rate depends
on load inertia, motor hp, and
overload capability of the drive.
Stop Zero
Speed (2%)
0%
t
Drive is disabled and contactor
turns off below Stop Zero Speed
Time Out in Program Stop
Speed Setpoint
Control Signals
Program Stop
0%
LED
Off
LED On (Program Stop False)
t
Speed Demand
Speed Demand
Speed Setpoint
t
0%
Speed Feedback
Actual Speed
0%
Enable
MN792
Speed Setpoint
Stop Zero
Speed (2%)
Contactor will not drop out if Speed
Feedback > Stop Zero Speed when
stop limit timed out
t
Prog Stop Limit
(60.0 Seconds)
Drive Run LED
and Start Contactor
0% Drive Enable = Enabled
Drive Run LED and Start Contactor
Drive Enable = Disabled
t
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-15
Starting and Stopping Methods Continued
Coast to Stop (terminal B9)
Action – Remove 24V from Terminal B8 to stop. The motor speed is brought to zero by conditions defined in the
PROG. Stop Time (ramp rate) and PROG. Stop I Limit parameters.
The control output is automatically quenched and the contactor is opened. The motor coasts to a stop. The
motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor and load inertia – the drive does not control the motion.
Standstill
Standstill logic inhibits rotation during Zero Speed demand. If the drive speed is less than the zero speed
threshold [12] and Standstill Logic [11] is enabled, the speed and current loops are disabled to prevent shaft
oscillation around zero speed.
Trip Condition
When a trip condition is detected, the motor coasts to a stop. The motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor
and load inertia. The control cannot be enabled until the trip condition has been cleared and successfully reset.
Normal Starting Method
To achieve a normal start, two actions must occur:
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Enable).
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start).
The Control will not start if there are alarms present, or if Terminals B8 (Program Stop) or B9 (Coast Stop) are
low, 0V. Ensure that Program Stop and Coast Stop are valid before Start/Run is applied.
Advanced Starting Methods
Jog
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Enable).
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C6 (Jog Mode)
The Control will not start if there are alarms present. The control can be started using JOG SPEED 1, JOG
SPEED 2. Also refer to the STOP RATES function block: CONTACTOR DELAY parameter is used to prevent
multiple operations of the main contactor from rapid use of the Jog switch. Refer to Section 6 JOG/SLACK for
more information.
Crawl
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start).
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C6 (Jog Mode)
The Control will not start if there are alarms present. Start the control using a crawl speed, in Forward. Refer to
Section 6 JOG/SLACK for more information.
5-16 Switch Setting & Start-Up
MN792
Upload/Download Procedure (UDP)
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
DUMP MMI (TX)
UDP XFER (RX)
UDP XFER (TX)
MN792
Upload
This procedure will transfer the parameters from a file at the host computer to the non–volatile memory of the
Control. This information is written directly to EEPROM, so all the drive’s settings are overwritten. The
procedure is as follows:
1.
Verify the Control is properly connected to the PC.
2.
Use a standard communications software package installed at the PC. Set the COM port for 9600, 8,
1, None. Prepare the PC communications software to send a standard ASCII text file.
3.
Set the Serial Links::System Port (P3)::P3 Setup::Mode parameter to DISABLE.
4.
Start the upload. Use the keypad and select Serial Links::System Port (P3)::UDP XFER (RX) and
press the UP () key, when instructed to start the upload.
5.
When the keypad display shows RECEIVING, begin the file transfer.
6.
The file ends in a :00000001FF which the Control uses to close the file.
7.
As indicated, reset the Control by pressing the E key.
Download
This procedure will transfer the parameters from the Control to a file at the host computer. The procedure is as
follows:
1.
Verify the Control is properly connected to the PC.
2.
Use a standard communications software package installed at the PC. Set the COM port for 9600, 8,
1, None. Prepare the software to receive a standard ASCII text file (Capture mode); use the file
extension .UDP to differentiate it from .MMI format files.
3.
Perform a PARAMETER SAVE of the Control’s settings. This ensures the Dump matches the
Control’s settings, (the listing is of the Control’s currently saved settings, i.e. held in EEPROM).
4.
Set the Serial Links::System Port (P3)::P3 Setup::Mode parameter to DISABLE.
5.
Start the download at the Control by selecting Serial Links::System Port (P3)::UDP XFER ((TX) on
the keypad and pressing the UP () key, when instructed.
6.
The file ends in a Ctrl–z. With some software packages this automatically closes the downloaded file.
If this is not the case, when the Control indicates it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling
text, close the file at your PC. The last line should read :00000001FF
7.
The ASCII file can now be stored like any other file on your disk drive.
Switch Setting & Start-Up 5-17
DUMP ProcedureThis procedure will transfer the control’s settings in a text format that is clear and easy to read.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Verify the Control is properly connected to the PC.
Use a standard communications software package installed at the PC. Set the COM port for 9600, 8,
1, None. Prepare the PC communications software to receive a standard ASCII text file (Capture
mode); use the file extension .UDP to differentiate it from .MMI format files.
Perform a PARAMETER SAVE of the Control’s settings. This ensures the Dump matches the
Control’s settings, (the listing is of the saved settings held in EEPROM).
Set the Serial Links::System Port (P3)::P3 Setup::Mode parameter to DISABLE.
Start downloading on the Control by selecting Serial Links::System Port (P3)::Dump MMI (TX) on the
keypad and pressing the UP () key, when instructed.
The file ends in a Ctrl–z. With some packages this automatically closes the file but if this is not the
case, when the Control says it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling text, close the file.
The ASCII file can now be stored like any other file on your disk drive.
The following partial file was produced by performing a MMI DUMP (TX) to a PC, as described above. The file
shows the Control default settings.
When printing this file, it is useful to select a Mono spaced font, such as Courier, so the text columns line–up.
Note that in the list shown, ‘menus’ have been highlighted (bold) to make the list easier to use.
DIGITAL DC DRIVE
ISSUE:X.X
..MENU LEVEL
....DIAGNOSTICS
......SPEED DEMAND
......SPEED FEEDBACK
......SPEED ERROR
......CURRENT DEMAND
......CURRENT FEEDBACK
......POS. I CLAMP
......NEG. I CLAMP
......ACTUAL POS I LIM
......ACTUAL NEG I LIM
......INVERSE TIME O/P
......AT CURRENT LIMIT
......AT ZERO SPEED
......AT ZERO SETPOINT
......AT STANDSTILL
......STALL TRIP
......RAMPING
......PROGRAM STOP
......DRIVE START
......DRIVE ENABLE
......OPERATING MODE
......FIELD ENABLE
......FIELD DEMAND
[89 ] =
[207 ] =
[297 ] =
[299 ] =
[298 ] =
[87 ] =
[88 ] =
[67 ] =
[61 ] =
[203 ] =
[42 ] =
[77 ] =
[78 ] =
[79 ] =
[112 ] =
[113 ] =
[80 ] =
[82 ] =
[84 ] =
[212 ] =
[169 ] =
[183 ] =
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
200.00 %
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
OK
FALSE
TRUE
OFF
DISABLED
STOP
DISABLED
0.00 %
Example only
5-18 Switch Setting & Start-Up
MN792
Section 6
Programming
Overview
The shipping configuration allows the user to start up and run a DC motor in simple speed control. The flexibility
is having the ability to change configuration and to tune the control for optimum performance. The parameters
most frequently adjusted for tuning and performance are in the Setup Parameters menu. They are categorized
by submenus within the overall software block diagram.
This chapter describes each of these parameters.
You can set the parameter values within the Setup Parameters submenu (keypad) or by using a Workbench D
(see Manual MN794). You can also configure the drive or connect and reconnect signals between drive function
blocks and I/O terminals from the keypad or Workbench D. Parameters in this section are in the order of the
keypad submenu.
The drive’s parameters and function block inputs and outputs are defined as either a percentage if they are
continuous, or as boolean value (1 or 0) if they are discrete. Depending on how the drive is configured, these
parameters can represent physical entities such as motor speed or current. Connecting inputs or outputs to
software function blocks or to real world signals defines what the function block inputs or outputs represent. For
example, the output (Destination Tag) from Raise/Lower can represent current demand if sent to the current
loop or a speed setpoint if sent to the speed loop.
Menu System
The menu system is divided into nine major selections, shown in Table 6-1. Each selection has a structure of
menus (Figure 6-1). At the keypad, press “M” to access the menus. Then press the or key to scroll
through the menus. Refer to section 7 for more information on the keypad and menus.
Table 6-1 Keypad Display of the Main Menus
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Press “PROG” key
Display
FORWARD
REF:
Comments
0.00%
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 15A
Press “M”
DC 4Q 15A
MENU LEVEL
Press “M”
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press “M” key to access Diagnostic
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
SETUP PARAMETERS
Press “M” key to access Setup
Parameters menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
Press “M” key to access Password
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
ALARM STATUS
Press “M” key to access Alarm Status
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
MENUS
Press “M” key to access Menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
SERIAL LINKS
Press “M” key to access Serial Links
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
Press “M” key to access System
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Press “M” key to access Configure
Drive menus.
Menu Navigation
Remember, press “E” to return to the previous level of menus. Press “M” to enter the next level of menus.
Press the or key to go to the previous or next menu item at the same level.
MN792
Programming 6-1
Parameter Types
Each drive parameter is associated with a unique address, or “tag.” When “connecting” any parameter to drive
inputs, outputs, or links, this tag is designated as the source or destination address. These drive parameters are
listed by tag number, parameter name and menu group name in the appendix of this manual. There are only
two types of parameters: logic or value.
Logic
Logic parameters are boolean – or either On (1) or Off (0). The keypad displays logic signals in a variety ways,
each associated with the On and Off state like Enabled/ Disabled, True/False, Positive/Negative, or Even/Odd.
Value
Value parameters have a range of values depending on its function. The display is formatted appropriately (for
example in percent). In all cases these values will not exceed five digits. For example, 100.00% is handled by
the controller as 10000 and 30.00 as 3000. Other value parameters can be HEX numbers, ordinals, and lists.
The ranges of these values depend on the parameter type.
Configuration Procedure
Before making any configuration changes with the keypad, you must set Configure Enable to Enabled. After
completing the changes, set Configure Enable to Disabled to accept the changes then select “Parameter Save”
to save to memory the changes you have made.
Note: Configuration changes are not allowed while running and will trip out on the alarm failure Configuration
Enabled if the drive is started while Configure Enable is Enabled.
Make configuration changes from the keypad as follows:
1.
Set parameter System::Configure I/O::Configure Enable to Enabled.
2.
Find the input or output you want to change.
3.
Change the source and/or destination tag as required.
4.
Set the or analog or digital I/O parameter calibrations as needed.
5.
Set parameter Configure Enable to Disabled.
6.
Save Parameters.
6-2 Programming
MN792
Figure 6-1
1
Diagnostics
Setup Parameters
2
3
Ramps
Setup
AUX I/O
Local Ramp
OP Station
Startup Values
4
Menu Levels
Jog / Slack
Raise / Lower
Password
Alarm Status
Special Blocks
PID
Field Control
FLD Voltage VARS
Current Profile
FLS Current VARS
FLD Weak VARS
Speed Loop
Advanced
Adaption
Standstill
Setpoints
Zero SPD Quench
Stop Rates
Calibration
Inhibit Alarms
Menus
Current Loop
Setpoint Sum 1
Serial Links
5703 Support
TEC Option
System Port (P3)
P3 Setup
Bisynch Support
ANIN1 (A2)
System
Parameter Save
Software
Configure Enable
ANIN2 (A3)
Analog Inputs
ANIN3 (A4)
Configure I/O
ANIN4 (A5)
Peek
ANIN5 (A6)
Analog Outputs
ANOUT1 (A7)
ANOUT2 (A8)
Configure Drive
Digital Inputs
ANOUT3 (A9)
Armature Current is
not displayed in menu
Digital Input (C4)
Digital Input (C5)
DIGIN1 (C6)
DIGIN2 (C7)
DIGIN3 (C8)
Digital Outputs
DIGOUT1 (B5)
Configure 5703
DIGOUT2 (B6)
Block Diagram
DIGOUT3 (B7)
Internal Links
Link 1
Full & Reduced Views
Full View Only
Link 10
MN792
Programming 6-3
Parameter Descriptions
Analog Inputs Five analog input blocks are used to scale and clamp the inputs for terminals A2 through A6.
Analog input 1 is the 0–20mA or 4–20mA input. Analog input 2 is the main speed loop input (without
Accel/Decel ramps). Analog input 3 is Speed setpoint no. 3. Analog input 4 is the negative current clamp; this is
only active if bipolar clamps are enabled; ANIN 5 – Main current limit (or positive current clamp if bipolar clamps
are enabled. ANIN 4 is then the Negative current clamp input).
Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
Analog
Input 1
3 ANALOG INPUTS
A2
[231]
[230]
4 ANIN 2 (A3)
4 ANIN 3 (A4)
4 ANIN 4 (A5)
Analog
Input 2
Calibration
MAX Value
MIN Value
Destination Tag *
[232]
[246]
Min Value
Destination Tag
Analog
Input 3
[234] Max Value
[233] Calibration
+100.00%
1.0000
[119] I DMD Isolate
[51] Diagnostic
connection
+100.00%
1.0000
Setpoint Sum 1
[309] Input 0
-100.00%
5
[52] Diagnostic
connection
Analog Input 4 – ANIN 4 (A5)
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
[240] Max Value
[239] Calibration
+100.00%
1.0000
[250]
A5
[241] Min Value
[250] Destination Tag
Current Loop
[48]
-100.00%
48
[243] Max Value
[242] Calibration
+100.00%
1.0000
[247]
[244] Min Value
[247] Destination Tag
Neg I Clamp
[53] Diagnostic
connection
Analog Input 5 – ANIN 5 (A6)
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
A6
Diagnostic connection (tag accessible from the Diagnostic
Menu) allows monitoring of the raw analog input signals
from. within the Diagnostics parameter block.
[290] Setpoint 2 (A3)
Current Loop
[493]
[249]
[238] Min Value
[249] Destination Tag
Analog
Input 5
Fixed Outputs *
Speed Loop
Analog Input 3 – ANIN 3 (A4)
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
[237] Max Value
[236] Calibration
Input 1
Diagnostic
[50] connection
-100.00%
A4
Analog
Input 4
[100]
Analog Input 2 – ANIN 2 (A3)
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
[235] Min Value
4 ANIN 5 (A6)
Setpoint Sum 1
-100.00%
100
A3
* ANIN 2 (A3) Notes:
1. ANIN 2 output [493] has two permanent connections:
a. SETUP PARAMETERS:: SPEED LOOP::
SETPOINTS:: RATIO 2 (A3) input and
b. SETUP PARAMETER:: CURRENT LOOP:: I DMD.
ISOLATE switch.
If you do not want ANIN 2 output [493] to be in the
Speed or Current Loops, set RATIO 2 (A3) [7] to zero,
and set I DMD. ISOLATE [119] to DISABLED.
2. ANIN 2 (A3) is a direct input into the speed loop/current
loop and is scanned synchronously with the current
loop (typically every 3.33ms rather than every 7ms).
Therefore ANIN 2 should be used for any signal whose
response is critical.
3. Other tags can be connected to ANIN 2 output [493] for
access to the calibrated final value of ANIN 2.
Factory Setting
+100.00%
1.0000
[246]
500
4 ANIN 1 (A2)
Max Value
Calibration
-100.00%
301
Current Loop
[301] POS I Clamp
[54] Diagnostic
connection
Keypad Menu: System::Configure I/O::Analog Inputs::Block Title
Block Title
Parameter
Description
ANIN1 (A2)
ANIN2 (A3)
ANIN3 (A4)
ANIN4 (A5)
ANIN5 (A6)
Calibration
CALIBRATION
The analog input scaling ratio (gain factor).
MAX Value
MAX VALUE
The maximum value of the scaled analog input (max voltage clamp).
MIN Value
MIN VALUE
The minimum value of the scaled analog input (min voltage clamp).
Destination Tag
DESTINATION TAG [Output], (except ANIN 2)
The destination Tag No. to which the scaled analog input value is connected.
The destination of Output [493] ANIN2 is fixed. It is a calibrated scaled value.
6-4 Programming
MN792
Analog Inputs Continued
Input
Description
Analog input 1
Used as a unipolar 0–20mA ramped speed command channel. Output [246] is connected to Setpoint Sum 1,
Terminal (A2)
Input 1. To use 4–20mA requires setting the Min value to 25%, the Max Value to 125% and the Setpoint Sum1,
Input 2 to (–)25%. These settings provide the proper scaling and offset to set 4mA to zero command. An input
value less than 4mA results in a Min Value of 25% being summed with the (–)25% at the Setpoint Sum 1
summing junction.
Output of Setpoint Sum 1 block is connected to the ramp input [5] of the Ramps block. Ramp invert [620] is
controlled by C5, the reverse input. When C5 is closed, the ramp is inverted and the rotation direction is
changed. This allows an Accel and Decel Rate limited command signal in either direction. Output of Ramps
block is connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block.
Analog input 2
No Accel / Decel Ramp is provided for this input.
Terminal (A3)
Used as a non–ramped speed or torque command channel. Output [493] is connected to Speed Loop Setpoint 2
and Current Loop Input. Closing terminal C8 (Digital Input 3) selects Torque Command Mode (enables IDMD
Isolate input of the Current Loop). Opening terminal C8 (Digital Input 3) selects Speed Command Mode by
(disables the IDMD Isolate input of the Current Loop). In all cases this analog command channel bypasses the
Ramps Block.
Analog input 3
Used as a ramped ±10V speed command channel. Output [249] is connected to Setpoint Sum 1, Input 0.
Terminal (A4)
Output of Setpoint Sum 1 block is connected to the ramp input [5] of the Ramps block. Ramp invert [620] is
controlled by C5, the reverse input. When C5 is closed, the ramp is inverted and the rotation direction is
changed. This allows an Accel and Decel Rate limited command signal in either direction. Output of Ramps
block is connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block. Various voltage range, and bipolar or unipolar
commands can be accepted by adjusting Calibration, Max Value , and Min Value parameters of Analog Input 3.
Analog input 4
Not active if Bipolar Clamps parameter [90] is false.
Terminal (A5)
Used as an External Reverse (Negative) Current Limit if Bipolar Clamps parameter [90] is true.
Analog input 5
Used as an External (Forward and Reverse) Current Limit. A hardwire jumper is supplied from terminal B3
Terminal (A6)
(+10V Ref) to A5 to allow full rated 150% current. Used as an External Forward Current Limit if Bipolar Clamps
parameter is set to Enabled.
When [90]=False, Analog IN 5 provides a bipolar current limit.
When [90]=True, Analog IN 5 is the positive current limit (Analog IN 4 is the negative current limit).
Analog Inputs – Inputs can be connected to any writable parameter. The read/write status of each parameter is listed in
Appendix B. (RO is read only and RW is read/write.)
Example – Using analog input 1 as a 4–20mA input.
The parameter values for Analog Input 1 can be changed at the keypad. The 4–20mA source is connected to
A2. Apply AC power to the control and observe the keypad display. The 500 ohm resistor at the A2 input
converts a 0–20mA input current to 0 to 10 volt signal. So a 4–20mA input must be scaled so 4mA = 0VDC and
20mA = 10VDC. Analog Input 1 output terminal [246] is connected to Setpoint Sum 1, Input 1. 4–20mA
requires the Min value = 25%, Max Value = 125% and setting Setpoint Sum1, Input 2 to (–)25%. These settings
provide the proper scaling and offset to set 4mA to zero command. Any input less than 4mA will result in a Min
Value of 25% being added to (–)25% at the Setpoint Sum 1 summing junction.
Analog
Input 1
Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)
Tag Parameter
Setting
[231]
[230]
Max Value
Calibration
125.00%
1.0000
[246]
A2
500
Setup Parameters::Setpoint Sum 1::
Tag Parameter
Setting
[292] Sign 0
Positive
[208] Ratio 0
1.0000
[309] Input 0
0.00%
[420] Divider 0
1.0000
[423] Input 2
-25.00%
[6]
Ratio 1
1.0000
[232]
[246]
Min Value
Destination Tag
25.00%
100
[100] Input 1
0.00%
[131]
[419]
[8]
[375]
[86]
0.0%
1.0000
Positive
105.00%
5
Deadband Width
Divider 1
Sign 1
Limit
Destination Tag
A
B
+
+
+
+
A
B
+
[86]
-
4–20mA Direction Change
Output of Setpoint Sum 1 block is connected to the ramp input [5] of the Ramps block. Ramp invert [620] is
controlled by C5, the reverse input. When C5 is closed, the ramp is inverted and the rotation direction is
changed. This allows an Accel and Decel Rate limited command signal in either direction. Output of Ramps
block is connected to Setpoint 1 of the Speed Loop block.
MN792
Programming 6-5
Analog Outputs Three Analog Outputs are available, A7, A8 and A9. A7 and A8 can be configured and the source of an
analog output signal can be read from any parameter. It is important to remember that other parameters do not
“send” signals to the output terminal. An output terminal “retrieves” the signal from the parameter described by
its Source Tag parameter. A9 is the armature current output and cannot be changed.
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 ANALOG OUTPUTS
4 ANOUT 1 (A7)
% TO GET 10V
MODULUS
OFFSET
SOURCE TAG
Speed Loop
[62] Speed Feedback
Setpoints
[63] Speed Setpoint
Power
Board
Calibration
Board
ANOUT 1 (A7)
Tag Parameter
[464] Offset
[245] % to get to 10V
Factory Setting
0.00%
+100.00%
[251] Source Tag
62
[362] Modulus
False
ANOUT 2 (A8)
Tag Parameter
[465] Offset
[248] % to get to 10V
Factory Setting
0.00%
+100.00%
[252] Source Tag
63
[363] Modulus
False
ABS
[55]
[56]
UNI
[25]
Armature I (A9)
Bipolar
Analog
Output 1
Analog
Output 2
Diagnostic
connection
A9
Analog
Output 3
Arm I Fbk
Parameter Descriptions
INPUT
(SOURCE TAG)
The source Tag No. of the output value.
% TO GET 10V (10V CAL)
This value is based on the range of the source. It can be set positive or negative to set the sign of
the output and scale the input to give a 10V output.
OFFSET
Offset value added to the input value after the scaler and before the modulus.
MODULUS
Modulus determines whether the output is bipolar or unipolar.
False allows the input to pass through to the output (bipolar).
When TRUE, the output is unipolar (will not go negative). Negative input values are made positive
(absolute value).
ANOUT 1 & 2 (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
ANOUT 1 (A7)=scaled speed feedback. ANOUT 2 (A8)= Total speed setpoint.
Armature I (A9) (Armature Current only at Analog Output 3)
Bipolar provides ±10V signal that represents armature current.
Unipolar provides 0 to 10V signal that represents armature current.
6-6 Programming
Description
+10V= Full speed setpoint forward.
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse.
Diagnostic
connection
A8
ABS
ANOUT 3 (A9)
IArm
A7
+10V= Full speed setpoint forward.
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse.
Bipolar Mode
+10V= 200% output current forward.
-10V = 200% output current reverse.
Unipolar Mode
+10V= 200% output current.
Range: 0 to 549
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: xxx.xx Volts (h)
Range: 0 : Bipolar
1 : Uniploar
MN792
Calibration Board
Power Board
Analog Outputs Continued
Example 1 – Read the field current feedback using Analog Output 1.
The tag number for the field current feedback parameter is 300.
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Enable.
2.
Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: SOURCE TAG to 300.
3.
Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: % TO GET 10 VDC to 100% (factory setting).
4.
Set SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION::ARMATURE I (A9) to Bipolar (factory setting).
5.
Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.
Setup Parameters::Calibration::
Tag Parameter
[182] Field I CAL
Setting
1.0000
[300]
ANOUT 1 (A7)
Tag Parameter
[464] Offset
[245] % to get to 10V
Setting
0.00%
+100.00%
[251] Source Tag
300
[362] Modulus
False
A7
ABS
Analog
Output 1
[181] To Field
IField
Control
IArm
UNI
[25]
Armature I (A9)
A9
Analog
Output 3
Bipolar
Example 2 – Connect the serial link to Analog Output 1.
Allows analog output 1 to read values written by an external device to PNO 58 (ASCII 3A) which is AUX I/O
Analog Out 1. The tag number for the AUX I/O::ANOUT 1 parameter is 128.
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Enable.
2.
Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: SOURCE TAG to 128.
3.
Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7):: % TO GET 10V to 100% (factory setting).
4.
Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.
Setup Parameters::AUX I/O::
Tag Parameter
Setting
[94] AUX Digout 1
OFF
[95] AUX Digout 2
OFF
[96] AUX Digout 3
OFF
[128] AUX Anout 1
0.00%
[129] AUX Anout 2
0.00%
ANOUT 1 (A7)
Tag Parameter
[464] Offset
[245] % to get to 10V
Setting
0.00%
+100.00%
[251] Source Tag
128
[362] Modulus
False
A7
ABS
Analog
Output 1
Example 3 – Connect the current demand to Analog Output 2.
The tag number for the current demand parameter is 66.
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Enable.
2.
Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8):: SOURCE TAG to 66.
3.
Set ANALOG OUTPUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8):: % TO GET 10V to 200%.
4.
Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.
Setting % TO GET 10V at 200% results in 5 volts output when current feedback is at 100%.
Setup Parameters::Current Loop::
Tag
[66]
MN792
Parameter
Current Demand
Setting
N/A
ANOUT 2 (A8)
Tag Parameter
[465] Offset
[248] % to get to 10V
Setting
0.00%
+200.00%
[252] Source Tag
66
[363] Modulus
False
ABS
A8
Analog
Output 2
Programming 6-7
AUX I/O
The auxiliary I/O parameters allow an external computer (or PLC) to control the Start, Jog and Enable terminals.
Start, Enable and Jog digital input terminals C3, C4, C6 and C7 respectively connect directly to the AUX I/O
block. Output signals are then sent to the drive start and drive enable logic and the Jog/Slack function block.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 AUX I/O
AUX Start
AUX Jog
AUX Enable
AUX Digout 1
AUX Digout 2
AUX Digout 3
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 2
Jog/Slack
REM. SEQ. Enable
REM Sequence
SEQ Status
Enable
AUX I/O
Tag
Start
Dig In 1
[161]
Parameter
AUX Start
Setting
ON
C3
C6
[68]
[102]
[227]
AUX Jog
[496]
Jog/Slack
ON
[535]
REM SEQ Enable
[536]
REM Sequence
OFF
[537]
SEQ Status
OFF
[94]
AUX DIGOUT 1
OFF
[95]
[96]
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
OFF
OFF
[95]
[128]
AUX ANOUT 1
0.00%
[128]
[129]
AUX ANOUT 2
0.00%
OFF
Parameter Descriptions
Start (C3) (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Start/Run terminal. ON initiates a start/run forward sequence.
Off commands Stop and decels at Stop Rates, Stop Time setting.
Jog (C6 is set in Digital Input Parameters)
Jog/Takeup slack terminal. If C6 = On and C7 is Off, motor is commanded to run forward at Jog
Speed 1. If C6 is On and C7 is On, motor is commanded to run forward at active speed setpoint
plus Jog/Slack, Take Up 1 speed. Various Jog or Slack takeup functions are commanded
depending on the various settings of terminals C6, C7 and parameter Jog/Slack, Mode.
SEQ Status
A status word that groups important system flags together for use by remote device over a network.
(Refer to “Remote Sequence”).
AUX Start
Software Start/Run command.
AUX Jog
Software Jog command.
AUX Enable
Software Enable command.
AUX DIGOUT 1
Software digital output 1.
AUX DIGOUT 2
Software digital output 2.
AUX DIGOUT 3
Software digital output 3.
ANOUT 1
Software analog output 1.
ANOUT 2
Software analog output 2.
REM. Sequence (REM.SEQUENCE)
A control word that allows the device to be operated remotely. REM. SEQ. ENABLE must be True
to enable this function. (Refer to “Remote Sequence”).
REM. SEQ. Enable (REM.SEQ.ENABLE)
False disables REM.SEQUENCE, On enables REM.SEQUENCE.
6-8 Programming
Start (To Jog/Slack)
Diagnostic
Connection
Jog (To Jog/Slack)
[71]
Diagnostic
Connection
[94]
[96]
[129]
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
MN792
AUX I/O Continued
Functional Description
The external device sends its signal directly to the required tag (PNO). In the case of auxiliary digital inputs AUX
Start, AUX Jog and AUX Enable, the overall input will be the result of the “AND” gating of the normal terminal
signal with the auxiliary signal from an external computer or PLC.
The remaining auxiliary outputs allow external computers to directly control the output terminals. These
connections are set in SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O.
ANOUT 1 & 2 can also be used as a “jumper” for connecting inputs to outputs. Example: Use ANOUT1 [128] to
connect Analog Input 1 (A2) [246] directly to Analog Output 1 (A7) [251].
Set Analog Input 1
Destination [246] = 128
Analog
Input 1
A2
Analog
Output 1
A7
Set Analog Output 1
Source [251] = 128
Remote Sequence Tag 536, Mnemonic “ow”, Factory setting = 0x0000
Reserved bits are undefined when read and should be set Zero when written.
Bit Number
Mask
Name
Comment
0 (lsb)
0x0001
Remote Enable
1
0x0002
Remote Start
2
0x0004
Remote Jog
3
0x0008
Remote Jog Mode
Selects Jog Speed
4
0x0010
Reserved
5
0x0020
Reserved
6
0x0040
Reserved
7
0x0080
Reserved
8
0x0100
Remote Alarm Ack
Alarm Acknowledge
9
0x0200
Remote/Remote Trip
Remote Trip (High for OK)
10
0x0400
Reserved
11
0x0800
Reserved
12
0x1000
Reserved
13
0x2000
Reserved
14
0x4000
Reserved
15
0x8000
Reserved
SEQ Status Tag 537, Mnemonic “ox” (Read Only), Factory setting = OFF (Reserved bits are undefined when read.)
Bit Number
0 (lsb)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
MN792
Mask
0x0001
0x0002
0x0004
0x0008
0x0010
0x0020
0x0040
0x0080
0x0100
0x0200
0x0400
0x0800
0x1000
0x2000
0x4000
0x8000
Name
Coast Stop
Program Stop
Disable
Run
Jog
Reserved
Alarm
Reserved
Running
Enabled
Zero Speed
Healthy Output
Ready
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Comment
Coast Stop demanded
Program (Fast) Stop demanded
Enable demanded
Drive Start demanded
Drive Jog demanded
Undefined
Unacknowledged alarm (Health Store != 0)
Undefined
Contactor in and drive ready to be enabled
Drive is enabled.
Zero speed Output TAG 17
Healthy Output TAG 12
Ready Output TAG 559
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Programming 6-9
AUX I/O Continued
Example Bit Patterns
Sequence Status
0001 1011 0000 1011
0000 0100 0100 1011
0000 0100 0100 0111
0000 1100 0100 0111
Comment
Running
Tripped, Run High
Tripped, Run Low, Enable Low
Trip Acknowledged, Healthy o/p TRUE Alarm stays high until drive is restarted.
Example Serial commands using EI–ASCII – REM. SEQUENCE
Tag 536, Mnemonic “ow”, Factory setting = 0x0C07
Remote
Alarm
Jog
Jog Start
Enable
Trip
Ack
Mode
Start Drive
1
0
X
0
1
1
Stop Drive
1
0
X
0
0
1
Disable Drive
1
0
X
X
X
0
Jog Setpoint 1
1
0
0
1
0
1
Jog Setpoint 2
1
0
1
1
0
1
Remote Trip
0
0
X
X
X
X
Reset Alarm a) 1
1
0
0
0
0
Reset Alarm b)
Reset Alarm c) 1
0
50
0
0
0
Command
ow>0203
ow>0201
ow>0200
ow>0205
ow>020C
ow>0000
ow>0300
Healthy Output Bit 11
ow>0200
Drive Enable
To Enable the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be
TRUE: REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 1.
Drive Start
To Start the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be
TRUE: REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 0.
Drive Jog
To Jog the drive in remote mode the following parameters must be
TRUE: REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 3.
Jog Mode
To select the jog setpoint in remote mode the following parameters must be TRUE:REM.SEQ.ENABLE[535] and
REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 4.
ACK Alarm
To Acknowledge an alarm the following parameter must be TRUE:REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 8.
Note: If remote sequencing is not enabled then REM SEQUENCE [536] BIT 8 is forced TRUE.
Remote Trip Alarm The Remote trip alarm is designed to signal a network fault to the drive. When using the Profibus interface,
all outputs are set to zero on link fail. If one of the outputs is REM SEQUENCE [536 ] the drive will trip after a
delay specified by REM TRIP DELAY (541). The Drive will then need a low – > high transition on ACK Alarm
and Start before the drive may run again.
REM TRIP INHIBIT [540]
REM TRIP DELAY [541]
REMOTE TRIP [542]
Disable remote trip.
Delay before trip becomes active after bit
Status of the Remote trip alarm, OK, Warning (Remote
being cleared.
Seq Bit 9 FALSE and delay not expired), Active (Trip
active, timer expired and remote not inhibited).
6-10 Programming
MN792
Block Diagram The Block Diagram parameters make the connections of input and output tags for the blocks identified on the
block diagrams of Appendix C. These connections are only executed when the destinations are connected to a
non–zero tag. If a function is not required, set its destination tag to zero. A tag=0 causes the processor to ignore
the function and reduces processor loading.
Note: Only the connections are described here. For information about an input or output, refer to the
description of that block described in this section.
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
[Block Name} I/O Signal Name
[Raise/Lower] Output Destination
[Ramps] Ramp Output Destination
[Setpoint Sum 1] SPT Sum Destination
[PID] PID Output Destination
[Current Loop] POS I Clamp Source
[Current Loop] NEG I Clamp Source
[Tag]
[260]
[293]
[294]
[400]
[435]
[436]
Factory
Value Description
0
Raise/Lower] Output Destination
291 [Ramps] Ramp Output to Setpoint 3 of Speed Loop block.
289 [Setpoint Sum 1] SPT Sum to Setpoint 1 of Speed Loop block.
0
[PID] PID Output Destination
0
[Current Loop] POS I Clamp Source
0
[Current Loop] NEG I Clamp Source
Parameter Descriptions
[Raise/Lower] Output Destination
Connects the output of the Raise/Lower bock to its destination tag.
[Ramps] Ramp Output Destination
Connects the Ramp Output of the Ramps bock to its destination tag.
[Setpoint Sum 1] SPT Sum Destination
Connects the SPT Sum Output of the Setpoint Sum 1 bock to its destination tag.
[PID] PID Output Destination
Connects the PID Output of the PID bock to its destination tag.
[Current Loop] POS I Clamp Source
Connects the POS 1 Clamp input of the Current Loop bock to its source tag.
[Current Loop] NEG I Clamp Source
Connects the NEG 1 Clamp input of the Current Loop bock to its source tag.
MN792
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 to 549
Programming 6-11
Calibration
This block contains parameters specific to the motor.
Note: Control operation is suspended and all Keypad LEDs will flash while the Configure Enable = Enabled.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Calibration – Functional Diagram
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
2 CALIBRATION
These parameters
can also be set in
the Level 1
Configure Drive"
menu.
Encoder
Expasnion Board
Tachometer
Expansion Board
VA
Armature
ACCT
From
Power
Board
CAL Circuit
Configure Enable
NOM Motor Volts
Armature Current
Field Current
Armature V CAL
IR Compensation
Encoder RPM
Encoder Lines
Analog TACH CAL
Zero SPD Offset
Armature I (A9)
SPDFBK Alarm Level
Stall Threshold
Stall Trip Delay
REM Trip Delay
Overspeed Level
Field I CAL
[10]
[24]
[22]
Zero SPD Offset
Encoder Lines
Encoder RPM
0.00%
1000
1000 RPM
To Speed Loop
Speed Feedback
Selection
Encoder
[23]
Analog TACH CAL
[59] [206] Diagnostic
connections
1.0000
TACH
[20]
Armature V CAL
[60]
1.0000
BEMF
Terminal Volts
[521] NOM Motor Volts
[21] IR Compensation
100 Volts
0.00%
[180]
[523]
[224]
[263]
50.0%
2.0 Amps
10.0 Sec
95.00%
SPDFBK ALM Level
Armature Current
Stall Trip Delay
Stall Threshold
Armature I (A9)
Speed Feedback Alarm
To Inhibit Alarms
[112]
[182] Field I CAL
1.0000
[524] Field Current
4.0 Amps
[A9]
Field I FBK
Parameter Descriptions
Terminal Volts (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Scaled terminal voltage.
Tach Input (B2) (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.
Encoder (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Encoder speed feedback in RPM
Back EMF (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Calculated motor back EMF including IR compensation.
Field I Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Scaled field current feedback
Configuration Enable
When enabled, allow configuration changes but suspends control operation.
NOM Motor Volts
Set this value to match the armature volts rating of the motor.
Armature Current
Set this value to match the armature current rating of the motor.
Field Current
Set this value to match the Field Current rating of the motor.
Armature V CAL
Trim adjustment of the motor armature volts to give exactly 100% at the required actual voltage
value (e.g. 460V etc.).
Note: Primary voltage calibration is achieved by adjusting VA calibration values using SW7.
IR Compensation
Compensation for motor IR drop to improve regulation when using armature voltage feedback as
the speed feedback. This is also used in field weakening applications to improve dynamic response
and speed holding stability, refer to “initial start–up routine”.
6-12 Programming
Stall Trip
To Inhibit Alarms
At Zero Speed
From Standstill
Bipolar
ABS
Field
ACCT
To Field
Regulator
Speed Feedback
From Speed Loop
t
[25]
Diagnostic
connection
Armature Current
0-10V or ±10V
[59] [206] Diagnostic
connections
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxxxx RPM
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 100 to 875 Volts
Range: 2.0 to 15.0 AMPS
Range: 0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
MN792
Calibration Continued
Parameter Descriptions Continued
Encoder RPM
Max motor speed when using encoder feedback.
Encoder Lines
Sets the lines per revolution value of the encoder being used.
Analog TACH CAL
Trim adjustment of the motor speed to give exactly 100% at the required actual speed value (e.g.
1500 RPM etc). Note: Primary tachometer calibration is achieved by adjusting SW1 – 3 on the
tachometer calibration board.
Zero SPD. Offset
If the speed feedback is not zero when the drive is stationary (possibly due to hardware offsets etc.),
set this parameter value to result in a zero reading from the speed feedback.
Armature I (A9)
Selects bipolar or unipolar operation of the current meter output (terminal A9).
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
The speed feedback alarm compares speed feedback to armature voltage. The alarm level is the
maximum difference between the two signals before the alarm is activated.
Stall Threshold
Stall comparator current feedback threshold level.
Stall Trip Delay
Stall comparator time–out delay before stall output becomes true.
V/F Mode
Speed Feedback > 0.25%
Current Feedback
Stall Threshold
Comparator
Range: 0 to 6000 RPM
Range: 10 to 5000
Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000
Range: –5.00 to 5.00 %
Range: 0 : Unipolar
1 : Bipolar
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
Seconds
Stall Trip Delay
Delay
Stall Trip
Overspeed Level
Speed feedback level for overspeed alarm
FIELD I CAL
Trim adjustment of the motor field current to give exactly 100% at the required actual current value
(e.g. 1.5A etc.).
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000
Note: Primary field calibration is achieved by adjusting IF calibration using SW1 – 3.
MN792
Programming 6-13
Configure Drive This menu contains many of the parameters required for configuring the drive.
The Configure Drive menu is
only available at the keypad.
Note: Control operation is suspended and all Keypad LEDs will flash while the Configure Enable = Enabled.
1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
Configure Enable
NOM Motor Volts
Armature Current
Field Current
Field Control Mode
Field Volts Ratio
Main Current Limit
Autotune
Speed Feedback Select
Encoder Lines
Encoder RPM
Encoder Sign
Speed INT Time
Speed PROP Gain
These parameters can also be set in the
Calibration menus.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CALIBRATION
Parameter Descriptions
Configuration Enable
When enabled, allow configuration changes but suspends control operation.
NOM Motor Volts
Set this value to match the armature volts rating of the motor.
Armature Current
Set this value to match the armature current rating of the motor.
Field Current
Set this value to match the Field Current rating of the motor.
Zero CAL Inputs
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 100 to 875 Volts
Range: 2.0 to 15.0 AMPS
Range: 0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
Field Volts Ratio
Range: 0 : Up to Action
1 : Requested
Range: 0 : Voltage Control
1 : Current Control
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Main Current Limit
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Autotune
Range: 0 : OFF
1 : ON
Range: 0 : ARM Volts FDBK
1 : Analog Tach
2 : Encoder
3 : Encoder/Analog
Range: 10 to 5000
Field Control Mode
Speed Feedback Select
Encoder Lines
Sets the encoder lines per revolution.
Encoder RPM
Max motor speed when using encoder feedback.
Encoder Sign
The polarity of the encoder signal.
Speed INT Time
Speed PROP Gain
6-14 Programming
Range: 0 to 6000 RPM
Range: 0 : Negative
1 : Positive
Range: 0.001 to 30.000
Seconds
Range: 0.00 to 200.00
MN792
Current Loop Allows parameters to be customized for the conventional current loop (torque loop) of the control.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CALIBRATION
Configure Enable
NOM Motor Volts
Armature Current
Field Current
Armature V CAL
IR Compensation
Encoder RPM
Encoder Lines
Analog TACH CAL
Zero SPD Offset
Armature I (A9)
SPDFBK Alarm Level
Stall Threshold
Stall Trip Delay
REM Trip Delay
Overspeed Level
Field I CAL
Analog IN 2
Tag
[18]
[16]
[17]
[137]
[201]
Parameter
Autotune
PROP Gain
INT Gain
Discontinuous
REGEN Mode
Setting
Off
45.00
3.50
12.00
Enabled
[30]
Additional DEM
0.00%
A3
[67]
[66]
[61]
+
From
Speed Loop
From
Current Profile
From Inverse
Time Overload
[356]
Digital IN 3
+
-
Phase Angle
Control
PI
+
[42]
At Current
Limit
To Speed Loop
C8
[119] I DMD Isolate
Digital IN 3
[421] Main Current Limit 200.00%
PROG Stop I LIM
(from Stop Rates)
-1
[88]
B8
[90]
Bipolar Clamps
Disabled
NEG I Clamp
-1
Program
Stop
Actual POS I Limit
Current Demand
Actual NEG I Limit
Analog IN 4
A5
[48]
NEG I Clamp
Analog IN 4
ANALOG I/P 5
A6
[301] POS I Clamp
Analog IN 5
Armature
Current
Feedback
[87]
POS I Clamp
[65]
Note 1: IDMD isolate removes speed loop demand and selects analog I/P 2 as current regulator demand.
IDMD isolate is overridden by program stop and stop to return drive to speed regulation.
Note 2: Regen mode disable prevents negative current demand. Series 29 Non–regenerative drives should have regen mode
disabled.
MN792
Programming 6-15
Current Loop Continued
Parameter Descriptions
At Current Limit (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
True indicates that current demand equals or exceeds maximum current limit.
IA Demand (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
(IaDmd Unfiltered)
IA Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
(IaFbk Unfiltered)
Current FBK.AMPS (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Scaled and filtered armature current in Amps.
IF Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
(Field I FBK.AMPS)
Autotune
This is the autotune function trigger input.
ILOOP Suspend
Reserved parameter.
Master Bridge
A diagnostic indicating currently active bridge; master = ON, slave = OFF.
Main CURR. Limit
Main current limit parameter which is independent of current limit scaler and in series with the other
three current limit blocks.
PROP Gain
Proportional gain control for armature current pi loop. this parameter is set during the autotune
function.
INT Gain
Integral gain control for armature current PI loop. This parameter is set during the autotune function.
Feed Forward
Set by Autotune but not used by the factory set I–Loop mode
Discontinuous
Discontinuous–to–continuous mean armature current boundary level. This parameter is set during
the autotune function and affects the performance of the adaptive algorithm.
Additional DEM
Additional current demand input
Bipolar Clamps
Select input for bipolar (asymmetric) or unipolar (symmetric) current clamps for the 4 quadrants of
operation. Factory setting of DISABLED means UNIPOLAR clamps selected.
Regen Mode – Series 30 controls only
Set mode for regenerative (4–quadrant) or non–regenerative (2–quadrant) operation. Do not
changed while the control is in operation.
POS. I Clamp
Positive current clamp in Bipolar Clamp mode.
NEG. I Clamp
Negative current clamp in Bipolar Clamp mode.
Note: Note bipolar current clamps in bipolar mode can cross over onto the same quadrant as
long as the POS. I Clamp is always algebraically greater than the NEG. I Clamp.
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
Current limit scaler. It scales bipolar/unipolar clamps.
I DMD Isolate
Speed loop bypass: the current demand input is ANIN2 (A3). The following diagram shows that I
DMD Isolate selects the controlling loop.
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx AMPS
Range: xxx.xx AMPS
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Range: 0.10 to 50.00
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0 : 2Q (Non–regen)
1 : 4Q (Regen)
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0 to 200.00 %
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Current Feedback
Speed Demand
+
Speed Feedback
-
SPEED LOOP PI
I DMD ISOLATE
shown ENABLED
Current Demand
+
CURRENT LOOP PI
Motor
Analog I/P2 (A3)
Digital I/P3 (C8)
6-16 Programming
MN792
Current Profile When speed control is obtained by field weakening, the ability of the motor to commutate armature current is
reduced at low field currents. Also some motors exhibit commutation limitations at higher speeds even with
rated field current.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Current Profile
100.0%
100.0%
200.0%
200.0%
2 CURRENT PROFILE
Speed Break 1 (Low)
Speed Break 2 (High)
IMAX Break 1 (SPD1)
IMAX Break 2 (SPD2)
[32] SPD BRK 1 (Low)
[31] SPD BRK 2 (High)
[93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
[33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
Parameter Descriptions
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
The motor speed at which current limit profiling begins.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
The upper speed limit at which current limit profiling ends.
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
This sets the current limit value at or below speed break–point 1, provided the other current limits
are greater than this setting.
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
This sets the current limit value at or above speed break–point 2, provided the other current limits
are greater than this setting.
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
Functional Description
Current Limit
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
Speed Demand
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
MN792
Programming 6-17
Diagnostics
This function block is used to monitor the status of the drive, internal variables, and its inputs and outputs.
1 DIAGNOSTICS
Speed Demand
Speed Feedback
Speed Error
Speed Loop Output
Current Demand
Current Feedback
Current FBK AMPS
IaFBK Unfiltered
IaDemand Unfiltered
POS I Clamp
NEG I Clamp
Actual POS I LIM
Actual NEG I LIM
Inverse Time Output
At Current Limit
At Zero Speed
At Zero Setpoint
At Standstill
Ramping
Program Stop
Coast Stop
Drive Start
Drive Enable
Diagnostics
Operating Mode
Field Enable
Field Demand
Field I FBK
Field I FBK AMPS
UNFIL Field FBK
Field Firing Angle
ANIN1 (A2)
ANIN2 (A3)
ANIN3 (A4)
ANIN4 (A5)
ANIN5 (A6)
ANOUT 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2 (A8)
Start (C3)
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Raise/Lower Output
PID Output
PID Clamped
PID Error
Setpoint Sum Output
Ramp Output
Speed Setpoint
Terminal Volts
Back EMF
TACH Input (B2)
Raw TACH Input
Encoder
Raw Encoder RPM
Raw Speed Feedback
Raw Speed Error
Contactor Closed
Health LED
Ready
Drive Running
System Reset
Speed Feedback [207]
Speed Error [297]
Current Demand [299]
Current Feedback [298]
POS I Clamp [87]
NEG I Clamp [88]
Actual POS I Limit [67]
Actual NEG I Limit [61]
Drive Start [82]
Drive Enable [84]
Field I Feedback [300]
TACH Input (B2) [308]
Encoder [206]
Drive Running [376]
Contactor Closed [83]
Parameter Descriptions
Speed Feedback (Also set in Speed Loop Parameters)
Speed loop feedback. The speed feedback value from the source selected by Speed Feedback
Select [47].
Speed Error (Diagnostics only)
Speed Loop Error.
Current Demand (Diagnostics only)
Current Loop Demand (speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the current
limits).
Current Feedback (Diagnostics only)
Scaled and filtered armature current.
POS. I Clamp (Diagnostics only)
Positive current clamp.
NEG. I Clamp (Diagnostics only)
Negative current clamp.
ACTUAL POS I LIM (Diagnostics only)
Overall positive current limit value.
ACTUAL NEG I LIM (Diagnostics only)
Overall negative current limit value.
DRIVE START (Diagnostics only)
Controller start/run command.
Drive Enable (Diagnostics only)
Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched.
FIELD I FBK (Diagnostics only)
Scaled field current feedback
TACH INPUT (B2) (Diagnostics only)
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.
ENCODER (Diagnostics only)
Encoder speed feedback in RPM.
Speed Demand (shown in Stop Rates block)
Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp–to–zero block.
Speed Loop Output (shown in Speed Loop block)
Output from speed loop PI.
Current FBK. AMPS (shown in Current Loop block)
Scaled and filtered armature current in Amps. (IA Feedback)
IaFBK Unfiltered (shown in Current Loop block)
Scaled armature current.
IaDmd Unfiltered (shown in Current Loop block)
Scaled demanded armature current.
6-18 Programming
0.06%
0.06%
0.00%
0.00%
100.0%
-100.0%
100.0%
-100.0%
OFF
Disabled
0.0%
0.2%
0 RPM
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
xxxxx RPM
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx AMPS
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
MN792
Diagnostics Continued
Parameter Descriptions
Inverse Time Output (shown in Current Loop block)
Inverse time clamp output level.
At Current Limit (shown in Current Loop block)
Current demand is being restrained by the overall current limit.
At Zero Speed (shown in Standstill block)
At zero speed feedback.
At Zero Setpoint (shown in Standstill block)
At zero speed demand.
At Standstill (shown in Standstill block)
At zero speed and at zero setpoint.
Ramping (shown in Ramps block)
If the difference between the Ramp Input and The Ramp Output is greater than the Ramp
Threshold, then Ramping is true.
Program Stop (shown in Stop Rates block)
State of Program Stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then Program Stop is false and the
Program Stop front panel LED is also on.
Coast Stop (Diagnostics only)
State of Coast Stop (Terminal B9). When B9 is at 24V, then Coast Stop is False.
Operating Mode (shown in Jog/Slack block)
Sets the drive mode to Run, Jog 1....stop, etc.
0 : Stop
1 : Stop
2 : Jog Sp. 1
3 : Jog Sp. 2
4 : Run
5 : Take Up Sp. 1
6 : Take Up Sp. 2
7 : Crawl
Field Enabled (shown in Field Control block)
Drive Field Loop Is Enabled/Quenched.
Field Demand (shown in Field Control block)
The meaning of field demand depends upon which mode of field control is in force; in current control
field demand is the current setpoint to the field loop, in voltage mode field demand is the voltage
ratio to the field controller.
FIELD I FBK AMPS (shown in Current Loop block, IF Feedback)
Scaled and filtered field current feedback in Amps.
Raw Field FBK
Scaled field current.
FLD. Firing Angle (shown in Field Control block)
Field firing angle in degrees: 155 degrees is the value for back stop (min field) and 5 degrees is the
value for front stop (max field).
ANIN 1 (A2) (shown in Analog Inputs block)
Speed setpoint no. 1.
ANIN 2 (A3) (shown in Analog Inputs block)
Speed setpoint no. 2/current demand.
ANIN 3 (A4) (shown in Analog Inputs block)
Speed setpoint no. 3 (ramped).
ANIN 4 (A5) (shown in Analog Inputs block)
Negative current clamp; this is only active if bipolar clamps are enabled
(C6 = ON)
ANIN 5 (A6) (shown in Analog Inputs block)
Main current limit or positive current clamp if C6 = on.
ANOUT 1 (A7) (shown in Analog Outputs block)
Scaled speed feedback.
ANOUT 2 (A8) (shown in Analog Outputs block)
Total speed setpoint.
Start (C3) (shown in AUX I/O block)
Start/Run terminal.
MN792
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 to 7
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx DEG
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: xxx.xx Volts
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Programming 6-19
Diagnostics Continued
Parameter Descriptions
Digital Input C4
Enable terminal.
Digital Input C5
Reverse terminal.
DIGIN 1 (C6)
Jog/Slack terminal.
DIGIN 2 (C7)
Jog/Slack Mode terminal.
DIGIN 3 (C8)
Speed or Torque mode select terminal.
DIGOUT 1 (B5) (shown in Digital Outputs block)
At zero speed.
DIGOUT 2 (B6) (shown in Digital Outputs block)
Drive healthy. Health is also displayed on the front panel LED.
DIGOUT 3 (B7) (shown in Digital Outputs block)
Drive ready to run (all alarms healthy and mains synchronization achieved).
Raise/Lower Output (shown in Raise/Lower block)
(OUTPUT) Value of the raise/lower ramp function.
PID Output (shown in PID block)
PID block output.
PID Clamped (shown in PID block)
Logic output indicating whether the PID limits are active.
PID Error (shown in PID block)
PID error = Input 1 – Input 2
SPT Sum Output (shown in Setpoint Sum 1 block)
Setpoint sum 1 output.
Ramp Output (shown in Ramps block)
Setpoint ramp output.
Speed Setpoint (shown in Speed Loop block)
Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp–to–zero function.
Terminal Volts (shown in Calibration block)
Scaled terminal volts.
Back EMF (shown in Calibration block)
Calculated motor back EMF including IR compensation.
UNFIL TACH Input (shown in Calibration block)
Unfiltered analog tachogenerator feedback.
Encoder (Diagnostics only)
Encoder speed feedback in RPM.
Raw Encoder RPM (shown in Calibration block)
Unfiltered encoder speed feedback in RPM.
UNFIL Speed FBK (shown in Speed Loop block)
Unfiltered speed feedback.
UNFIL Speed Error (shown in Speed Loop block)
Unfiltered speed error.
Contactor Closed (Diagnostics only)
Main contactor control signal.
HEALTH LED (shown in Alarms block)
State of Health LED on Operator Station.
READY (shown in Alarms block)
The drive is ready to accept an enable signal.
DRIVE RUNNING (Diagnostics only)
Drive is enabled and may make current when TRUE. A diagnostic for those parameters that can
only be written to when the drive is stopped (parameters marked with Note 2 in the Parameter
Specification Table).
SYSTEM RESET (Diagnostics only)
Set for one cycle as the drive is enabled.
6-20 Programming
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxx.xx % (h)
Range: xxxxx RPM
Range: xxxxx RPM
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
MN792
Digital Inputs Allows control of the digital operating parameters of the software. The digital input can be configured to point to
a destination location and to set that destination true or false depending upon programmable values.
1 SYSTEM
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)
Tag
2 CONFIGURE I/O
Digital
Input 1
3 DIGITAL INPUTS
3 DIGITAL INPUTS
4 DIGIN 1 (C6)
4 DIGITAL INPUT C4
4 DIGIN 2 (C7)
4 DIGITAL INPUT C5
Setting
90
0.00%
0.01%
[102]
[71]
AUX I/O
[496]
Jog/Slack
Diagnostic
connection
Digital Input 2 – DIGIN 2 (C7)
Tag
Digital
Input 2
Destination Tag
Value for True
Value for False
Parameter
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
C6
Destination Tag
4 DIGIN 3 (C8)
[102]
[104]
[103]
[105]
[107]
[106]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
Setting
118
0.00%
0.01%
C7
[105]
[72]
Jog/Slack
[228]
Mode
Diagnostic
connection
Digital Input 3 – DIGIN 3 (C8)
Tag
Digital
Input 3
[108]
[110]
[109]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
Setting
119
0.00%
0.01%
C8
[108]
[73]
Current Loop
[119]
I DMD Isolate
Diagnostic
connection
Digital Input 4 – DIGIN E (C4)
AM
Optional DC contactor
“AM” auxiliary interlock
with drive enable.
Digital
Input 4
Tag
[494]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Setting
497
Enable C4
[494]
Digital Input 5 – DIGIN R (C5)
Digital
Input 5
+24V
Tag
[495]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Setting
392
C5
[495]
C9
[70]
Parameter Descriptions
Destination Tag (Output)
The destination Tag No. assigned to the digital input.
Value for True
The value that output assumes when input is true.
Value for False
The value that output assumes when input is false.
Digital Inputs 1, 2 , and 3 (Also see AUX I/O and Diagnostics blocks)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Digital Input C4 (Also see AUX I/O and Diagnostics Parameters).
Electronic enable/quench terminal (On=Enable). If terminal C4 is used for anything other than
“Drive Enable” ([494] is not set to 497), then the enable parameter [497] must be set to ON or the
drive will not run.
Digital Inputs C4 and C5 have destination tags only.
Note: Value true is fixed at 0.01%, and value false is fixed at 0.00%.
Digital Input C5 (Also see AUX I/O and Diagnostics Parameters).
Reverse is active when C5 is true. This causes [620] Ramp Invert to revese (change polarity) of the
ramped output signal to Setpoint 1 [289] of the Speed Loop.
Digital Inputs C4 and C5 have destination tags only.
Note: Value true is fixed at 0.01%, and value false is fixed at 0.00%.
MN792
[69]
AUX I/O
[497]
Enable
Diagnostic
connection
Ramps
[620]
Ramp Invert
Diagnostic
connection
Range: 0 to 549
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 to 549
Programming 6-21
Digital Inputs Continued
Functional Description
The destination for a digital input can be any valid Tag number. This means that a digital input can be used to
select one of two values for a given parameter. It is also possible to treat the values for true and false as
destination tags from other functions or inputs. 0.00% = a Logic 0 and any other value = a Logic 1. This refers
to the values set in both value for true and value for false parameters. Inverting the digital input is therefore
simple; set value true to 0.00% and value false to 0.01% or any other non–zero number.
Input
Description
Digital input 1
Jog/Slack digital input. (See Jog/Slack description).
Terminal (C6)
Digital input 2
Jog/Slack mode digital input. (See Jog/Slack description).
Terminal (C7)
Digital input 3
Speed/Torque select input. Closed allows a direct current output command from Analog Input 2. The bipolar
Terminal (C8)
signal from Analog 2 is direct acting without any accel or decel ramp rates. Connection from another command
signal source is not possible.
Digital Inputs – Examples Digital inputs can be connected to read/write parameters only. These inputs are useful to control
logical parameters. Logical parameters are those whose ranges are On/Off, True/False, Enabled/Disabled, etc.
They can also send two fixed values to a VALUE parameter as determined by the state of the input terminal.
Example 1 – Using an Analog Input as a Digital Input
It is possible to use an Analog Input as a Digital Input to extend the number of Digital Inputs available. Again,
0.00% is regarded as Logic 0 and any other value is regarded as Logic 1.
Analog
Input 1
Analog Input 1 – ANIN 1 (A2)
Tag Parameter
[231]
[230]
Max Value
Calibration
+100.00%
1.0000
[246]
A2
[232]
[246]
Min Value
Destination Tag
0.00%
100
Current Loop
[90]
Bipolar Clamps
Diagnostic
[50] connection
Example 2 – Using digital inputs with LOGIC parameters
The factory settings allow the digital inputs to switch LOGIC parameters. These are the connections from
terminal C6 to tag 90 (Bipolar Clamps), C7 to tag 118 (Ramp Hold), and C8 to tag 119 (I DMD. Isolate). In each
case, the state of the terminal switches the destination parameter on or off by sending a 1 or 0. Since the format
of the Value For True and Value For False parameters is in percent, 0 is equal to 0.00% and 1 is equal to 0.01%.
Inverting the Input Signal
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE To Enable.
2.
Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR TRUE to 0.00%.
3.
Set Value for False to 0.01%.
4.
Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE To Disable.
6-22 Programming
MN792
Digital Inputs Continued
Digital input 1 now sends a 0 when the input signal is true and 1 when it is false.
Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)
Tag
Digital
Input 1
[102]
[104]
[103]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
Setting
90
0.01%
0.00%
[102]
C6
Current Loop
From
Speed Loop
[66]
+
-
PI
Phase Angle Control
Current Limit
Switch
Bipolar Clamps
Digital IN 1
-1
[90]
Analog IN 4
A5
[48]
NEG I Clamp
Analog IN 4
ANALOG I/P 5
A6
[301] POS I Clamp
Analog IN 5
Armature Current
[65]
Feedback
Example 3 – Use Digital Input 1 to set Speed Loop PROP Gain
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE.
2.
Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::DESTINATION TAG to 14 (the speed loop prop gain parameter).
3.
Set VALUE FOR TRUE to 10.00.
4.
Set VALUE FOR FALSE to 30.00.
5.
Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to DISABLE.
Digital input 1 now sets SPEED LOOP::PROP. GAIN to two values depending upon its state. When it is HIGH,
PROP. GAIN is at 10.00 and when LOW, PROP. GAIN is at 30.00.
Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)
Tag
Digital
Input 1
[102]
[104]
[103]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
Setting
14
30.00%
10.00%
[102]
C6
Speed Loop
Tag
[14]
[13]
[202]
[89]
[207]
MN792
Parameter
PROP Gain
INT Time Constant
INT Defeat
Speed Demand
Speed Feedback
Setting
10.00
0.500 Seconds
Off
+
-
PI
[356] To Current Loop I DMD
Isolate switch input
Programming 6-23
Digital Inputs Continued
Example 4 – Use Digital Input 1 to switch signal sources
1.
Set CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to ENABLE.
2.
Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::DESTINATION TAG to 364 (Link 1 source tag parameter).
3.
Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR TRUE to 1.29% (tag number for AUX I/O::ANOUT 2=129).
4.
Set DIGIN 1 (C6)::VALUE FOR FALSE to 1.28% (tag number for AUX I/O::ANOUT 1=128).
5.
Set LINK 1::DESTINATION TAG to 309 (SETPOINT SUM::INPUT 0 parameter).
6.
Set AUX I/O::ANOUT 1 to 10%.
7.
Set AUX I/O::ANOUT 2 to 20%.
8.
Reset CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE ENABLE to Disable.
This example uses an internal link to route two signals to Input 0. The state of digital input 1 determines the
number held by LINK 1 :: SOURCE TAG. When true, it is 129. When false, the tag is 128. LINK 1:: SOURCE
TAG retrieves the value from ANOUT 1 or 2 depending on the tag and routes it to SETPOINT SUM 1:: INPUT 0.
The signal switches between 10 and 20 percent. This is useful for switching between two jog setpoints.
Digital Input 1 – DIGIN 1 (C6)
Tag
Digital
Input 1
[102]
[104]
[103]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Value for False
Value for True
Setting
364
1.28%
1.29%
System::Configure I/O::Link 1::
Tag
[102]
[365]
[364]
Parameter
Destination Tag
Source Tag
Setting
309
0
[365]
C6
Setup Parameters::AUX I/O::
Tag
[128]
[129]
Parameter
Setting
Setup Parameters::Setpoint Sum 1::
AUX ANOUT 1
10.00%
[128]
AUX ANOUT 2
20.00%
[129]
6-24 Programming
Tag
[292]
[208]
[309]
[420]
[423]
[100]
Parameter
Sign 0
Ratio 0
Input 0
Divider 0
Input 2
Input 1
Setting
Positive
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
0.00%
0.00%
A/B
+/-
+
+
+
[86]
MN792
Digital Outputs Digital outputs can read all parameters (the same as the analog outputs). When used with a VALUE parameter,
MODULUS removes the sign from the value (so –100 becomes 100). The THRESHOLD (>) parameter
determines when the output is HIGH or LOW. The input signal must exceed the Threshold value for the output
to go HIGH. INVERTED, when TRUE, inverts the result of the output from the threshold test.
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
At Zero
Speed
77
4 DIGOUT1 (B5)
4 DIGOUT2 (B6)
4 DIGOUT3 (B7))
Threshold (>)
Modulus
Source Tag
Inverted
Healthy
122
Ready
125
Digital Output 1 – DIGOUT 1 (B5)
Tag Parameter
Setting
[359] Inverted
False
[195] Threshold (>)
0.00%
[97]
Source Tag
77
[43]
Modulus
True
Digital Output 2 – DIGOUT 2 (B6)
Tag Parameter
Setting
[360] Inverted
False
[196] Threshold (>)
0.00%
[98]
Source Tag
122
[44]
Modulus
True
ABS
Digital Output 3 – DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Tag Parameter
Setting
[361] Inverted
False
[197] Threshold (>)
0.00%
[99]
Source Tag
125
[45]
Modulus
True
Parameter Descriptions
Threshold (>)
The threshold which the value must exceed to set the output to true.
Modulus
Output set TRUE for absolute or modulus of the tag no. value.
Source Tag (Input)
Defines the source variable to control the digital output.
Inverted
Selects Inverted Output.
DIGOUT 1, 2 , and 3 (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
MN792
ABS
ABS
B5
Digital
Output 1
B6
Digital
Output 2
B7
Digital
Output 3
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 to 549
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Programming 6-25
Field Control
This function block contains all the parameters for the field operating mode. It is viewed at the keypad in three
submenus. In the Field Control menu, you select the field operating mode: open loop voltage control or closed
loop current control.
In certain DC motor applications, high speeds can only be achieved by reducing the field current (torque). This
is the constant horsepower region or field weakening region, and the speed at which it begins is known as the
Base Speed.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 FIELD CONTROL
Field Enable
Field Control Mode
Field Quench Delay
Field Quench Mode
2 FIELD CONTROL
3 FLD CURRENT VARS 3 FLD CURRENT VARS
Setpoint
PROP Gain
INT Gain
1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
2 FIELD CONTROL
2 FIELD CONTROL
Field Control Mode
Field Volts Ratio
4 FLD WEAK VARS
Field Weak Enable
EMF Lead
EMF Lag
EMF Gain
Min Field Current
MAX Volts
BEMF Feedback Lead
BEMF Feedback Lag
Field Control
Field Current VARS
Field Weak VARS
Max +
PID
Volts Back EMF Feedback
Volts Ratio
Field
Demand
+
PI
Firing
Angle
Drive
Run
Field 1
Feedback
Phase Angle
Control
3 FLD VOLTAGE VARS
Field Volts Ratio
Parameter Descriptions
Field Enabled (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Field Demand (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Field Firing Angle (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Field Enable
Unquenches Field Current Loop.
Field Control Mode Two modes are avaiable
(a) Field Voltage Control is an open loop phase angle control to give a certain voltage output.
(b) Field Current Control is a closed loop current control for accurate field control or expansion to field
weakening.
Field Volts Ratio (Ratio Out/In)
This parameter controls the output voltage from the open loop voltage control. The ratio is defined
as the dc output voltage over the ac rms input voltage. The factory setting is equivalent to a
single–phase diode rectifier.
Setpoint
Field Current Setpoint.
PROP. Gain
This is the proportional gain adjustment of the field current pi loop. The factory setting of 0.10 is
equivalent to a real gain of 10.
INT. Gain
This is the integral gain adjustment of the field current PI loop.
Field Weak Enable
Activates the additional motor back emf PID loop for field weakening (field spillover) control.
EMF LEAD
With field weakening control enabled, a PID loop is brought into operation. This is the lead time
constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop. For a value of 2.00, the real time constant =
200ms.
EMF LAG
This is the lag time constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop. For a value of 4.00, the
real time constant = 4000ms.
EMF GAIN
This is the gain adjustment of the field weakening PID loop. For a value of 3.00, the real gain = 30.
MIN FIELD CURRENT
The field weakening loop reduces the field current to achieve speed control above base speed. At
top speed the field reaches a minimum value. The Min Fld Current should be set below this
minimum value to allow reasonable margin for transient control near the top speed but not lower
than 6% as this could then cause the “Field Fail” alarm to operate.
6-26 Programming
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx DEG
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0 : Voltage Control
1 : Current Control
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0.10 to 50.00
Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Range: 0.00 to 100.00
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
MN792
Field Control Continued
Parameter Descriptions
MAX VOLTS
The voltage level at which field weakening begins. It is also known as “Spillover Bias”. The factory
setting value is 100% of the nominal value as set by the armature voltage calibration value. For
start–up this value can be set to a lower desirable level. It is advisable to return it to 100% for
normal operation.
BEMF FBK LEAD
The lead time constant of the back EMF feedback filter used for reducing armature voltage
overshoots when during fast acceleration through base speed.
BEMF FBK LAG
The lag time constant of the back EMF feedback filter. If active, the ratio of lead / lag should always
be greater than 1 to give an overall lead action (reduces overshoot) and the ratio should be less
than 3 for stable control. The factory values 100/100 = 1 make the filter inactive.
FLD. QUENCH DELAY
If dynamic braking is used, the field must be maintained for a period after the drive is disabled. The
field quench delay is the period of time that the field is maintained.
FLD. QUENCH MODE
When the field quench delay has expired, the field can be entirely quenched or put into a standby
mode at 50% of rated current or volts depending whether in current or voltage control mode
respectively. (The factory value of 50% can be modified through the “SYSTEM / Reserved” Menu
which is primarily for factory use only and requires the “super” password.)
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 10 to 5000
Range: 10 to 5000
Range: 0.0 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0 : Quench
1 : Standby
Functional Description
Field
Enabled
Field Control
Tag# Parameter
[170] Field Enable
[209] FLD CTRL Mode
Factory Setting
Enabled
Voltage
Supply Alarms OK
[169]
Field Voltage VARS
[210] Ratio Out/In 90.00%
Field Regulator RMS Volts
[181]
Field Current VARS
[173] PROP Gain
[172] INT Gain
-
0.10
1.28
[183]
Field Demand
+
+
[171] Setpoint
Field Weak VARS
[174] FLD Weak Enable
[175] EMF Lead
[176] EMF Lag
[177] EMF Gain
[191] BEMF FBK Lead
[192] BEMF FBK Lag
[178] MAX Volts
[179] MIN FLD Current
MN792
PI
Clamp
100.00%
100.00%
+
Phase Angle
Control
Standby
Quench
-
100.00%
-
+
X/2
Disabled
2.00
40.00
0.30
100
100
Motor
BEMF Filter
[60]
+
PI
[184]
Field
Firing
Angle
Tag# Parameter
Factory Setting
[186] Field Quench Mode Quench
[185] Field Quench Delay 0.00 Sec
Drive
Enable
Output In Voltage Mode
Supply Ratio Field Output
410V
460V 90%
300V
460V 67%
200V
230V 90%
230V 67%
150V
Programming 6-27
Alarms
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
This function block provides a view into the present and past trip conditions, and allows some trips to be
disabled. It is viewed at the keypad in three menus.
1 ALARM STATUS
2 INHIBIT ALARMS)
Field Fail
5703 RCV Error
Stall Trip
Trip Reset
Speed FBK Alarm
Encoder Alarm
REM Trip Inhibit
Last Alarm
Health Word
Health Store
Stall Trip
Remote Trip
Field current less than 6%.
(Field fail threshold is 6% in Current
control, 12% in Voltage control.)
5703 in Slave Mode and COMMS Error
From Calibration Stall Delay and Stall Threshold
From Calibration SPD FBK Alarm Level
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CALIBRATION
Inhibit Alarms
Encoder Feedback Selected and Error Detected
Drive Start
REM Trip Delay
Tag
[19]
Setting
Enabled
[111] 5703 RCV Error
Enabled
[28]
Stall Trip
Inhibited
[81]
Speed FBK Alarm
Enabled
[92]
Encoder Alarm
Enabled
[305] Trip Reset
True
Parameter Descriptions
Healthy (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Ready (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Health Word
The hexadecimal sum of any alarms present. Refer to Troubleshooting for more information.
Health Store
The hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm. Refer to Troubleshooting for more information.
Remote Trip
The State Of Remote Trip.
Stall Trip
Armature current is above stall threshold and at zero speed but not at zero setpoint.
Last Alarm
The hexadecimal value of the last (or only) alarm. Refer to Troubleshooting for more information.
0x0000 :
0x0001 :
0x0002 :
0x0004 :
0x0008 :
0x0010 :
0x0020 :
0x0040 :
No Active Alarms
Over Speed
Missing Pulse
Field Over I
Heatsink Trip
Thermistor
Over Volts (Va)
Spd Feedback
0x0080 :
0x0100 :
0x0200 :
0x0400 :
0x0800 :
0x1000 :
0x2000 :
0xf005 :
Encoder Failed
Field Failed
3 Phase Failed
Phase Lock
5703 Rcv Error
Stall Trip
Over I Trip
External Trip
0x8000 :
0xf001 :
0xf002 :
0xf200 :
0xf400 :
0xf006 :
0xff05 :
0xff06 :
Field Fail
5703 RCV Error
Stall Trip
Speed FBK Alarm
Encoder Alarm
Health Reset
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Range: 0 : OK
1 : Failed
Range: 0 : OK
1 : Failed
Range: 0x0000 to 0xff06
Accts Failed
Autotune Error
Autotune Aborted
CONFIG Enabled
No Op–station (No Keypad)
Remote Trip
PCB Version
Product Code
Field Fail
Inhibits the field fail alarm.
5703 RCV Error
Inhibits 5703 serial communications receive error. Only active in slave mode.
Stall Trip
Inhibits the stall trip alarm from tripping the contactor out.
Trip Reset
When false, the faults are latched permanently and the healthy output remains inactive after
changing the start input (C3) Off/On. The trip reset must then be set to true for the faults to be reset
and the healthy output to go active (high) when C3 goes low. this feature can be used in
applications where you want to reset the faults under your own control, rather than automatically
with the start/run command.
Speed FBK Alarm
Inhibits the speed feedback alarm.
Encoder Alarm
Inhibits the encoder option board alarm.
REM Trip Inhibit
Inhibits the remote trip.
REM Trip Delay
The delay between the remote trip alarm being activated and the drive tripping.
6-28 Programming
Alarms
Parameter
Field Fail
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
Range: 0 : Enabled
1 : Inhibited
MN792
Jog/Slack
These parameters control the Jog function of the control. (Also see “Ramps” description).
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
DIG IN 1
[C6]
2 Jog/Slack
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
Crawl Speed
Mode
Ramp Rate
[C7]
[102]
[105]
Jog / Slack
Tag Parameter
[496]
Jog/Slack
Factory Setting
[228]
Mode
False
[212]
Operating Mode
Stop
[253]
[254]
[218]
[219]
[225]
[355]
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Crawl Speed
Ramp Rate
+5.00%
-5.00%
+5.00%
-5.00%
10.00%
1.0 Seconds
Off
Operating Mode
Stop
Stop
Run
Take Up Slack 1
Take Up Slack 2
Jog 1
Jog 2
Crawl
Mode
False
True
False
False
True
False
True
True
Jog
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Run
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
O/P
S/P
S/P
S/P
S/P + Take Up 1
S/P + Take Up 2
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Crawl Speed
Jog
Ramp Rate
Parameter Descriptions
OPERATING MODE (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Range: 0 to 7
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
0 : STOP
2 : JOG SP. 1
4 : RUN
6 : TAKE UP SP. 2
1 : STOP
3 : JOG SP. 2
5 : TAKE UP SP. 1
7 : CRAWL
JOG SPEED 1
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed 1 setpoint.
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
JOG SPEED 2
Jog speed 2 setpoint.
TAKE UP 1
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Take–up slack speed setpoint 1.
TAKE UP 2
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Take–up slack speed setpoint 2.
CRAWL SPEED
Range: –100.00 to 100.00 %
Crawl speed setpoint.
MODE
Range: 0 : False
Jog/Slack operating mode select. MODE should be connected to a digital input.
1 : True
RAMP RATE
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
The ramp rate used during Jog is independent of the main ramp rate during normal running. The
Seconds
acceleration and deceleration times in jog are always equal.
Functional Description
To fully use all the modes , Mode [228] must be connected to one of the digital inputs. “Setpoint” in the following
table refers to the MIN Speed Input. Any direct setpoints that exist are added to this setpoint to make the total
speed setpoint. If this is not desirable, for example during jog, the direct setpoints should be disconnected
during the appropriate conditions.
MIN Speed Input
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint + Take–Up Slack 1
Setpoint + Take–Up Slack 2
Crawl Speed
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
MIN Speed
Input
0%
Operating Mode
Stop
Run
Take–Up Slack 1
Take–Up Slack 2
Crawl
Inch / Jog 1
Inch / Jog 2
Start (C3)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Jog (C6)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Mode (C7)
–
False
False
True
True
False
True
JOG (C4)
RAMP INPUT
t
JOG SPEED 1
t
0%
RAMP RATE
RAMP ACCEL TIME
set in JOG/SLACK set in RAMPS
MN792
Contactor
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
RAMP INPUT + TAKE UP 1
RUN (C3)
JOG (C4)
Ramp Time
factory setting
factory setting
factory setting
factory setting
factory setting
Jog Accel/Decel Ramp
Jog Accel/Decel Ramp
RAMP DECEL TIME
set in RAMPS
Programming 6-29
Menus
Allows selection of either the full menu structure, or a reduced menu structure. It also selects the language for
the keypad display.
1 MENUS
Menus
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Full Menus
Language
4 SPEED LOOP
Speed FBK Filter
Enabled
0.000
English
[37] Full Menus
[547] Speed FDBK Filter
[304] Language
Parameter Descriptions
FULL MENUS
When enabled, the full menu structure is displayed at the keypad.
LANGUAGE
Selects the display language. Other languages are available, please contact Baldor.
SPEED FBK FILTER
A simple filter function that is applied to Speed Feedback to reduce ripple caused by encoders with
low line count. A value of 0 diables the filter action. 1.00 is the maximum value. A typical value
would be between 0.5 and 0.75.
Increasing the filter value may make the speed loop unstable.
The filter time constant “τ” in milliseconds is calculated as follows:
tĂ +Ă
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0 : English
1 : Other
Range: 0.000 to 1.000
3.3
Log eǒa1Ǔ
Where α is the Speed FBK Filter value. α = 0.5 indicates a filter time constant of 0.48 milliseconds,
0.8 to 14.7ms, and 0.9 to 31.2 ms.
6-30 Programming
MN792
OP Station
(Keypad) Local operation parameters are set using three menus.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 OP-STATION
2 OP-STATION
3 SETUP
3 START UP VALUES
Set Point
JOG Setpoint
Local Key Enable
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Setpoint
JOG Setpoint
Forward
Program
Local
Ramp ACCEL Time
Ramp DECEL Time
Local Ramp
Down Key
Note:
Local Setpoint (only active when the drive is in Local mode)
Accel Time
Decel Time
% S-Ramp
Parameter Descriptions
Local Key Enable
Enables the “L/R” on the keypad. This must be set true to allow the operator to select local and
remote modes.
Setpoint
Actual value of local setpoint.
Jog Setpoint
Actual value of local jog setpoint.
RAMP ACCEL TIME
Acceleration time used in Local mode.
RAMP DECEL TIME
Deceleration time used in Local mode.
FORWARD (Initial FWD Direction)
Start–up mode of local direction on power–up. True = Forward.
LOCAL (Initial Local)
Start–up mode of keypad L/R key on power–up. True = Local mode.
Program (Initial Program)
Start–up mode of keypad PROG key on power–up. True = Program mode, to see the local setpoint.
Setpoint (Initial Setpoint)
Value of local setpoint on power–up.
JOG Setpoint (Initial Jog Setpoint)
Value of local jog setpoint on power up.
Password
Stop Ramp
Up Key
Reset Value
2 OP-STATION
3 LOCAL RAMP
Local Setpoint
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This keypad menu activates or deactivates the password protection feature.
1 PASSWORD
Enter Password
By-Pass Password
Change Password
Parameter Descriptions
Enter Password
Factory Setting = 0x0000 (No Password Is Set).
BY–PASS PASSWORD Reserved parameter.
Factory Setting = FALSE
CHANGE PASSWORD
Factory Setting = 0x0000 (no change).
MN792
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Programming 6-31
PID
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
3 PID
PROP Gain
INT Time CONST
Derivative TC
Positive Limit
Negative Limit
O/P Scaler (Trim)
Input 1
Input 2
Ratio 1
Ratio 2
Divider 1
Divider 2
Enable
INT Defeat
Filter TC
Mode
MIN Profile Gain
Profiled Gain
This is a general purpose PID block which can be used for many closed loop control applications. PID feedback
can be loadcell tension, dancer position or any other transducer feedback such as pressure, flow etc.
PID
Tag Parameter
Factory Setting
[473]
[404]
Mode
PROP Gain
0
1
[474]
MIN Profile Gain
20.00%
[401]
[402]
[403]
[412]
[410]
[418]
[413]
[411]
[414]
[409]
[408]
[406]
[405]
[407]
Derivative TC
INT Time Constant
Filter TC
Ratio 1
Input 1
Divider 1
Ratio 2
Input 2
Divider 2
INT Defeat
Enable
Negative Limit
Positive Limit
Output Scaler (Trim)
0.000 Seconds
5.00 Seconds
0.100 Seconds
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
Off
Enabled
-100.00%
100.00%
0.2000
[475]
PID
Clamped
[416]
A/B
+
[415]
A/B
PID Error
PID
[417]
PID
Output
-
Parameter Descriptions
PID Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
PID Clamped (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
PID Error (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
PROP. Gain
This is a pure gain factor which shifts the whole Bode PID transfer function up or down leaving the
time constants unaffected. A value of P = 10.0 means that, for an error of 5%, the proportional part
(initial step) of the PID output will be:
10 x [ 1 + (Td/Ti) ] x 5 % ,
i.e. approx. 50% for Td << Ti.
INT. TIME CONST (SPD.INT.TIME)
The integrator time constant (Ti)
DERIVATIVE TC
The differentiator time constant (Td). When Td = 0 the transfer function of the block becomes a P+I.
Positive Limit
The upper limit of the pid algorithm.
Negative Limit
The lower limit of the PID algorithm.
Output Scaler (Trim) (Output Scaler Gain)
The ratio which the limited PID output is multiplied by in order to give the final PID Output. Normally
this ratio would be between 0 and 1.
INPUT 1
This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.
INPUT 2
This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.
RATIO 1
The gain factor for Input 1 (Ratio 1).
RATIO 2
The gain factor for Input 2 (Ratio 2).
DIVIDER 1
This reduces (divides) Input 1 by a factor (Divider 1).
DIVIDER 2
This reduces (divides) Input 2 by a factor (Divider 2).
ENABLE
A digital input which resets the (total) PID Output as well as the integral term when false.
INT. DEFEAT
A digital input which resets the integral term when true. The block transfer function then becomes
P+D only.
6-32 Programming
Profile Gain
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0.0 to 100.0
Range: 0.01 to 100.00
Seconds
Range: 0.000 to 10.000
Seconds
Range: 0.00 to 105.00 %
Range: –105.00 to 0.00 %
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
MN792
PID Continued
Parameter Descriptions
FILTER T.C.
Range: 0.000 to 10.000
To attenuate high–frequency noise, a first order filter is added in conjunction with the differentiator.
Seconds
The ratio k of the Derivative Time Constant (Td) over the Filter Time Constant (Tf) (typically 4 or 5)
determines the high–frequency lift of the transfer function. For Tf = 0 this filter is disabled.
MODE
Range: 0 to 4
This determines the law which the profiler follows versus diameter.
For Mode = 0, Profiled Gain = constant = P.
For Mode = 1, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter) + B.
For Mode = 2, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter)^2 + B.
For Mode = 3, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter)^3 + B.
For Mode = 4, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter – min diameter)^4 + B.
MIN PROFILE GAIN
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This expresses the minimum gain required at min diameter (core) as a percentage of the (max) P
gain at full diameter (100%).
PROFILED GAIN
Range: xxxx.x
The output of a profiler block which varies the gain versus diameter. This is primarily to be used with
Speed Profiled Winders for compensation against varying diameter and therefore inertia. When
MODE is not ZERO (see above) this overrides the P gain above.
Functional Description
The block diagram shows the internal structure of the PID block. PID is used to control the response of any
closed loop system. It is used specifically in system applications involving the control of drives to allow zero
steady state error between reference and feedback, together with good transient performance.
Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN)
Adjusts the basic response of the closed loop control system. It is defined as the portion of the loop gain that is
fed back to make the complete control loop stable. The PID error is multiplied by the proportional gain to
produce an output.
Integral (INT. TIME CONST.)
The Integral term is used to give zero steady state error between the setpoint and feedback values of the PID. If
the integral is set to a small value, this will cause an underdamped or unstable control system.
Derivative (DERIVATIVE TC)
Corrects certain types of control loop instability and therefore improves response. Helpful when heavy or large
inertia rolls are being controlled. The derivative term has an associated filter to suppress high frequency signals.
Parameter values should be selected to achieve a critically damped response, which allows the mechanics to
track as precisely as possible a step change on the setpoint.
Underdamped
Critically Damped Response
Setpoint
Value
Overdamped
Critically damped
Time
Setpoint
Time
MN792
Programming 6-33
Raise/Lower
Provides a motor operated potentiometer (MOP) feature. Raise input [261], when true, increases the output at
the rate determined by increase rate [256]. Lower input [262] decreases the output as determined by decrease
rate [257]. MIN value and MAX value limits the total change by the amounts set. The output is not preserved
during power–down.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Raise / Lower
Tag Parameter
2 RAISE/LOWER
[256]
[257]
[261]
[262]
[307]
[255]
[258]
[259]
[260]
Reset Value
Increase Rate
Decrease Rate
Raise Input
Lower Input
MIN Value
MAX Value
External Reset
Increase Rate
Decrease Rate
Raise Input
Lower Input
External Reset
Reset Value
MIN Value
MAX Value
Destination Tag
Factory Setting Digital
10.0 Seconds
MOP
10.0 Seconds
False
False
False
0.00%
-100.00%
100.00%
0
t
Raise/Lower
Output
[260]
[264]
Parameter Descriptions
Raise/Lower Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Reset Value
This reset value is preloaded directly into the output when External Reset is True, or at power–up. It
Is clamped by min and max values.
Increase Rate
Rate of change of increasing output value.
Decrease Rate
Rate of change of decreasing output value.
Raise Input
Command to raise output.
Lower Input
Command to lower output.
MIN Value
Minimum ramp output clamp. This is a plain clamp, not a ramped “min speed” setting.
MAX Value
Maximum ramp output clamp.
External Reset
If External Reset = true, the output of the raise/lower block = the reset value.
Diagnostic
Connection
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Functional Description
These waveforms illustrate the raise/lower function. When External Reset is set true, the raise/lower output
resets to reset value (default = 0.00%). When Raise Input is true, the output increases at increase rate. The
output cannot exceed MAX Value. When Lower Input is true, the output is reduced at the decrease rate. The
output cannot go below the MIN Value. Removing the raise or lower signal before the output reaches its
maximum or minimum value leaves the output at its last value. Setting both raise input and lower input to true at
the same time creates a ramp hold condition.
EXTERNAL RESET
RAISE INPUT
LOWER INPUT
RAISE INPUT
t
0%
100%
RAISE/LOWER OUTPUT
t
0%
RESET VALUE
DEFAULT=0%
6-34 Programming
INCREASE RATE
DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
DECREASE RATE
DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
MN792
Ramps
This function block provides the facility to control the rate at which the control will respond to a changing
setpoint.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
DIG IN R
2 RAMPS
[C5]
Ramp ACCEL Time
Ramp DECEL Time
Constant ACCEL
Ramp Hold
% S-Ramp
Ramping Thresh
Auto Reset
External Reset
Reset Value
MIN Speed
DIG IN 1
[102]
DIG IN 2
[C7]
[105]
[620]
[5]
[126]
[286]
Factory Setting
Ramp Invert
Ramp Input
Min Speed
Ramping Threshold
False
0.00%
0.00%
0.50%
S/Linear
Ramp
t
S/P
Jog / Slack
Tag Parameter
[113]
+
O/P
Drive Enable
[C6]
RAMPS
Tag Parameter
-
[118]
[422]
[288]
[287]
Ramp Hold
Reset Value
External Reset
Auto Reset
Off
0.00%
Disabled
Enabled
[2]
[3]
[266]
[293]
Ramp Accel Time
Ramp Decel Time
% S Ramp
Ramp O/p Dest
10.00 Sec
10.00 Sec
2.50%
291
Ramp Output
To Speed Loop
[85]
Diagnostic
connection
Factory Setting
[496]
[228]
Jog/Slack
Mode
Off
False
[212]
Operating Mode
Stop
[253]
[254]
[218]
[219]
[225]
[355]
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Crawl Speed
Ramp Rate
+5.00%
-5.00%
+5.00%
-5.00%
10.00%
1.0 Seconds
Operating Mode
Stop
Stop
Run
Take Up Slack 1
Take Up Slack 2
Jog 1
Jog 2
Crawl
Jog
Ramp Rate
Mode
False
True
False
False
True
False
True
True
Jog
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Run
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Jog
O/P
S/P
S/P
S/P
S/P + Take Up 1
S/P + Take Up 2
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Crawl Speed
Start
From
AUX I/O
S/P O/P
Parameter Descriptions
Ramp Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Ramping (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Ramp Accel Time
Acceleration time (100% change)
Ramp Decel Time
Deceleration time (100% change)
Constant Accel
Reserved parameter.
Ramp Hold
While ON, the ramp output is held at its last value. This is overridden by Ramp Reset.
Ramp Input
Ramp input tag.
% S–Ramp
Percentage of ramp with S–shaped rate of change. A value of zero is equivalent to a linear ramp.
Changing this value affects the ramp times.
Ramping Thresh.
Ramping flag threshold level. The threshold is used to detect whether the ramp is active.
Auto Reset
If true, then the ramp is reset whenever System Reset is true, that is each time the speed/current
loop is unquenched. (System Reset [374] is an internal flag that is set true for one cycle after the
speed/current loop is enabled, i.e. every time the drive is started).
External Reset
If true, then the ramp is held in reset. External reset does not depend on auto reset for its operation.
MN792
[293]
Ramping
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 Seconds
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Range: 0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Programming 6-35
Ramps Continued
Parameter Descriptions
Reset Value
This value is loaded into the output when Ramp Reset is true, or at power–up. To catch a spinning
load smoothly (‘bumpless transfer’), connect Speed Feedback [62] (source) to Reset Value [422]
(destination).
MIN. Speed
The minimum speed clamp is fully bi–directional and operates with a 0.5% hysteresis. This clamp
operates on the input to the ramp and it can therefore be overrridden by the Reset Value (as far as
the ramp output is concerned).
Minimum Speed
Range: –300.00 to 300.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Output
Input
Functional Description
-0.5 0
0.5
Ramping Threshold [286]
% S Ramp [266]
Input
S/P
Ramp Input [5]
Min Speed [126]
O/P
Jog/Slack
Output
0
Input
1
Output
0
Ramping [113]
Ramp Output [293]
t
S" Ramp
Ramp Decel Time [3]
Ramp Accel Time [2]
Ramp Hold [118]
Auto Reset [287]
External Reset [288]
Reset Value [422]
Acceleration / Deceleration Rates
RAMP INPUT (+ 100%)
Ramp Hold
RAMP HOLD ON
t
0%
RAMP OUTPUT
Ramp Input
+100%
0%
Off
Off
t
RAMP OUTPUT
0%
Ramp Accel Time
(S Ramp 0%)
Actual Accel Time
with S Ramp
RAMP DECEL TIME
(S RAMP 0%)
Actual Decel Time
with S Ramp
0%
t
0%
t
Ramp operation occurs when a ramp input is present. When
Digital Input 2 is ON, Ramp Hold stops the ramp output from
changing. Even when the ramp input signal is removed,
Ramp Hold keeps the ramp output from changing. Once
Ramp Hold is off, the ramp resumes.
t
RAMP INPUT (-100%)
t
0%
RAMP OUTPUT
-100%
Ramp Accel Time
(S Ramp 0%)
Actual Accel Time
with S Ramp
6-36 Programming
RAMP DECEL TIME
(S RAMP 0%)
Actual Decel Time
with S Ramp
MN792
Ramps Continued
Minimum Speed
100%
X%
Drive Enabled
Ramp Input
Ramp Input
0%
t0
t
t0
t
100%
X%
This figure shows the effect of setting MIN. Speed
above 0.00%. When the drive is enabled, the ramp
output cannot decrease below the MIN. Speed value.
Note the ramp rates are used when changing the
output from minimum speed to zero speed. Notice also
that in this example the ramp output only increases to
X% since the ramp input signal is limited to X%.
Ramp Output
Y%
0%
Auto Reset
100%
X%
Ramp Input
0%
With Auto Reset enabled, the ramp output resets to
reset value each time the drive is enabled. In this
example, reset value is 0.00%. It does not reset if the
drive is disabled.
Drive Enabled
Ramp Input
t0
t
t0
t
100%
X%
Ramp Output
0%
External Reset
100%
X%
Drive Enabled
Ramp Input
0%
Ramp Input
t0
t
t0
t
The ramp input is set to X% at time t0 . The ramp
output will increase at the ramp rate. While external
reset is enabled, the ramp output resets to reset value.
When external reset is disabled, the ramp output
continues to follow input signal.
100%
X%
Ramp Output
Y%
0%
MN792
Programming 6-37
Setpoint Sum 1 Setpoint Sum 1 allows the summing and scaling of three analog inputs to produce SPT. Sum Output [294].
Note: This block is ignored by the drive unless [294] is connected to a nonzero destination tag.
Input 0 and Input 1 have individual ratio and divider scalers, and signs. Input 1 has an additional deadband
function set by Deadband Width. When the input is within the deadband, the output clamps to zero to ignore any
noise. This parameter is useful when digital setpoints are used (for example from a 5703, serial
communications, or the Raise Lower function block). The inputs have symmetrical limits set by Limit. Input 2 has
no scaling or limits. The output after Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are summed is also clamped by Limit before
producing SPT. Sum Output.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Setpoint Sum 1
Tag Parameter
2 SETPOINT SUM 1
Ratio 1
Ratio 0
Sign 1
Sign 0
Divider 1
Divider 0
Deadband Width
Limit
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Analog
Input 1
A2
[292]
[208]
[309]
[420]
[423]
[6]
[100]
[131]
[419]
[8]
[375]
[294]
Sign 0
Ratio 0
Input 0
Divider 0
Input 2
Ratio 1
Input 1
Deadband Width
Divider 1
Sign 1
Limit
SPT Sum 1 Dest
Factory Setting
Positive
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
0.00%
1.0000
0.00%
0.00%
1.0000
Positive
105.00%
390
A/B
A/B
+
+
+
+
[294]
-
Parameter Descriptions
SPT. Sum 1 Destination [294] (Set in Configure I/O::Block Diagram Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
SPT. Sum Output [86] (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Refer to the diagnostics function block description.
Ratio 1
Analog input 1 scaling.
Ratio 0
Input 0 scaling.
Sign 1
Analog input 1 polarity.
Sign 0
Input 0 polarity.
Divider 1
Analog input 1 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
Divider 0
Input 0 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
Deadband Width
Analog input 1 deadband width. When Input 1 is within the deadband, the output clamps to zero to
ignore any noise.
LIMIT
The Setpoint Sum 1 programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range of 0.00% to 200.00%.
The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of the ratio calculation and the total ouput.
INPUT 2
Input 2 value. The factory settings do not connect this input to any analog input.
INPUT 1
Input 1 value. The factory settings connects this input to Analog Input 1 (A2).
INPUT 0
Input 0 value. The factory settings do not connect this input to any analog input.
6-38 Programming
SPT Sum
Destination
+
[86]
Diagnostic
Connection
Range: 0 to 549
Range: R/O
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: 0 : Negative
1 : Positive
Range: 0 : Negative
1 : Positive
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %
Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %
Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %
MN792
Speed Loop
Speed loop selects the speed feedback source and tunes the speed loop PI to produce a current demand. The
parameters are set in several menus, some parameters can be set in multiple menus. Speed FBK Select
determines the source of the speed feedback signal. The default, Arm Volts FBK, uses internal circuitry to derive
speed feedback. The other selections require external devices to provide the feedback signal. Speed Demand is
summed algebraically with Speed Feedback to yield Speed Error. When the drive is enabled, Speed Error is
controlled by the PI loop. Proportional and integral values are set in the Advanced::Adaption block. The resulting
current demand signal is sent to the Current Loop block and to the Advanced::Zero SPD. Quench block.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
Speed PROP Gain
Speed INT Time
INT Defeat
Encoder Sign
Speed FBK Select
Speed FBK Filter
2 SPEED LOOP
2 SPEED LOOP
2 SPEED LOOP
2 SPEED LOOP
3 SETPOINTS
3 ADVANCED
3 ADVANCED
3 ADVANCED
1 CONFIGURE DRIVE
Speed FBK Select
Encoder Sign
Speed INT Time
Speed PROP Gain
Setpoint 1
Sign 2 (A3)
Ratio 2 (A3)
Setpoint 3
Setpoint 4
MAX Demand
MIN Demand
Speed Loop
[119]
Analog
Input 2
I Gain in Ramp
POS Loop P Gain
4 ADAPTION
I DMD Isolate (from Current Loop)
Factory Setting
1.0000 Sec
[9]
Sign 2 (A3)
Positive
[290]
[41]
[289]
[291]
[357]
[358]
[13]
[14]
Setpoint 2
Setpoint 4
Setpoint 1
Setpoint 3
MAX Demand
MIN Demand
+/-
A3
0.00%
1.0000 Sec
SPT Sum Out
Ramp Out
105.00%
-105.00%
INT Time Constant 0.500 Sec
PROP Gain
10.00
Advanced
Adaption
Tag# Parameter
[270] SPD BRK2 (High)
[269] SPD BRK2 (Low)
[268] Mode
[271] PROP Gain
[272] INT Time Constant
From Calibration Board
MN792
[49]
+/-
Encoder Sign (+/-)
Zero SPD Offset
+
+
Factory Setting
5.00%
1.00%
0
5.00
0.500 Sec
Off
Speed Feedback Select
[47] Speed FBK Select
Armature Volts
Analog Tach
Encoder
Zero SPD Level
Zero IAD Level
Mode
Speed BRK1 (Low)
Speed BRK2 (High)
PROP Gain
Tag# Parameter
[7]
Ratio 2 (A3)
[202] INT Defeat
[89] Speed Demand
4 ZERO SPD QUENCH
+
-
To IDMD
Isolate Switch
(To Current Loop)
+ +
Speed Setpoint
P
I
PI
Zero SPD Quench
Tag# Parameter
Factory Setting
[284] Zero SPD Level
0.50%
[285] Zero IAD Level
1.50%
[63]
Armature SCR
Firing Quench
Current Demand
To Current
[356] Loop
[64]
+
-
Diagnostic
Connection
Unfiltered Speed Error
Unfiltered Speed Feedback
Note: Encoder analog feedback selection uses analog Tach feedback for the proportional
term of the speed loop PI and encoder feedback for the Integral term. This feedback
selection requires that the motor have an analog Tach/Encoder installed. This
selection cannot be used with the switchable Tachogenerator board is installed.
Diagnostic
Connection
Diagnostic
[297] Connection
[62]
Diagnostic
Connection
Diagnostic
[207] Connection
Programming 6-39
Speed Loop Continued
Parameter Descriptions
Speed Loop Output SPD Loop Output (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Output from Speed Loop PI.
Speed Feedback (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
The speed feedback value from the source chosen by SPEED FBK SEL.
Speed Setpoint (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp–to–zero function.
Speed Error (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Speed loop error.
Speed PROP. Gain (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)
Speed loop Pi proportional gain adjustment.
Speed INT. Time (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)
Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment.
INT. DEFEAT
Inhibits the integral part of the speed loop PI to give proportional control only.
Encoder Sign (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)
Since the encoder feedback cannot be reversed electrically, the signal polarity can be reversed by
the control software.
Speed FBK Select (Can be set in Speed Loop or Configure Drive.)
Four options are available:
0 : ARM Volts FBK
1 : Analog TACH
2 : Encoder
3 : Encoder/Analog
Setpoint 1
Speed Setpoint 1.
Sign 2 (A3)
Speed Setpoint 2 Sign.
Parameter Descriptions
Ratio 2 (A3)
Speed Setpoint 2 Ratio.
Setpoint 2 (A3) This is a fixed (non–configurable) input.
This setpoint is scanned synchronously with the current loop .
Setpoint 3
Speed Setpoint 3.
Setpoint 4
Speed Setpoint 4.
MAX Demand
Sets the maximum input to the speed loop. It is clamped at 105% to allow for overshoot in the
external loops.
MIN Demand
Sets the minimum input to the speed loop.
I Gain in Ramp
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Range: 0.001 to 30.000
Seconds
Range: 0 : Off
1 : On
Range: 0 : Negative
1 : Positive
Range: 0 to 3
Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %
Range: 0 : Negative
1 : Positive
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %
Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 105.00 %
Range: –105.00 to 105.00 %
Range:
POS Loop P Gain
Range:
Zero SPD Level
Range:
Zero IAD Level
Range:
Functional Description
Speed Loop PI Output – The PI output is available for connection using tag no. 356. This point is before the I Limit clamps
and the summing of the additional current demand. This tag is not visible at the keypad.
Speed Loop PI with Current Demand Isolate – The speed loop output is still valid (active) with the I DMD. Isolate parameter
enabled.
1. The speed loop is reset by unquenching the speed loop/current loop.
2. I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by Program Stop (B8) or Normal Stop (C3).
3. The speed loop PI holds the integral term as soon as the PI output reaches current limit. This is true even in Current
Demand Isolate mode where it may interfere depending on the way the speed PI is used. At the present time. this feature
cannot be suppressed.
105% Speed Demands – The speed demand clamping allows the speed setpoint to reach 105%. This applies only to the
final summing junction immediately before the speed loop and also to the Setpoint Sum 1 output. Individual speed setpoints
are still clamped to 100%.
6-40 Programming
MN792
Speed Loop Continued
Advanced
This function block is shown in Speed Loop
Adaption Adjusts speed loop gain scheduling.
Zero SPD Quench Similar to Standstill logic (i.e. keeps the contactor in but motor current drops to zero) except
the speed loop stays enabled and will cause the current loop to unquench very quickly.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
2 SPEED LOOP
3 ADVANCED
3 ADVANCED
4 ADAPTION
Mode
Speed BRK1 (Low)
Speed BRK2 (High)
PROP Gain
SPD INT Time
I Gain in Ramp
POS Loop P Gain
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
3 ADVANCED
4 ZERO SPD QUENCH
Zero SPD Level
Zero IAD Level
Parameter Descriptions
Mode
0 – Disabled
1 – Speed Feedback Dependent
2 – Speed Error Dependent
3 – Current Demand Dependent
SPD BRK 1 (Low)
If Mode = 1 Then BRK–points correspond to speed feedback.
If Mode = 2 Then BRK–points correspond to speed error.
If Mode = 3 Then BRK–points correspond to current demand.
SPD BRK 2 (High)
Above SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) the normal gains (as per main menu above) prevail. Between the two
breakpoints, a linear variation of the gains is implemented.
PROP. Gain
Prop gain used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
SPD INT Time
Integral time constant used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
I Gain IN Ramp
While the Ramping flag (Tag [113]) is true the integral gain is scaled by I GAIN IN RAMP. This can
be used to help prevent integral windup while the drive is ramping (particularly with high inertia
loads).
POS. LOOP P GAIN
Reserved parameter.
Zero SPD. Level
Sets the threshold of speed feedback below which Zero Speed Quench is active.
Zero IAD Level
Sets the threshold of current feedback below which Zero Speed Quench is active.
MN792
Range: 0 to 3
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Range: 0.001 to 30.000
Seconds
Range: 0.0000 to 2.0000
Range: –200.00 to 200.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Programming 6-41
Standstill
Standstill logic is used to inhibit rotation during Zero Speed demand. If the drive is below the zero speed
threshold [12] and Standstill Logic [11] is enabled, the speed and current loops are quenched to prevent shaft
oscillation around zero speed. Standstill Logic is useful in maintaining absolute zero speed but can cause
problems in web handling applications using tension feedback. At zero speed, the SCR’s turn off allowing web
tension to pull the driven roll in reverse. When the drive no longer senses zero speed, the SCR’s turn on
causing forward rotation and regulate tension. An oscillation condition can result as the drive SCR’s turn on and
off trying to maintain a fixed position. A “not at standstill” signal is sent to the drive enable logic.
When Speed Feedback is less than Zero Threshold, the At Zero Speed output is On. At Zero Setpoint is on
when Speed Setpoint is less than Zero Threshold. When both At Zero Speed and At Zero Setpoint are on, At
Standstill is on to indicate the motor has stopped.
When Standstill Logic is enabled, the SCR firing circuits are disabled, the main contactor remains energized and
the Run Led stays on when the drive is at standstill. The drive remains in this state until standstill drops out (the
speed setpoint or speed feedback increase above the zero threshold value).
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Standstill
2 STANDSTILL
89
Standstill Logic
Zero Threshold
Source Tag
Tag# Parameter
[306] Source Tag
Factory Setting
89
78
Speed Feedback
from [62] Speed Loop
At Zero Speed
Speed Setpoint
from [63] Speed Loop
At Zero Setpoint
[12]
[11]
Zero Threshold
Standstill Logic
At Standstill
2.00%
Disabled
[77]
Diagnostic
Connection
97
Digital Output 1 (B5)
[78]
[79]
Not At Standstill"
To Enable circuit
Parameter Descriptions
AT Zero Setpoint (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Range: 0 : False
At zero speed demand.
1 : True
AT Zero Speed (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Range: 0 : False
At zero speed feedback.
1 : True
AT Standstill (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Range: 0 : False
At zero speed and zero setpoint.
1 : True
Source Tag (Zero Setpoint)
Range: 0 to 549
Reserved parameter.
Standstill Logic
Range: 0 : Disabled
If true, the control is quenched (although the contactor remains in) when the speed feedback and
1 : Enabled
speed setpoint values are less than zero threshold.
Zero Threshold
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold level which defines zero setpoint and zero speed diagnostic outputs and also controls the
zero speed relay output.
Functional Description
Standstill logic inhibits the controller at zero setpoint and zero speed, i.e. at standstill. The main contactor
remains in and the Run LED remains on.
Standstill Logic
0%
Speed Setpoint
Speed Feedback
2%
0%
-2%
Drive Enable
0%
Speed Feedback
t
Curve depends on load characteristics
Zero Treshold
Enabled
6-42 Programming
Enabled
Disabled
t
Disabled
Enabled
t
MN792
Stop Rates
Sets the stop method parameters for the control. A normal stop occurs when the Run signal is removed from
terminal C3. It ramps the speed demand to zero at a rate set by Stop Time. Series 29 Non–regenerative drives
will stop no faster than the coast stop rate. Series 30 Regenerative drives use Stop Time to set the duration of
the stop. After the stop, the contactor de–energizes and the drive disables. The Stop Limit timer starts when C3
goes to zero volts. If the drive speed has not reached Stop Zero Speed within the Stop Limit time, the contactor
de–energizes and the drive disables.
During normal stops, Contactor Delay delays de–energizing the contactor after the motor reaches zero speed.
When Stop Zero Speed is set greater than 0.25%, the drive disables during the contactor delay. Below 0.25%,
the drive disables after the contactor delay. This is useful when using the jog function to prevent multiple
operations of the contactor. Contactor Delay is overridden when terminal C4 is at zero volts.
Program Stop provides a controlled fast stop using regenerative drives. The stop time is set by Program Stop
Time. The timer starts when terminal B8 goes to zero volts. When the drive reaches Stop Zero Speed, the
contactor de–energizes and the drive disables. Program Stop Limit sets the maximum time the program stop
can take before the contactor de–energizes and the drive disables.
Prog Stop I Lim sets the current limit (current loop) during a program stop. Other current limits can override it.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STOP RATES
Stop Time
Stop Limit
Contactor Delay
PROG Stop Time
PROG Stop Limit
PROG Stop I LIM
Stop Zero Speed
Stop Rates
Speed Setpoint
from [62] Speed Loop
Drive
Start
[82]
Speed Feedback
from [63] Speed Loop
Program Stop is true when terminal
B8 is Low (Status LED Off).
Program
Stop
B8
Tag# Parameter
[91] PROG Stop I Limit
Factory Setting
100.00%
[27] Stop Time
[26] PROG Stop Time
10.0 Sec
0.1 Sec
[217] Stop Limit
[216] PROG Stop Limit
60.0 Sec
60.0 Sec
[29] Stop Zero Speed
2.00%
[302] Contactor Delay
1.0 Sec
PROG Stop I Limit
To Current Loop
[89]
t
Parameter Descriptions
Speed Demand (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp–to–zero block.
Program Stop (Read in Diagnostics Parameters)
State of Program Stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then Program Stop is false and the
Program Stop front panel LED is also on.
Stop Time
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in normal stop mode (C3 Off).
Stop Limit
Delay time limit to allow normal stop action (regenerative breaking) to achieve zero speed before
drive quench and coast stop. The timer is triggered by Start command (C3) going low.
Contactor Delay
This defines the time between the drive reaching Stop Zero Speed (Tag [29]) and the contactor
being opened. This is particularly useful during the jog cycle to prevent multiple operations of the
main contactor.
If Stop Zero Speed is ≥ 0.25%, the drive will be quenched during the contactor delay time. The
Contactor delay is overridden by Enable (C4).
Maintain zero speed during contactor delay.
If Stop Zero Speed is < 0.25%, the drive is not quenched until after the Contactor Delay time.
PROG Stop Time
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in program stop mode (B8 OFF).
PROG Stop Limit
Delay time limit to allow program stop action (regenerative breaking) to achieve zero speed before
drive quench and coast stop. The timer is triggered by program stop command (B8) going low.
PROG Stop I LIM
Main current limit level in program stop mode assuming current limit not overridden by I Profile or
Inverse Time limits.
Stop Zero Speed
Zero speed level in program stop and normal stop modes at which the contactor delay timer starts
timing out. At the end of this delay the contactor is de–energized.
MN792
Speed
Demand
To Coast
Stop Logic
t
t
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 : False
1 : True
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0.0 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0.1 to 600.0
Seconds
Range: 0.0 to 600.0
Seconds
Range:
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Programming 6-43
Stop Rates Continued
Functional Description
Stop Hierarchy
Coast Stop – Terminal B9
•
Disables the drive and opens the contactor using the pilot output
Enable – Terminal C4
•
Suspends and resets the control loops
Program Stop – Terminal B8
•
Independent ramp time
•
Stop Timer
•
Independent current limit may be greater than normal current limit
•
Independent zero speed
Normal Run/Stop – Terminal C3
•
Independent ramp time
•
Contactor Delay
Note: The Control’s reaction to commands is defined by a state machine. This determines which commands
provide the demanded action, and in which sequence. Consequently, Coast Stop and Program Stop
must be false (the Control is not in Coast or Program mode), before a Run signal is applied. Otherwise
the control assumes a stop mode and remains disabled.
Normal Stop Sequence
Stop Zero Speed settings less than 0.25% allow the control to remain enabled for the Contactor Delay Time
after reaching Stop Zero Speed. This is useful for Jog applications.
100
Start / Run (C3)
Speed Setpoint %
0
100
Speed Demand %
0
Stop Time
10.0 Seconds
100
Speed Feedback %
0
2
Stop Zero Speed 2.00%
Actual stop rate depends on load inertia, motor horse power and
overload capacity of drive (motor + control)
Control is disabled below
Stop Zero Speed if set>0.25%
Control remains enabled for the Contactor Delay if
Stop Zero Speed <0.25%
Enabled
Disabled
Drive Enable
0
6-44 Programming
MN792
Stop Rates Continued
Time Out During a Normal Stop
When a normal stop takes longer than the Stop Limit time, the control disables and the contactor is
de–energized.
100
Start / Run (C3)
Speed Setpoint %
0
100
Speed Demand %
0
Stop Time
10.0 Seconds
100
Speed Feedback %
0
2
Stop Zero Speed 2.00%
Contactor drops out if Speed Feedback > Stop Zero Speed
when Stop Limit times out.
Enabled
Disabled
Drive Enable
0
On
Run LED and
Contactor LED
Off
0
MN792
Programming 6-45
Stop Rates Continued
Normal Program Stop Sequence
Program Stop is a latched operation. When a Program Stop command is received (B8 goes to zero volts), the
stop continues even if 24 volts is restored at terminal B8.
100
Program
Stop
Speed Setpoint %
LED On (Program Stop = False)
LED Off
0
100
Speed Demand %
0
PROG Stop Time
0.10 Seconds
100
Speed Feedback %
0
2
Stop Zero Speed 2.00%
Current Limit is set by PROG Stop I Limit [91].
Actual stop rate depends on load inertia, motor horse power and
overload capacity of drive (motor + control)
Enabled
Disabled
Drive Enable
0
On
Run LED and
Contactor LED
Off
0
6-46 Programming
MN792
Stop Rates Continued
Time Out During a Normal Program Stop
The time out operation is the same for both a normal stop and a program stop.
100
Program
Stop
Speed Setpoint %
LED On (Program Stop = False)
LED Off
0
100
Speed Demand %
0
PROG Stop Time
0.10 Seconds
100
Speed Feedback %
0
2
Stop Zero Speed 2.00%
Contactor drops out if Speed Feedback > Stop Zero Speed
when PROG Stop Limit times out.
Enabled
Disabled
Drive Enable
0
On
Run LED and
Contactor LED
Off
0
MN792
Programming 6-47
System Port P3 The System Port (P3) is a non–isolated RS232 serial communications port. The port is used off–line (while the
drive is stopped) for transferring and saving drive configuration files using a personal computer (PC) running a
serial communications program, or online (while running) with the Peer–to–Peer Communications control. You
can also use the P3 port to transfer configuration files with a PC running Workbench D software.
Three menus are used to configure the serial port.
System Port P3 This menu sets parameters for transferring data to and from a PC.
P3 Setup This menu sets communication parameters for System Port P3.
BISYNCH SUPPORT This menu sets parameters to support the BISYNCH protocol.
5703 SUPPORT Sets parameters for the optional 5703 board (see 5703 Support).
1 SERIAL LINKS
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
Dump MMI (TX)
UDP XFER (RX)
UDP XFER (TX)
Version No.
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
3 P3 SETUP
Mode
5703 Support
P3 Baud Rate
P3 Setup
Tag# Parameter
130 Mode
198 P3 Baud Rate
3 P3 SETUP
4 BISYNC SUPPORT)
Group ID (GID)
Unit ID (UID)
Error Report
Factory Setting
Disabled
9600
5703 Support
P3 Port
RS232
P3
132
187
133
189
Setpoint Ratio
Raw Input
Setpoint Sign
Scaled Input
Bisynch Support
329 Group ID (GID)
330 Init ID (UID)
332 Error Report
0.0000
0.00%
Positive
R/O
-
[41]
0x0000
0x0000
0x00C0
Parameter Descriptions
MODE Four options are available:
0 : Disabled
1 : 5703 Master
2 : 5703 Slave
3 : CELite (EIASCII)
P3 BAUD RATE Four options are available:
Only works at 9600
Setpoint Ratio
Input scaling ratio for [187].
Raw Input
Value written to the control from the P3 port (input data).
Setpoint Sign
Invert/non–invert of Raw input [187]
Scaled Input
Value written by the control to the P3 port (output data).
GROUP ID
The Baldor protocol group identity address.
UNIT ID
The Baldor protocol unit identity address.
ERROR REPORT
Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set the value
to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Section 8 “Serial Communications” – Reference for a list of codes.
6-48 Programming
Setpoint 4
+
Range: 0 to 3
Range: 9600
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: xxx.xx%
Range: 0:Negative
1:Positive
Range: xxx.xx%
Range: 0x0000 to 0x0007
Range: 0x0000 to 0x000F
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
MN792
System Port P3 Continued
Communication Port Setup
For UDP data and text file transfers, set the host computer communication port settings as follows:
9600 Baud 8 bits
1 Stop bit
XON/XOFF handshaking
NO parity UDP transfer procedure
Note: Set the P3 Baud Rate to match the PC’s COM port baud rate (9600 is recommended).
P3 Port Connector
1234
P3 Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
0VDC
24VDC
Tx
Rx
DB9 Pin No.
Female
Male
5
5
No Connection No Connection
2
3
3
2
DB25 Pin No.
Female
Male
7
7
No Connection No Connection
2
3
3
2
Download (DUMP File From P3)
This procedure is used to collect information that fully documents all the control’s settings in an ASCII text file.
You can print the file or store it for future use (troubleshooting etc.).
Note: This procedure transfers the drive’s current settings (in memory), not the settings stored in EEPROM.
1.
Connect one end of the P3 cable to the P3 port and the other end to the PC’s COM port.
2.
Ensure that the drive’s P3 Mode is set to Disable.
3.
Save the parameter settings using Parameter Save to ensure the present settings will be read.
4.
Using a standard communications package, prepare the host computer to receive an ASCII file. Use
a file extension like .MMI to differentiate it from .UDP format files.
5.
Enable the host computer to begin receiving data.
6.
Start the text download by selecting “DUMP MMI–> P3”. The file transfer begins and will appear
similar to the following:
DIGITAL DC DRIVE
ISSUE: 5.13
..DC 4Q 35A
....MENU LEVEL
......DIAGNOSTICS
........SPEED DEMAND [89 ] = 0.00 %
........SPEED FEEDBACK [207 ] = 0.01 %
........SPEED ERROR [297 ] = –0.01 %
........SPEED LOOP O/P [549 ] = 0.00 %
........CURRENT DEMAND [299 ] = 0.00 %
........CURRENT FEEDBACK [298 ] = 0.00 %
etc.
Note: Enabling the transmitting port in a serial communications setup initiates data transfer. Therefore, enable
the receiving port the host computer before beginning communication at the drive’s P3 port.
7.
The file ends with the CTRL–Z character. This character automatically closes the file in some serial
communications software packages. If not, close the file manually when it has finished transferring
data and when the host computer has stopped scrolling text.
8.
Save the file to disk.
UDP (UPLOAD–DOWNLOAD PROTOCOL) SUPPORT
Use the P3 port to transfer ASCII files containing the drive’s configuration and parameter settings between the
590 Digital drive and a host computer. The transfer uses a simple ASCII file structure and XON / XOFF
protocol. Most communications packages use this protocol. A PC Pentium running Windows is required.
Transferring data from the control to a host computer is defined as downloading; transferring data from a host
computer to the control is an upload.
MN792
Programming 6-49
System Port P3 Continued
UDP Download (UDP XFER From P3)
A UDP download transfers the actual parameter and configuration settings from the control to a host computer.
This file fully transfers all settings stored in EEPROM in a binary format and can be used as a back up file if the
current drive settings are lost or if the drive is replaced.
Note: A UDP download transfers settings stored in EEPROM since the last Parameter Save was performed.
Any parameter or configuration changes not saved to the EEPROM are not recorded within the UDP file.
1.
Connect one end of the P3 cable to the P3 port and the other end to the PC’s COM port.
2.
Ensure that the drive’s P3 Mode is set to Disable.
3.
Save the parameter settings using Parameter Save to ensure that the drive’s EEPROM parameters
matches the drive’s current parameter settings.
4.
Using a standard communications package, prepare the host computer to receive an ASCII file. Use
a file extension like .MMI to differentiate it from .UDP format files.
5.
Enable the host computer to begin receiving data.
6.
Start the UDP download from the control by selecting “UDP XFER–> P3”.
Note: Enabling the transmitting port in a serial communications setup initiates data transfer. Therefore, enable
the receiving port the host computer before beginning communication at the drive’s P3 port.
7.
The file ends with the CTRL–Z character. This character automatically closes the file in some serial
communications software packages. If not, close the file manually when the PC has stopped scrolling
text. The last line of the file should read :00000001FF.
UDP Upload (UDP XFER To P3)
A UDP Upload transfers a parameter file from the PC to the control memory. This information is written directly
to EEPROM, so all the drive’s current settings will be overwritten.
1.
Connect one end of the P3 cable to the P3 port and the other end to the PC’s COM port.
2.
Ensure that the drive’s P3 Mode is set to disable.
3.
Using a standard communications package, prepare the host computer to send an ASCII file. Set the
host computer’s communications port parameters to the settings listed above. Be sure the baud rate
and other COM settings at both ends of the serial communications match.
4.
Start the upload by selecting “UDP XFER <– P3”.
5.
When the keypad displays “RECEIVING”, begin the file transmission at the host computer.
6.
The file ends in a :00000001FF which tells the control to close the file.
7.
Reset the control by pressing the “E” key.
6-50 Programming
MN792
5703 Support The 5703 peer–to–peer communication option is not available.
1 SERIAL LINKS
1 SYSTEM
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
2 CONFIGURE I/O
3 P3 SETUP
3 CONFIGURE 5703
4 5703 SUPPORT
Source Tag
Destination Tag
5703
89
0.0000
Positive
Destination Tag [135]
Scaled Input [189]
Raw Input [187]
[134] Source Tag
[131] SETPT Ratio
[132] SETPT Sign
0.00%
SETPT Ratio
SETPT Sign
Raw Input
Scaled Input
Parameter Descriptions
Scaled Input
Scaled input.
Raw Input
Raw input.
Source Tag
The source tag of the value to be sent to the 5703.
SETPT. Ratio
Input scaler.
SETPT. Sign
Input sign.
Destination Tag
(Keypad only) The destination tag of the value received from the 5703.
MN792
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: xxx.xx %
Range: 0 to 549
Range: –3.0000 to 3.0000
Range: 0 : Negative
1 : Positive
Range: 0 to 549
Programming 6-51
TEC Option
The Technology Option function block sets the inputs and outputs of the communications board options if
installed. If a communications board is installed, refer to its manual for additional information.
1 SERIAL LINKS
2 TEC OPTION
TEC Option Type
TEC Option IN1
TEC Option IN2
TEC Option IN3
TEC Option IN4
TEC Option IN5
TEC Option Fault
TEC Option VER
TEC Option OUT1
TEC Option OUT2
TEC Option
None
0
0
0
0
0
[500] Type
[501] Input 1
[502] Input 2
[503] Input 3
[504] Input 4
[505] Input 5
Parameter Descriptions
FAULT (TEC Option Fault)
The fault state of the Technology Option
0 : None – no faults
1 : Parameter – parameter out–of–range
2 : Type Mismatch – TYPE parameter mismatch
3 : Self Test – hardware fault – internal
4 : Hardware – hardware fault – external
5 : Missing – no option fitted
6 : Version Number – older than Version 2.x (TEC option is using software
that doesn’t fully support the drive.
VERSION (TEC Option)
The software version of the TEC Option. No option installed = zero.
OUTPUT 1 and 2 (TEC Option Out 1 to TEC Option Out 2)
The use of these output parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option installed. Refer to
its manual for additional information.
TYPE (TEC Option Type)
sets the type of Technology Option.
0 : None
1 : RS485
2 : Profibus DP
3 : Link
4 : Device Net
5 : Can Open
6 : Lonworks
7 : Type 7
Input 1 To Input 5 (TEC Option In 1 to TEC Option In 5)
The use of these input parameters depends upon the type of Technology Option installed. Refer to
its manual for additional information.
6-52 Programming
Fault [506]
Version [507]
Output 1 [508]
Output 2 [509]
None
0x0000
0
0
Range: 0 to 6
Range: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Range: xxxxx
Range: 0 to 7
Range: –32768 to 32767
MN792
Section 7
Keypad Operation
Keypad
The keypad allows full use of the Control’s features. The keypad provides “Local” motor control, status
monitoring, and complete access for application programming. The display, LEDs and keys are shown in Figure
7-1. The Keypad Display displays the status information during local or remote operation.
Figure 7-1 Keypad
Indicator Lights
(Also see Tables 7-1, 7-2, 7-3)
OK
Indicates general health status.
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 15A
OK
SEQ
REF
SEQ indicates Start/Stop status.
REF indicates Speed Control status.
SEQ
16 x 2 line Keypad Display
REF
E
PROG
M
L
R
FWD
REV
Indicates direction of rotation.
Local Control Keys
RUN
STOP
Indicates Local or Remote mode of
Start/Stop and Speed Control.
JOG
Programming Keys
Local Control Keys
Navigation - Moves upward through the list of parameters.
Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.
Command Acknowledge - Confirms action in a command menu.
Local Mode - Increases motor speed.
Navigation - Moves downward through the list of parameters.
Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.
Local Mode - Decreases motor speed.
Navigation - Displays the previous level's Menu.
Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.
Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges Trip or Error message.
Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter
of the current Menu.
Parameter - Press M" when a parameter is displayed to see the
parameter's Tag No. Repeated pressing at a writable parameter to
control cursor movement.
Navigation - When in Local mode, displays the previous menu
PROG while remaining in Local mode enabling changes to be made to
parameters not available in Local menu. Only operates in the
Local mode.
E
M
L
R
Control - In Local mode this key runs the motor at the Local
Setpoint speed.
Trip Reset - Resets a trip then runs the motor at the Local
Setpoint speed. Only operates in the Local mode.
Control - In Local mode this key changes the direction of motor
rotation. In Jog mode, it selects between two jog speeds. Only
operates in the Local mode.
JOG
Control - In Local mode this key runs the motor at the Jog
Speed 1 parameter value. When the key is released, the
control stops the motor. This key only operates when the
control is stopped and in the Local mode. Only operates in the
Local mode.
Control - In Local mode this key stops the motor if motor is
operating.
Trip Reset - If the control is tripped and the trip is no longer
active, this key resets the trip conditions and clears the
displayed message. Only operates in the Local mode.
Control - Changes between Local and Remote modes for both
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref). The keypad display
will display the correct Setpoint" screen and if in the Local
mode, the " and " keys are used to change the setpoint.
MN792
Keypad Operation 7-1
Keypad LED Status
Seven LEDs indicate the status of the Control. Each LED (Figure 7-1) can operate in three different ways:
Off ,
Blink , and
On .
Table 7-1 Control Status
OK
Run
Stop
Control Status
Re–Configuration
Tripped
Stopped
Stopping
Running with Zero Reference
Running
Autotuning
FWD
REV
Forward/Reverse Status
Commanded direction and actual direction are Forward.
Commanded direction and actual direction are Reverse (Series 30 only).
Commanded direction is Forward but actual direction is Reverse (Series 30 only).
Commanded direction is Reverse but actual direction is Forward.
SEQ
REF
Local/Remote Status
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the terminals (Remote).
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the keypad (Local).
Table 7-2 Forward Reverse Status
Table 7-3 Local and Remote Status
Alarm Messages Operational failures called “Faults” or “Trips” are displayed at the keypad when they occur. They are also stored
in memory and can be accessed for viewing. When a fault occurs, the control will “Trip” which means the motor
stops and the control is disabled until it is reset. Press the “E” key to acknowledge the trip condition without
resetting the fault. After the fault condition has been cleared press the Reset button to reset the control to
restore operation. Refer to the Troubleshooting Section of this manual for additional information.
7-2 Keypad Operation
MN792
Local Menu
L
R key (Figure 7-2)
Pressing the L/R key from anywhere in the Menu System activates the Local menu. The Local menu provides
setpoint information for local operation. Pressing and holding the M key in the Local menu will display additional
Feedback information. A display of forward or reverse feedback or reference whichever was previously
selected by the FWD/REV key. Pressing the “M” key changes between feedback and reference.
Figure 7-2 Local Menu
Menu System
Remote
Control
Mode
Local
Control
Mode
Local Menu
operates from Local mode only
menu/parameter
PROG
FORWARD
REF:
0.00%
HOLD
L/R
M
FORWARD
FBK.
0.00%
FWD/REV key
REVERSE
REF:
0.00%
HOLD
M
REVERSE
FBK:
0.00%
L/R Key
PROG Key
MN792
The L/R key (Local/Remote) only operates when the motor is stopped. It changes between Local and Remote
modes. A Local menu is displayed in the Local mode, and a main programming menu is displayed in the
Remote mode.
In Local, the Local LEDs, SEQ and REF, are illuminated and the RUN, STOP, JOG, , , and keys are
used to control the motor direction and speed. Pressing the L/R key in Local mode selects Remote mode and
returns to the previous menu.
The PROG key only operates in Local mode. It changes between the Local menu and the main Menu System
but the control remains in Local mode. This allows you to change parameters normally available in Remote
mode but remain in Local mode operation.
Keypad Operation 7-3
Menu System
The menu system is divided into nine major selections, shown in Table 7-4. Each selection has a structure of
menus (Figure 7-3). At the keypad, press “M” to access the menus. Then press the or key to scroll
through the menus.
Table 7-4 The Keypad Display of the Main Menus
Action
Description
Apply Power
Display
FORWARD
REF:
Press “PROG” key
Comments
0.00%
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 4Q 15A
Press “M” key 2 times
Access the menus.
DC 4Q 15A
MENU LEVEL
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press “M” key to access Diagnostic
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
SETUP PARAMETERS
Press “M” key to access Setup
Parameters menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
Press “M” key to access Password
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
ALARM STATUS
Press “M” key to access Alarm
Status menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
MENUS
Press “M” key to access Menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
SERIAL LINKS
Press “M” key to access Serial
Links menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
Press “M” key to access System
menus.
Press Scroll to next menu.
MENU LEVEL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Press “M” key to access Configure
Drive menus.
Menu Navigation
Remember, press “E” to return to the previous level of menus. Press “M” to enter the next level of menus.
Press the or key to go to the previous or next menu item at the same level.
7-4 Keypad Operation
MN792
Figure 7-3 The Menu Map
1
Diagnostics
Setup Parameters
2
3
Ramps
Setup
AUX I/O
Local Ramp
OP Station
Startup Values
4
Menu Levels
Jog / Slack
Raise / Lower
Password
Alarm Status
Special Blocks
PID
Field Control
FLD Voltage VARS
Current Profile
FLS Current VARS
FLD Weak VARS
Speed Loop
Advanced
Adaption
Standstill
Setpoints
Zero SPD Quench
Stop Rates
Calibration
Inhibit Alarms
Menus
Current Loop
Setpoint Sum 1
Serial Links
5703 Support
TEC Option
System Port (P3)
P3 Setup
Bisynch Support
ANIN1 (A2)
System
Software
Configure Enable
ANIN2 (A3)
Analog Inputs
ANIN3 (A4)
Configure I/O
Parameter Save
ANIN4 (A5)
Peek
ANIN5 (A6)
Analog Outputs
ANOUT1 (A7)
ANOUT3 (A9)
Armature Current is
not displayed in menu
ANOUT2 (A8)
Configure Drive
Digital Inputs
Digital Input (C4)
Digital Input (C5)
DIGIN1 (C6)
DIGIN2 (C7)
DIGIN3 (C8)
Digital Outputs
DIGOUT1 (B5)
Configure 5703
DIGOUT2 (B6)
Block Diagram
DIGOUT3 (B7)
Internal Links
Link 1
Full & Reduced Views
Full View Only
Link 10
MN792
Keypad Operation 7-5
Menu Shortcuts and Special Key Combinations
Quick Tag Information
In any menu system, when a parameter is displayed hold down the “M” key for approximately 1/2 second to
display the tag number for that parameter. In section 3, the example was given as shown in Figure 7-4. Each
parameter has a tag number associated with it. For example, the Output of Analog Input 1 has a tag number of
[246]. The value of tag [246] is 100. Input 1 parameter of Setpoint Sum 1 has a tag number of [100].
Figure 7-4 Menu Map
Setpoint Sum 1
Analog Input 1
1.0000
Output [246]
[230] Calibration
[231] MAX Value
[232] MIN Value
ANIN 1 (A2) [50]
100
0.00V
1.0000
1.0000
Positive
Positive
1.0000
1.0000
0.00%
105.00%
0.00%
0.00%
[6] Ratio 1
[208] Ratio 0
[8] Sign 1
[292] Sign 0
[419] Divider 1
[420] Divider 0
[131] Deadband
[375] Limit
[423] Input 2
[100] Input 1
[309] Input 0
SPT Sum [86]
Restore Factory Settings (2 Button Reset)
Power–up the drive holding two keys as described in Figure 7-5. The drive is now safely configured with the
factory settings described later in this manual (for the existing product code).
The factory settings are not automatically saved to non–volatile memory, so you must perform a Parameter
Save to save the settings.
Figure 7-5 2 Button Reset
With power off, press and hold the UP
and DOWN arrow keys.
Apply power to the control and continue
to hold both keys for at least 2 seconds.
s
t
INITIALIZING
FACTORY DEFAULTS
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 2Q 15A
7-6 Keypad Operation
MN792
3 button reset (Changing the Power Base). This is only necessary if you are installing a new control board on an existing
power base. Power–up the drive holding three keys as described in Figure 7-6.
It is important that the control be configured for the correct power rating damage may occur to the drive when it
attempts to run the motor.
Continue to select the correct product code rating. Perform a parameter save now (refer to Save Settings).
Figure 7-6 3 Button Reset
HOLD
Hold down these three keys:
Power–up the drive, continue to
hold the keys for 2 seconds.
s
E
PROG
M TO SET PCODE
E TO SAVE PCODE
M
E TO SAVE PCODE
PRODUCT CODE
Choices are:
M
PRODUCT CODE
DC 4Q 15A
s
Product Code (pick list)
Zero Cal Inputs (up to action)
Platform (STD/Elev)
250% i–limit (true/false)
t
PRODUCT CODE
DC 2Q 15A
E
E TO SAVE PCODE
PRODUCT CODE
E
M TO SET PCODE
E TO SAVE PCODE
E
BALDOR DC DRIVE
DC 2Q 15A
This is the preferred way of selecting a new product code. The available product codes are restricted to the set
of codes that match the power base.
If the product code is changed during the 3–button reset, the following parameters are set to their factory value
for the new product code:
Tag [523]
ARMATURE CURRENT
Tag [524]
FIELD CURRENT
Tag [201]
REGEN MODE
The 3–button reset does not cause the factory configuration to be loaded.
MN792
Keypad Operation 7-7
Operation Examples
Select a Menu View Level Two view levels are available: Full view or Reduced view. These were illustrated in Figure 7-3.
1 MENUS
FULL MENUS
LANGUAGE
Full view shows all menu choices. Reduced view only shows a portion of the menu items.
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
Press “PROG then
press “M” 2 times
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “MENUS” menu.
MENU LEVEL
MENUS
Press “M” key
Access the “MENUS” menus choices.
MENUS
FULL MENUS
Press “M” key
Access the “FULL MENUS” menus
choices.
FULL MENUS
ENABLED
Press Change to Reduced menus
FULL MENUS
DISABLED
Press “E” key
Exit to the “MENUS” menus choices.
MENUS
FULL MENUS
0.00%
Comments
This message is different for each
control.
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
Language Selection
1 MENUS
FULL MENUS
LANGUAGE
English is the preset language that is saved in ROM. A second language option is available so that
either can be selected. If s second language is selected, use the Parameter Save feature to store the new
settings.
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
Press “PROG then
press “M” 2 times
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “MENUS” menu.
MENU LEVEL
MENUS
Press “M” key
Access the “MENUS” menus choices.
MENUS
FULL MENUS
Press Scroll to “Language” menu.
MENUS
LANGUAGE
Press “E” key
Exit to the “MENUS” menus choices.
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
Press Scroll to the desired language.
MENUS
ITALIAN
Press “E” key
Exit to the “MENUS” menus choices.
MENUS
FULL MENUS
7-8 Keypad Operation
0.00%
Comments
This message is different for each
control.
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
MN792
Password Protection
A password prevents unauthorized parameter modification by making all parameters “read–only”. If
you attempt to modify a password protected parameter, it will cause “PASSWORD ??” to be displayed. The
1 PASSWORD
password protection is activated or deactivated using the ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD parameters.
CHANGE PASSWORD
Activated: ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are different.
Deactivated:ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are same.
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
0.00%
Comments
This message is different for each
control.
Press “PROG then
press “M” 2 times
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “PASSWORD” menu.
MENU LEVEL
PASSWORD
Press “M” key
Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”
choice.
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
Press Scroll to the “CHANGE PASSWORD”
choice.
PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
Press “M” key
Access the “CHANGE PASSWORD”
choice.
CHANGE PASSWORD
0x0000
Press or key
Select the new password.
CHANGE PASSWORD
0x0002
Press “E” key
Exit one level
PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
Press Scroll to the “ENTER PASSWORD”
choice.
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
Press “M” key
Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”
choice.
ENTER PASSWORD
0X0002
The new password is automatically
displayed.
Press or key
Select the new password.
ENTER PASSWORD
0x0000
Enter different password to activate.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
MN792
Keypad Operation 7-9
Deactivate a Password
1 PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
CHANGE PASSWORD
When password protection is activated, you can no longer edit the CHANGE PASSWORD
parameter until you deactivate the password protection (the value is displayed as “****”). First, enter the current
password (e.g. 0x0002) in the ENTER PASSWORD parameter.
Action
Apply Power
Description
Keypad Display shows this opening
message.
Display
FORWARD
REF:
0.00%
Comments
This message is different for each
control.
Press “PROG then
press “M” 2 times
Access the menus.
MENU LEVEL
DIAGNOSTICS
Press Scroll to “ENTER PASSWORD” menu.
MENU LEVEL
ENTER PASSWORD
Press “M” key
Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”
choice.
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
Press “M” key
Access the “ENTER PASSWORD”
choice.
ENTER PASSWORD
0X0000
Press or key
Select the new password.
ENTER PASSWORD
0x0002
Enter password.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
PASSWORD
ENTER PASSWORD
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
Now use the “Password Protection” procedure to set the Change Password value to “0X0000” to disable
password protection if desired.
Note: Because the ENTER PASSWORD parameter value is always reset to 0x0000 when powering–up the
drive, 0x0000 is the factory setting for the CHANGE PASSWORD parameter, i.e. by default, the two
parameter values are the same and so password protection is disabled.
7-10 Keypad Operation
MN792
Save Settings When parameter values have been changed they are not permanent until they are saved. If you turn power off
1 SYSTEM
2 CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIGURE ENABLE
then turn power on, the previous settings (stored in memory) will be used. To make your new parameter
settings the power up settings, they must be saved to non–volatile memory. These new values are always used
until this procedure is used to write new values to non–volatile memory.
Note: Always ensure that “Configure I/O = Disabled” before doing a Parameter Save. If “Configure I/O =
Enabled”, the control cannot run the motor.
1 PARAMETER SAVE
PARAMETER SAVE
Action
Press Description
Scroll to “SYSTEM” menu.
Display
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
Press “M” key
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
Press “M” key
CONFIGURE I/O
ENABLED
Press or key
Select Disabled.
CONFIGURE I/O
DISABLED
Press “E” key
Exit one level
SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O
Press “E” key
Exit one level
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
Press Scroll to “PARAMETER SAVE” menu.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press “M” key
Comments
PARAMETER SAVE
UP TO ACTION
Press Press to save parameters.
Press “E” key
Exit one level
PARAMETER SAVE
REQUESTED
Parameters are saved. Except the
“Local Setpoint”.
MENU LEVEL
PARAMETER SAVE
Press “E” several times to return to
the top level.
Note: The Local Setpoint value is not saved as a parameter.
MN792
Keypad Operation 7-11
7-12 Keypad Operation
MN792
Section 8
Troubleshooting
Overview
When a trip occurs, the Control’s power stage is immediately disabled (tripped) causing the motor and load to
coast to a stop. The trip remains until action is taken to reset the fault, even if the original cause of the trip is no
longer present. If a trip condition is detected the following occurs:
1.
The “OK” LED goes off indicating a trip condition has occurred. (Investigate, find and remove the
cause of the trip.)
2.
Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).
If a trip condition is detected, the keypad does the following actions.
1.
The OK LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. The keypad displays the activated
alarm. (Investigate, find and remove the cause of the trip.)
2.
Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).
3.
The alarm message(s) can be acknowledged by pressing the E key, however, the unit will not restart
at this point.
Reset a Trip Condition
All trips must be reset before the Control can be enabled. A trip can only be reset after the trip condition is no
longer active. (For example, a trip due to a heatsink over–temperature can not be reset until the temperature is
less than the trip level.)
More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the Heatsink Trip and the
Overvolts (VA) trips to be active. Alternatively it is possible for the control to trip due to a Field Over I error and
then for the HEATSINK TRIP trip to become active after the control has stopped (this may occur due to the
thermal time constant of the heatsink).
A trip is reset in one of two ways:
1.
Power–up, or remove and re–apply the auxiliary power supply.
2.
Stop and start the control, i.e. remove and re–apply the Start/Run signal (terminal C3 or C4, or the
keypad Stop and Run keys).
Success is indicated when the “OK” LED is on. The keypad display will return to its original display.
Fault Conditions
Problem
Control will not power–up
Control fuse keeps blowing
Cannot obtain HEALTH state
Motor will not run at switch
on
Motor runs and stops
Motor runs at full speed only
Possible Cause
Fuse blown
Remedy
Check supply details, replace with correct fuse.
Check Product Code against Model No.
Faulty cabling
Check all connections are correct and secure.
Check cable continuity
Faulty cabling or connections
wrong
Faulty control
Check for problem and rectify before replacing with correct fuse
Contact Baldor
Incorrect or no supply
available
Motor jammed
Check supply details
Motor becomes jammed
Stop the control and clear the jam
Reversed tachometer or open
circuit tachometer
Open circuit speed reference
potentiometer
Check tachometer connections
Stop the control and clear the jam
Check terminal
Serial (P3) Errors This is an output parameter in the System Port (P3) function block, where the parameter value can be read and
Value
>00C0
>01C7
>02C2
>03C2
>04C8
>05C8
>07C7
>07C8
>08C8
MN792
reset. The following values are returned if an inquiry (reading information from the control) is performed on this
Read/Write parameter. Writing any value to this parameter will set the value to >00C0. Clearing the last error
value may be useful to see if the error is re–occurring.
Description
No Error
Invalid mnemonic
Checksum (BCC) error
Framing or overrun error
Attempt to read from a write only parameter
Attempt to write to a read only parameter
Invalid message format
Invalid data (encoding error)
Data out of range
Troubleshooting 8-1
Alarm Messages When a trip occurs an alarm message is displayed at the keypad and information about the trip is stored in the
Alarm Status menu. The alarm message and the Last Alarm parameter are displayed. The Health Store and
Health Word parameters display information as hexadecimal values (0 – 9 and A, B, C, D, F shown in Table
8-1), or the sum of the hexadecimal values when more than one alarm is active. Therefore, the value can
represent one or more alarms.
Table 8-1
Decimal number
Display
10
11
A
B
12
C
13
D
14
E
15
F
The Last Alarm, Health Word and Health Store parameters use a four digit hexadecimal value to identify
individual trips. Each trip has a unique number.
(Tag [528]). This is the last alarm message to have been displayed. To reset the parameter simply press the (down) key to clear the alarm. Alternatively, you can switch the auxiliary supply off and on, causing No Active
Alarms to be displayed.
(Tag [115]). This parameter continuously monitors the control status. As alarms are added or removed, the
display immediately updates to show the hexadecimal sum of these alarms.
The value reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V), and when no trip condition is present.
(Tag [116]). Stores the hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm to occur causing the trip condition. The
display reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V).
Last Alarm
Health Word
Health Store
Table 8-2
LAST ALARM, HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE
Trip
No active alarms
Overspeed
Missing pulse
Field over I
Heatsink trip *
Thermistor
Over volts (VA)
SPD Feedback
Encoder failed
Field failed
3 Phase failed *
Phase lock
5703 RCV Error
Stall trip
Over I trip
Other ACCTS Failed *
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Trip Code
First Digit
Digit
Digit
Last Digit
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
For the last alarm parameter, other is replaced with the trip codes in Table 8-3.
8-2 Troubleshooting
MN792
Table 8-3
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
Trip
Autotune error
Autotune aborted
External trip
Remote trip
CONFIG Enabled
No OP–Station
PCB Version
Product code
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
LAST ALARM only
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
4
0
F
0
F
0
1
2
5
6
0
0
5
6
When more than one trip is to be represented at the same time then the trip codes are simply added together to
form the value displayed. Within each digit, values between 10 and 15 are displayed as letters A to F shown in
Table 8-1.
For example, if the Health Word parameter = 01A8, this represents a “1” in digit 3, an “8” and a “2” in digit 2,
(8+2 = 10, displayed as A) and an 8 in digit 1. This in turn represents the active trips Field Failed, Encoder
Failed, Over Volts (VA) and Heatsink Trip (unlikely).
Power Board LED Trip Information (Frame 4 and 5)
The Heatsink Trip, 3 Phase Failed and ACCTS Failed trips are associated with the following LED indications:
Frame 4
Check the power board LEDs for more Heatsink Trip information. The LEDs are on to indicate a problem.
Trips
field heatsink overtemperature
FLD HS OT
armature heatsink overtemperature
ARM HS OT
phase loss
PHASE LOSS
HEATSINK TRIP
3 PHASE FAILED
Frame 5
The master power board (on the left hand side of the unit) is fitted with a Parallel Expansion Board. This board
has four additional LEDs providing information about the slave power board (on the right hand side of the unit),
and about the general status of the unit.
Master Power Board
Trips
field heatsink overtemperature
FLD HS OT
Slave Power Board
(indicated by the
Parallel Expansion Board)
HEATSINK TRIP
3 PHASE FAILED
ACCTS FAILED
armature heatsink overtemperature ARM HS OT
ARM HS OT
phase loss
PHASE LOSS
PHASE LOSS
phase rotation fault
PH ROT FLT
current imbalance
CUR IMBALANCE
It is essential that the phase sequence applied
to the two stacks are identical otherwise the
converter will trip on 3 PHASE FAILED.
If there is a current imbalance between the
stacks which exceeds 10% the converter will
trip on ACCTS FAILED.
MASTER
MN792
SLAVE
Troubleshooting 8-3
Manage Trips from the Keypad
Trip Messages Most of the alarms have a delay timer so that the control only trips if the condition persists for the whole of the
delay period. If the control trips, the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for the trip.
These messages are shown in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4
Trip Message and Description
Overspeed
Motor overspeed – the speed feedback signal
has exceeded 125% of rated speed.
Missing Pulse
A missing pulse from the 6–pulse armature
current waveform. Trips when the motor loading
exceeds 1.5 times the Discontinuous parameter
value.
Field Over I
The motor field current has exceeded 120% of
the calibrated value
Heatsink Trip
The control heatsink temperature is too high
Thermistor
The motor temperature is too high
Over Volts (VA)
Motor armature voltage has exceeded 120% of
rated volts
Speed Feedback
The difference between speed feedback and
armature voltage feedback is greater than the
SPDFBK ALM Level parameter value
If FLD Weak Enable parameter is enabled,
speed feedback is less than 10% when in the
field weakening region
Encoder Failed
No speed feedback signal
Field Fail
Field current is less than 6% of rated current
when in Current Control mode
Field current is less than 50mA when in Voltage
Control mode (with default current burden of
15K)
8-4 Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
Badly adjusted speed loop (alarm only operates with encoder or armature volts
feedback selected)
Alarm time delay : 0.1 seconds
Firing plug failure
Connection failure
Alarm time delay : 60 seconds
Regulator failure
Badly tuned control loop (alarm only operates with field current control mode
selected)
Alarm time delay : 15 seconds
The ambient air temperature is too high
Poor ventilation or spacing between controls
Fan failure, check fuse on power board, wrong rotation (models above 70A bridge
rating)
Blocked ventilation slots Clogged air filters
Excessive armature current – nominal armature current on motor nameplate
should be checked against the current calibration for the control. The stack must
be allowed to cool in order to re–start the control.
Alarm time delay : 0.75 seconds
Inadequate ventilation
Blower failure –check for direction, clogged air filters (models above 70A bridge
rating)
Excessive armature current – check nominal armature current on nameplate
against current calibration)
The motor must be allowed to cool in order to re–start the control.
Alarm time delay : 15 seconds
Loose armature connection
Badly adjusted field voltage setting
Badly adjusted field current loop
Badly adjusted field–weakening bemf loop
Badly adjusted speed loop
Alarm time delay : 1.5 seconds
Analog tachometer feedback polarity incorrect (terminals G3 and G4)
The ENCODER SIGN parameter’s polarity is incorrect
Tachometer failure
Tachometer coupling failure
Alarm time delay : 0.4 seconds
The SPEED FBK SELECT parameter is set to ENCODER but an optional
Encoder board is not installed.
Check cable and connections on wire–ended encoder
Open circuit motor field – check connection and measure field resistance
Faulty operation of field controller
Where an AC supply feeds the onboard field regulator, check connections FL1 &
FL2 for line–to–line voltage (rather than line–to–neutral) – L1 into FL1, L2 into
FL2. The 3–phase supply must be present for synchronization. For loads where
no field supply is required, e.g. a permanent magnet motor, set the FIELD
ENABLE parameter to disable to suspend this alarm.
Alarm time delay : 0.75 seconds
MN792
Table 8-4 Continued
Trip Message and Description
3–Phase Failed
3–phase supply failure
Phase Lock
Supply frequency is outside the frequency band
limits 45 – 65Hz
5703 RCV Error
Invalid data received via P3 port from another
control
STALL TRIP
With motor stationary (AT ZERO SPEED
parameter shows TRUE), current has exceeded
the STALL THRESHOLD parameter value for
longer than the STALL TRIP DELAY parameter
value
OVER I TRIP
Current feedback value has exceeded 280% of
rated current
ACCTS FAILED
AC current transformer plug connection to
control power board missing
AUTOTUNE ERROR
Speed feedback has exceeded 20% of rated
speed, or field current feedback has exceeded
6% of rated field current
AUTOTUNE ABORT
The Autotune sequence has been aborted.
REMOTE TRIP
CONFIG INHIBIT
CALIB INHIBIT
COMMS FAULT CODE x
OP STATION (Keypad)
0xF100 ERROR CAM FULL INIT
0xFF02 UNIMPLEMENTED OPCODE
0xFF03 ERROR NMI
0xFF04 ERROR TRAP
0xFF05 ERROR PCB VERSION
0xFF06 ERROR PRODUCT CODE
0xFF07 ERROR HSO FULL
Possible Cause
Total failure of supply, or missing phase of 3–phase supply (detected under most
circumstances) – check main AC supply to the control, check high–speed thyristor
protection fuses, check power chassis coding fuses.
Check the main AC voltage of the control (refer to Product Code). This alarm may
not operate properly if the voltage is incorrect, i.e. wrong unit or control.
Check supply frequency
Synchronization errors caused by distorted supply
(Alarm only operates when MODE parameter is set to 5703 SLAVE)
(Alarm only operates when the STALL TRIP parameter is enabled).
(300% loading not exceeding 15ms or 325% not exceeding 6.6ms is acceptable)
Motor armature windings failure – check insulation resistance
Badly tuned current loop
Faulty control – Contact Baldor
Check armature current transformer plug for correct installation.
Frame 5 only : Load imbalance between the two parallel power stacks
The trip prevents the contactor closing and the current loop activating without
armature current feedback – important in the case of external stack controllers
where the thyristor stack is remote from the control board.
(Alarm only operates during the Autotune sequence).
Coast Stop, Program Stop, Enable or Start Run terminal(s) disabled during
Autotune sequence
The AUTOTUNE parameter reset during the Autotune sequence
Autotune sequence has timed–out (approximately 2 minutes).
REM. SEQUENCE parameter Remote Trip flag set to zero.
The drive was requested to start in Configuration mode.
Calibration fault
Operator Station faulty
Keypad has been disconnected from control while running in local mode.
These are internal software errors. If these should occur please contact Baldor.
Symbolic Alarm Messages These are generally internal software or hardware errors. If these occur please contact Baldor.
Number
Description
Action
0xF003
Pre–Ready Fault
0xF004
0xF005
0xF006
0xFF03
Aux Contactor Open
External Trip
Remote Trip
Aux Power Fail
MN792
Coding not present. Replace power board or chassis. (If an external stack,
check coding supply field).
The internal auxiliary 3–phase contactor failed to close.
Ext Trip (C2) open circuit.
REM. Sequence parameter Remote Trip flag set to zero.
Check Aux. Supply and/or Main AC Input
Troubleshooting 8-5
Self Test Alarms
Self Test Alarm and Meaning
Possible Reason for Alarm
(EEPROM) CHECKSUM FAIL
Parameters not saved, or are corrupted.
(The alarm appears at power–up or at the end of “Upload” UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded – press the E key and perform a PARAMETER SAVE. The
control will be returned to its factory default values.
ENABLE CONFIG.
The ENABLE CONFIG. parameter has
been left in the Enable state.
Select Disable for the ENABLE CONFIG. parameter
LANGUAGE CHECKSUM FAIL
Incorrect language selected, or
corrupted
(The alarm appears at power–up or at the end of “Upload” UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded – press the E key and reload the correct language or de–select
the second language.
INIT CAL FAIL
Self calibration of analog inputs has
exceeded normal tolerance
(The alarm appears at power–up)
As a temporary measure, the tolerance can be increased by 0.1% with each press of the
E key, however, this indicates a hardware fault – contact Baldor.
IA FBK CAL FAIL / IA INST CAL FAIL
The self calibration of the armature
current has failed
(The alarm appears at power–up)
If powering the unit off and on does not remove the problem, a hardware failure is
suspected. Contact Baldor.
Setting Trip Conditions The following parameters in the CALIBRATION menu are used to set trip conditions:
Over Speed Level
SPDFBK ALM Level
Stall Threshold
Stall Trip Delay
Remote Trip Delay
Viewing Trip Conditions
The following parameters in the Level 1 ALARM STATUS menu can be viewed to investigate trip conditions:
LAST ALARM
HEALTH WORD
HEALTH STORE
THERMISTOR STATE
SPEED FBK STATE
STALL TRIP
REMOTE TRIP
Inhibiting Alarms
Note:
8-6 Troubleshooting
The following alarms can be inhibited in the Setup Parameters::INHIBIT ALARMS menu.
FIELD FAIL
5703 RCV ERROR
STALL TRIP
TRIP RESET
SPEED FBK ALARM
ENCODER ALARM
REM TRIP INHIBIT
The Stall Trip parameter in the Diagnostics menu is set regardless of the state of Stall Trip inhibit. The flag
is set after the stall time–out expires. The relevant bit (bit 12) in the Health Word and Health Store
parameters is only set when Stall Trip is enabled.
MN792
Test Points
The following test points are located on the control board and can be accessed through the Technology Option
housing. When used with a meter, they will provide valuable information in the event of a fault. Contact Baldor
for more information.
IF
Technology Box
Option
IA
0V
PEEK
VA
Table 8-5
Maintenance
Repair
MN792
Test
Point
Description
IF
Field current feedback 0.0V = 0% 4.0V =100% (mean voltage),
value of FIELD I FBK diagnostic, Tag No. 300
IA
Armature current feedback ± 1.1V ≡ ±100% (mean current),
value of CURRENT FEEDBACK diagnostic, Tag No. 298
VA
Armature volts feedback ±10V ≡ ±100% calculated VA (mean voltage),
value of TERMINAL VOLTS diagnostic, Tag No. 57
0V
0V
PEEK
PEEK software (factory use only)
The Baldor control requires very little maintenance, if any, and should provide years of trouble free operation
when installed and applied correctly. Occasional visual inspection and cleaning should be considered to ensure
tight wiring connections and to remove dust, dirt, or foreign debris which can reduce heat dissipation.
Before attempting to service this equipment, all input power must be removed from the control to avoid the
possibility of electrical shock. The servicing of this equipment should be handled by a qualified electrical service
technician experienced in the area of high power electronics. Electrical shock hazards are present inside this
control.
Only qualified personnel should attempt to repair or replace parts. Isolate the control from all sources of
electrical power before service is perfomed.
Save Your Data
The Control retains saved settings during power–down. You can download and upload these settings to a new
or replacement control, if necessary. Data should be copied when the parameters were changed. You may
attempt the back–up of your application data now, refer to “Copying an Application” in Section 7. If successful,
the data can be restored to the new control. This information will be helpful when you contact Baldor for help.
Control Model number,
Voltage rating and
hp rating. These can be obtained from the motor nameplate.
Troubleshooting 8-7
8-8 Troubleshooting
MN792
Section 9
Specifications & Product Data
Identification
Digital DC Control
BC29D7A XXXX –CXX
Baldor Control
Series 29 Digital DC
230/460VAC, 3 Phase
Input Voltage
Logic Power (Single Phase)
CO7 Internal Logic Transformer
CO1 Requires 115VAC Logic Power
CO2 Requires 230VAC Logic Power
Output Amps
Specifications:
Enclosure:
Enclosure rating:
Europe
North America / Canada
Enclosure Heat Rise:
(if placed inside a totally enclosed cabinet)
Horsepower:
Voltage Range:
230 VAC Models
460 VAC Models
Input Frequency:
Logic Power:
AC Line Contactor:
Output Voltage:
Output Current:
Output Current Limit:
Service Factor:
Duty:
Ambient Operating Temperature:
Rated Storage Temperature:
Humidity:
Altitude:
Shock:
Vibration:
Climatic conditions:
Safety:
EMC Compliance:
Europe
North America / Canada
Overvoltage Category
Pollution Degree
All models
If external filters installed
MN792
Open Type (Chassis Mount)
IP00 (Frame 1 is IP20)
UL Open type
The exposed metal surfaces dissipate approximately 50 Watts / m2 for a
10 °C temperature rise above the ambient
5–300 HP, 3 Phase
198-242 VAC 3φ 60 Hz / 50 Hz
414-550 VAC 3φ 60 Hz / 50 Hz
50/60 HZ ± 5%
Built in for size 1 and 2 controls.
External for Size 3, 4 and 5 controls.
115VAC, 1 phase with 3A fast blow fuse.
Built in for size 1 and 2 controls.
External for Size 3, 4 and 5 controls.
3 Amps maximum at control rated voltage.
DC; 0 – 1.2 times input VAC
See Ratings
Adjustable 150% for 30 seconds, 200% for 10 seconds,
250% for 3 seconds
1.0
Continuous
0 to +45 °C (sizes 1 & 2); 0 to +40 °C (sizes 3, 4 and 5)
Derate Output 2% per °C over rating up to 55 °C Maximum
– 25 °C to +55 °C
10 to 85% RH at 40 °C Non-Condensing
Sea level to 1650 Feet (500 Meters)
Derate 1% per 660 Feet (200 Meters) above 1650 Feet
Maximum altitude 16,500 Feet (5,000 Meters)
1G
0.5G at 10Hz to 60Hz
Class 3k3, as defined by EN60721–3–3 (1995)
EN50178 (1998), when installed inside suitable enclosure.
UL508C
Category III (3 phase power), Category II (1 phase Logic power)
Pollution Degree 2
European Directive 89 / 336 / EEC;
EN50082–1 (1992) and EN50082–2 (1995) for immunity
EN50081–2 (1994) Class A conducted emissions
Specifications & Product Data 9-1
Specifications: Continued
Keypad Display:
Display:
Keys:
Display Function:
Running
Setting
Trip
LED Indicators:
Remote Mount
Backlit LCD Alphanumeric
2 Lines x 16 Characters
10 key membrane with tactile response
Motor RPM, Output current, Voltage (selectable)
Parameter values for setting and viewing
Separate message for each trip, last trip retained in memory
OK
FWD
SEQ
REV
REF
Run
Stop
10 feet (3m) max from control
Control Specifications:
Control Method:
Input Line Impedance:
Speed Feedback Type:
Three phase, full wave, uni-directional DC control with 6 total pulses per cycle
and 6 controlled pulses per cycle. NEMA Type C.
5% Maximum
Armature (Standard)
Encoder (optional, requires expansion board)
Tachometer (optional, requires expansion board. 200V max without resistor)
Pulse Generator
Speed Setting:
±10VDC, 0–10VDC, 0–20mA, 4–20mA, RS232. Digital using keypad.
Optional expansion board: RS485, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet.
Accel / Decel Time:
JOG Speed:
Minimum Output Speed:
Maximum Output Speed:
0 - 600 seconds
0 - Maximum speed
0 - 100% Maximum speed
0 - 200% Maximum speed
Motor Matching:
Automatic tuning to motor with manual override
Field Power Supply:
Protective Functions:
Type
Voltage
Current
Field Economy Level
Control Trip
Fusing
External Output
Full wave fixed voltage or current regulated
DC; 0 to 90% of line input voltage
4 Amps (Size 1), 10 Amps (size 2 and 3), 30 Amps (size 4 and 5)
Off or 50%
Monitored Alarm conditions (see Alarm Indications)
Standard Input Line, Armature, Field and Control logic, High Energy MOV’s.
LED indicators for trip conditions, 3 assignable logic outputs– 30VDC,
3 ±10VDC analog outputs (2 assignable).
Analog Inputs (5):
Full Scale Range
Resolution
Input impedance
Update rate
±10VDC
12 bits + sign
w 10k ohms
10 milli seconds for 60Hz line (3milli seconds for Analog 2)
Analog Outputs (3):
Full Scale Range
Resolution
Update rate
0–10VDC @ 5mA
10 bits + sign
10 milli seconds for 60Hz line
Digital Inputs (5):
Rated Voltage
Input impedance
Update rate
10–30VDC
w 4.7k ohms
10 milli seconds for 60Hz line
Digital Outputs (3):
Alarm Indications:
Overspeed
Over volts (VA)
Phase lock
Autotune Error
Maximum Voltage
On Current Sink
On Voltage Drop
Missing pulse
SPD Feedback
5703 RCV Error
Autotune Abort
9-2 Specifications & Product Data
30VDC
100 mA maximum
2VDC maximum
Field over I
Encoder failed
Stall trip
Remote Trip
Heatsink trip
Field failed
Over I trip
Comms Fault Code
Thermistor
3 Phase failed
ACCTS Failed
MN792
Specifications: Continued
Encoder
Maximum Pulse Rate
Receiver Current
Minimum Differential Input Voltage
Encoder supply
Terminal Wire Size
100kHz
10mA per channel
3.5V
5VDC, 12VDC, 15VDC or 24VDC; 2W maximum
16AWG
Tachometer
Maximum Input Voltage
Switch settings
Terminal Wire Size
200VDC
Selectable in 1VDC increments
16AWG
Terminal Tightening Torque
Terminals
1
Power Connector (L1, L2, L3)
16 lb–in
(1.8 Nm)
16 lb–in
(1.8 Nm)
17 lb–in
(2.0 Nm)
Power Connector (A+, A–)
Ground Terminals
Power Connector (F+, F–, BL1, BL2, BL3, FL1, FL2)
Power Connector (L, N, 3, 4, TH1, TH2,
Aux Cont–TB4)
Power Connector (D1–D8, Term+, Therm–)
Torque (by Control Size)
2
3
40–110A
125–165A
120 lb–in
97 lb–in
(13.5 Nm)
(11 Nm)
120 lb–in
375 lb–in
97 lb–in
(13.5 Nm) (42.4 Nm)
(11 Nm)
120 lb–in
( 13.5Nm)
7 lb–in (0.8 Nm)
5 lb–in (0.5 Nm)
4
5
204 lb–in
(23 Nm)
204 lb–in
(23 Nm)
60 lb–in
(6.8 Nm)
7 lb–in (0.8 Nm)
5 lb–in (0.5 Nm)
4 lb–in
(0.45 Nm)
5 – 7 lb–in (0.6 – 0.8Nm)
3.5 in–lb (0.4Nm)
5.3 in–lb (0.6Nm)
Signal Connectors (A, B, C)
Encoder Expansion Board
Tachometer Expansion Board
Ratings
Catalog
Number
Input
VAC
Size
BC29D7A35–CO7
BC29D7A70–CO7
BC29D7A110–CO7
BC29D7A165–CO7
BC29D7A243–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A380–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A500–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A725–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A830–CO1/CO2
BC29D7A1580–CO1/CO2
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
230/460
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
5
Max. Output
HP
HP
Armature
@230VAC @460VAC
Amps
10
20
30
50
75
100
150
200
250
450
20
40
60
100
150
200
300
400
500
900
35
70
110
165
243
380
500
725
830
1580
Peak
Amps
53
105
165
248
365
570
750
1088
1245
2370
Logic
Supply
AC Line
Contactor
Approx.
Ship Weight
lbs.
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
External*
External*
External*
External*
External*
External*
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
External
External
External
External
External
External
14
23
23
23
44
71
71
71
97
200
* CO1 requires 115VAC external logic supply.
CO2 requires 230VAC external logic supply.
MN792
Specifications & Product Data 9-3
Dimensions
M
M
Size 1, 2, 3, 4
Size 5
For safe operation, allow a clearance distance between each control and on all sides of each control.
Size
1
2
3
4 *
4 *
5 *
Amp Rating
15–35
40–165
270
380–500
725–830
1580
14.8
21.5
19.7
27.6
27.6
27.6
*
A
(375)
(546)
(500)
(700)
(700)
(700)
14.2
21.0
15.7
26.8
26.8
26.8
A1
(360)
(530)
(400)
(680)
(680)
(680)
Dimensions
B
7.9 (200)
7.9 (200)
11.8 (297)
10.0 (253)
10.0 (253)
20.0 (506)
5.5
5.5
7.9
5.9
5.9
5.9
B1
(140)
(140)
(200)
(150)
(150)
(150)
C
8.7 (220)
11.5 (292)
8.3 (213)
14.2 (358)
14.2 (358)
14.2 (358)
The height of Size 4 and 5 controls does not include the external vent kit. The height of the external
vent is 10.39 (264) and approximately 3.9 (99) extends beyond the top of the enclosure.
9-4 Specifications & Product Data
MN792
Dimensions Continued
EMC Filters
EMC Filter Assemblies – 15A through 180A
C
C
A
PE
A
PE
B
CO467844U015
B1
B
C1
B1
CO467844U040
CO467844U070
CO467844U110
CO467844U165
C1
EMC Filter Assemblies – 270A and Larger
20.0
L2
8.5
14.5
Line
370.0
L3'
L2'
Load
L3
L1'
L1
4 Places
PE
GND
944.0
15.0
984.0
80.0
EMC Filter
CO467844U015
CO467844U040
CO467844U070
CO467844U110
CO467844U165
CO467844U180
MN792
Alternate Side Mount
A
4.49(114)
7.48(190)
7.48(190)
7.48(190)
8.82(224)
3.15(80)
B
9.01(229)
12.28(312)
12.28(312)
12.28(312)
12.28(312)
38.74(984)
300.0
47.0
B1
8.54(217)
11.73(298)
11.73(298)
11.73(298)
11.73(298)
37.16(944)
C
2.16(55)
3.66(93)
3.66(93)
3.66(93)
4.96(126)
14.57(370)
C1
1.65(42)
3.11(79)
3.11(79)
3.11(79)
4.41(112)
11.81(300)
PE
M5
M8
M8
M8
M10
M8
Specifications & Product Data 9-5
9-6 Specifications & Product Data
MN792
Appendix A
CE Guidelines
CE Declaration of Conformity
Baldor indicates that the products are only components and not ready for immediate or instant use within the
meaning of “Safety law of appliance”, “EMC Law” or “Machine directive”.
The final mode of operation is defined only after installation into the user’s equipment. It is the responsibility of
the user to verify compliance.
The product conforms with the following standards:
DIN VDE 0160 / 05.88
DIN VDE 0100
DIN IEC 326 Teil 1 / 10.90
DIN VDE 0110Teil 1-2 / 01.89
DIN VDE 0110Teil 20 / 08.90
EN 60529 / 10.91
Electronic equipment for use in electrical power installations
Erection of power installations with nominal voltages up to 1000V
Design and use of printed boards
Dimensioning of clearance and creepage
distances
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
EMC – Conformity and CE – Marking
The information contained herein is for your guidance only and does not guarantee that the installation will meet
the requirements of the council directive 89/336/EEC.
The purpose of the EEC directives is to state a minimum technical requirement common to all the member
states within the European Union. In turn, these minimum technical requirements are intended to enhance the
levels of safety both directly and indirectly.
Council directive 89/336/EEC relating to Electro Magnetic Compliance (EMC) indicates that it is the
responsibility of the system integrator to ensure that the entire system complies with all relative directives at the
time of installing into service.
Motors and controls are used as components of a system, per the EMC directive. Hence all components,
installation of the components, interconnection between components, and shielding and grounding of the
system as a whole determines EMC compliance.
The CE mark does not inform the purchaser which directive the product complies with. It rests upon the
manufacturer or his authorized representative to ensure the item in question complies fully with all the relative
directives in force at the time of installing into service, in the same way as the system integrator previously
mentioned. Remember, it is the instructions of installation and use, coupled with the product, that comply with
the directive.
Wiring of Shielded (Screened) Cables
Remove the outer insulation
to expose the overall screen.
MN792
Conductive
Clamp
CE Guidelines A-1
Using CE approved components will not guarantee a CE compliant system!
1.
The components used in the drive, installation methods used, materials selected for interconnection
of components are important.
2.
The installation methods, interconnection materials, shielding, filtering and grounding of the system
as a whole will determine CE compliance.
3.
The responsibility of CE mark compliance rests entirely with the party who offers the end system for
sale (such as an OEM or system integrator).
Baldor products which meet the EMC directive requirements are indicated with a “CE” mark. A duly signed CE
declaration of conformity is available from Baldor.
EMC Wiring Technique
1
CABINET
The drawing shows an electroplated zinc coated enclosure,
which is connected to ground.
This enclosure has the following advantages:
– All parts mounted on the back plane are connected to ground.
– All shield (screen) connections are connected to ground.
Within the cabinet there should be a spatial separation between
power wiring (motor and AC power cables) and control wiring.
2
SCREEN CONNECTIONS
All connections between components must use shielded cables.
The cable shields must be connected to the enclosure. Use
conductive clamps to ensure good ground connection. With this
technique, a good ground shield can be achieved.
3
EMC – FILTER
The EMI or main filter should be mounted next to the power
supply (here BPS). For the connection to and from the main
filter screened cables should be used. The cable screens should
be connected to screen clamps on both sides. (Exception:
Analog Command Signal).
4
Grounding (Earth)
For safety reasons (VDE0160), all BALDOR components must
be connected to ground with a separate wire. The diameter of
the wire must be at minimum AWG#6 (10mm@). Ground
connections (dashed lines) must be made from the central
ground to the regen resistor enclosure and from the central
ground to the Shared Power Supply.
5
Y–CAPACITOR
The connection of the regeneration resistor can cause RFI (radio
frequency interference) to be very high. To minimize RFI, a
Y–capacitor is used. The capacitor should only be connected
between the dynamic brake resistor housing and terminal pin R1
(lead from Lin).
Recommendation: 0,1µF / 250VAC Type: PME265
BALDOR–Ordering–No.: ASR27104
Y
Capacitor
A-2 CE Guidelines
MN792
EMC Installation Instructions
To ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the following installation instructions should be completed.
These steps help to reduce interference.
Consider the following:
•
Grounding of all system elements to a central ground point
•
Shielding of all cables and signal wires
•
Filtering of power lines
A proper enclosure should have the following characteristics:
A) All metal conducting parts of the enclosure must be electrically connected to the back plane. These
connections should be made with a grounding strap from each element to a central grounding point .
B) Keep the power wiring (motor and power cable) and control wiring separated. If these wires must
cross, be sure they cross at 90 degrees to minimize noise due to induction.
C) The shield connections of the signal and power cables should be connected to the screen rails or
clamps. The screen rails or clamps should be conductive clamps fastened to the cabinet. D) The cable to the regeneration resistor must be shielded. The shield must be connected to ground at
both ends.
E) The location of the AC mains filter has to be situated close to the drive so the AC power wires are as
short as possible.
F) Wires inside the enclosure should be placed as close as possible to conducting metal, cabinet walls
and plates. It is advised to terminate unused wires to chassis ground. G) To reduce ground current, use at least a 10mm2 (6 AWG) solid wire for ground connections.
Grounding in general describes all metal parts which can be connected to a protective conductor, e.g. housing of
cabinet, motor housing, etc. to a central ground point. This central ground point is then connected to the main plant
(or building) ground.
Or run as twisted pair at minimum.
AC Line Filter, Choke and Motor Connections for CE
L1
L2
L3
High
Speed
Fuses
Note 1
Protective
Earth
Independent
PE Point
Note 2
Note 3 & 4
AC Line Filter
Start
Contactor
Note 6
RE
Note 7
AC Line
Choke
4
3
L1
Field
Baldor Control
A+
+
+
MN792
F+
L3
TB1
TB3
F–
L2
Notes:
1.
See Protection Device description in Section 4.
2.
Metal conduit or shielded cable should be used. Connect conduits so the
use of a Reactor or RC Device does not interrupt EMI/RFI shielding.
3.
Use the same gauge wire for Earth as used for L1, L2, L3 connections.
4.
Use same gauge wire for Earth ground as is used for L and N, or L1, L2
L3. (VDE (Germany) requires 10mm2 minimum, 6AWG).
5.
Reference EMC wiring in Appendix A for CE compliance.
6.
For EN60204 installations in Europe:
S Each conductor used for earth connections must individually meet
the protective earth (PE) conductor requirements.
S AC Line Filter must be connected to earth.
S For permanent earth connection, the control requires two protective
earth conductors (10mm2) or one (10mm2) conductor connected to
the independent PE point near the control.
S The Motor PE conductor is run with the motor wires and in the same
conduit. Connect to the independent PE point near the control.
S Connect the control PE to the independent PE point near the control.
7.
AC Contactor is internal for size 1 and 2 controls. Size 3–5, the
contactor can be connected between TB3–3 (line) and TB3–4 (neutral)
and its purpose is to provide AC power disconnection. Maximum inrush
current must not exceed 3A.
A–
This figure shows optional components not furnished with control.
See Recommended Tightening Torques in Section 9.
Armature
CE Guidelines A-3
Cable Screens Grounding
Cable (Twisted Pair Conductors)
Conductive Clamp – Must contact bare cable shield
and be secured to metal backplane.
Input Signal Cable Grounding
Control
Cable
Simulated Encoder Output Cable Grounding
Control
Cable
To
Controller
Encoder Cable Grounding
Expansion
Board
A+
A–
B+
B–
C+
C–
A-4 CE Guidelines
Encoder
MN792
Appendix B
Parameter Table
Parameter Values (Version 5.13) RW: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write. WB Block = WorkbenchD Block name.
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number
Tag
2
3
4
5
6
7
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Ramp Accel Time
Ramp Decel Time
Constant Accel
Ramp Input
Ratio 1
Ratio 2 (A3)
8
9
RW
RW
Sign 1
Sign 2 (A3)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Zero SPD. Offset
Standstill Logic
Zero Threshold
SPD.INT.TIME
SPD.PROP.GAIN
CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
PROP. GAIN
INT. GAIN
Autotune
Field Fail
Armature V CAL.
IR Compensation
Encoder RPM
Analog TACH CAL
Encoder Lines
Armature I (A9)
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
37
39
41
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
PROG Stop Time
Stop Time
Stall Trip
Stop Zero Speed
Additional DEM
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
FULL MENUS
Configure Enable
Setpoint 4
42
43
RO
RW
44
RW
45
RW
47
48
49
50
51
52
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
WB Block
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Setpoint Sum 1
Speed Loop
Range
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
-105.00 to 105.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Factory Setting
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
Enabled
0.00%
1.0000
.0000
MN
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
Setpoint Sum 1
Speed Loop
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
Positive
a8
a9
Calibration
Standstill
Standstill
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Alarms
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
0.00%
Disabled
2.00%
0.500 Secs
10
90.00%
45.00
3.50
Off
Enabled
1.0000
0.00%
1750 RPM
1.0000
1024
Bipolar
aa
ab
ac
ad
ae
af
ag
ah
ai
aj
ak
al
am
an
ao
ap
0.1 Secs
10.0 Secs
Inhibited
2.00%
0.00%
100.00%
100.00%
200.00%
Enabled
Disabled
0.00%
aq
ar
as
at
au
av
aw
ax
b1
b3
b5
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Alarms
Stop Rates
Current Loop
Current Profile
Current Profile
Current Profile
Menus
Unallocated
Speed Loop
Current Loop
Digout 1 (B5)
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
False
TRUE
b6
b7
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b8
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b9
RW
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
MENUS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
At Current Limit
DIAGNOSTICS
Modulus
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
Modulus
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
Modulus
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SPEED FBK SELECT CONFIGURE DRIVE
-5.00 to 5.00 %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0.9800 to 1.1000
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 to 6000 RPM
0.9800 to 1.1000
10 to 5000
0 : UNIPOLAR
1 : BIPOLAR
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0.00 to 100.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
-105.00 to 105.00 %
Speed Loop
Arm Volts Fbk
bb
2
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
NEG. I CLAMP
ENCODER SIGN
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
Current Loop
Speed Loop
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 3
0 : Arm Volts Fbk
1 : Analog Tach
2 : Encoder
3 : Encoder/Analog
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
0.00%
Positive
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
bc
bd
be
bf
bg
Notes:
MN792
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
Notes
Output, 1
2
2
2
2
2
Output
2
Output
Output
Output
1. This parameter is not saved in non–volitile memory.
2. This parameter can only be written when control is stopped.
3. This parameter can only be written when contol is in configuration mode (stopped & Configure Drive::Configure Enable = Enabled).
4. This parameter is reserved.
Parameter Table B-1
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
R/W
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
ANOUT 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2 (A8)
Terminal Volts
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
UNFIL.ENCODER
BACK EMF
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
Speed Setpoint
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
IaFbk UNFILTERED
IaDmd UNFILTERED
ACTUAL POS I LIM
Start (C3)
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
At Zero Speed
At Zero Setpoint
At Standstill
Program Stop
SPEED FBK ALARM
Drive Start
Contactor Closed
Drive Enable
Ramp Output
SPT SUM OUTPUT
POS. I CLAMP
NEG. I CLAMP
Speed Demand
Bipolar Clamps
PROG STOP I LIM
Encoder Alarm
IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
AUX DIGOUT 1
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
Source Tag
98
RW
Source Tag
99
RW
Source Tag
100
102
RW
RW
Input 1
Destination Tag
103
RW
Value For True
104
RW
Value For False
105
RW
Destination Tag
106
RW
Value For True
B-2 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
WB Block
Analog Input 4
Analog Input 5
Analog Output 1
Analog Output 2
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Diagnostics
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Diagnostics
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 3
Digout 1 (B5)
Digout 2 (B6)
Digout 3 (B7)
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Stop Rates
Alarms
Diagnostics
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Ramps
Setpoint Sum 1
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Stop Rates
Current Loop
Stop Rates
Alarms
Current Profile
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Digout 1 (B5)
Range
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 to 549
Factory Setting
0.00V
10.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.0%
0.0%
0 RPM
0.0%
-90.0%
0.03%
0.00%
0.00%
0.0%
0.0%
90.00%
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
True
True
True
False
Enabled
Off
Off
Disabled
0.00%
0.00%
90.0%
-90.0%
0.00%
Disabled
100.00%
Enabled
200.00%
Off
Off
Off
77
MN
bh
bi
bj
bk
bl
bm
bn
bo
bp
bq
br
bs
bt
bu
bv
bw
bx
by
bz
c0
c1
c2
c3
c4
c5
c6
c7
c8
c9
ca
cb
cc
cd
ce
cf
cg
ch
ci
cj
ck
cl
cm
cn
co
cp
Notes
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Digout 2 (B6)
0 to 549
122
cq
2, 3
Digout 3 (B7)
0 to 549
125
cr
2, 3
Setpoint Sum 1
Digital Input 1
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0 to 549
0.00%
90
cs
cu
2, 3
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cv
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
cw
Digital Input 2
0 to 549
118
cx
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cy
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
2
2, 3
2, 3
MN792
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
107
R/W
RW
Name
Value For False
108
RW
Destination Tag
109
RW
Value For True
110
RW
Value For False
111
112
113
115
116
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
128
129
130
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
5703 RCV ERROR
Stall Trip
Ramping
Health Word
Health Store
Ramp Hold
I DMD. ISOLATE
Enter Password
Change Password
Health LED
Peek Data
Peek Scale
Ready
MIN SPEED
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 2
Mode
131
132
RW
RW
Deadband Width
SETPT. RATIO
133
RW
SETPT. SIGN
134
135
RW
RW
Source Tag
Destination Tag
136
137
155
161
168
169
170
171
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
Feed Forward
Discontinuous
Version Number
AUX START
Aux Enable
Field Enabled
Field Enable
Setpoint
172
RW
173
RW
174
RW
175
RW
176
RW
177
RW
178
RW
179
RW
180
RW
MN792
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
ALARM STATUS
DIAGNOSTICS
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
PASSWORD
PASSWORD
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::PEEK
SYSTEM::PEEK
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
WB Block
Digital Input 2
Range
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Factory Setting
0.00%
MN
cz
Notes
Digital Input 3
0 to 549
119
d0
2, 3
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
d1
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
d2
Alarms
Alarms
Ramps
Alarms
Alarms
Ramps
Current Loop
Enabled
OK
False
0x0200
0x0000
Off
Disabled
0x0000
0x0000
True
0x0078
8.00
False
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0
d3
d4
d5
d7
d8
da
db
dc
dd
de
df
dg
dh
di
dk
dl
dm
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
Setpoint Sum 1
5703
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : OK 1 : Failed
0 : False 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : False 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
-300.00 to 300.00
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Disabled
1 : 5703 Master
2 : 5703 Slave
3 : CELite (EIASCII)
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.0%
0.0000
dn
do
5703
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
dp
5703
Scaled 5703 InĆ
put
Current Loop
Current Loop
Unallocated
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
0 to 549
0 to 549
89
41
dq
dr
2, 3
2, 3
0.10 to 50.00
0.00 to 200.00 %
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 100.00 %
2.00
12.00%
4
On
On
Disabled
Enabled
100.00%
ds
dt
eb
eh
eo
ep
eq
er
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
1.28
es
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.10
et
Field Control
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
Disabled
eu
Field Control
0.10 to 50.00
2.00
ev
Field Control
0.00 to 200.00
40.00
ew
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.30
ex
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00%
ey
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
10.00%
ez
Calibration
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
50.00%
f0
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
INT. GAIN
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
PROP. GAIN
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
FLD. WEAK ENABLE SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
EMF LEAD
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
EMF LAG
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
EMF GAIN
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
MAX VOLTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
MIN FLD.CURRENT SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
Alarms
Alarms
Ramps
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
System Port P3
Output
Output
Output
Output
1
Output
Output
Output
Output
2
2
2
Parameter Table B-3
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
181
182
183
184
185
R/W
RO
RW
RO
RO
RW
186
RW
187
RO
Name
Unfil. Field FBK
Field I CAL.
Field Demand
FLD.FIRING ANGLE
FLD.QUENCH
DELAY
FLD. QUENCH
MODE
Raw Input
Keypad Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
WB Block
Calibration
Calibration
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Range
xxx.xx %
0.9800 to 1.1000
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx DEG
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
Factory Setting
0.00%
1.0000
0.00%
0.00 Deg
0.0 Secs
MN
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
188
189
RW
RO
Over Speed Level
Scaled Input
191
RW
BEMF FBK LEAD
192
RW
BEMF FBK LAG
195
RW
Threshold (>)
196
RW
Threshold (>)
197
RW
Threshold (>)
198
RW
P3 Baud Rate
199
200
201
RW
RW
RW
202
203
204
206
207
208
209
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
Field Control
0 : Quench 1 : Standby
Quench
f6
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
5703
xxx.xx %
0.00%
f7
Output
Calibration
5703
0.00 to 200.00 %
xxx.xx %
125.00%
0.00%
f8
f9
4
Output, 2
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fb
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fc
Digout 1 (B5)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
ff
2
Digout 2 (B6)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fg
2
Digout 3 (B7)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fh
2
9600
fi
2
Delay
Rate
Regen Mode
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Current Loop
10.0 Secs
60.0 Secs
2Q(Non-regen)
fj
fk
fl
2, 4
2, 4
2
RW
RO
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
INT. DEFEAT
Inverse Time O/P
Aiming Point
Encoder
Speed Feedback
Ratio 0
FLD.CTRL MODE
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Speed Loop
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Setpoint Sum 1
Field Control
Off
200.0%
103.00%
0 RPM
0.01%
1.0000
Voltage Control
fm
fn
fo
fq
fr
fs
ft
210
212
RW
RO
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
Operating Mode
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
Field Control
Jog/Slack
67.0%
Stop
fu
fw
216
217
218
219
224
225
227
228
230
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
PROG STOP LIMIT
Stop Limit
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Stall Trip Delay
Crawl Speed
AUX JOG
Mode
Calibration
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Calibration
Jog/Slack
Aux I/O
Jog/Slack
Analog Input 1
60.0 Secs
60.0 Secs
20.00 %
-5.00 %
10.0 Secs
10.00%
On
FALSE
1.0000
g0
g1
g2
g3
g8
g9
gb
gc
ge
231
RW
Max Value
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gf
232
RW
Min Value
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
0:300 1:600 2:1200
3:2400 4:4800 5:9600
6:19200
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : 2Q (Non-regen)
1 : 4Q (Regen)
0 : Off 1 : On
xxx.xx %
0.00 to 103.00 %
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Voltage Control
1 : Current Control
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0 : Stop
1 : Stop
2 : Jog Sp. 1
3 : Jog Sp. 2
4 : Run
5 : Take Up Sp. 1
6 : Take Up Sp. 2
7 : Crawl
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False 1 : True
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gg
B-4 Parameter Table
Notes
Output
Output
Output
Output, 2, 4
2, 4
Output
Output
2
Output
MN792
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
233
R/W
RW
Name
Calibration
234
RW
Max Value
235
RW
Min Value
236
RW
Calibration
237
RW
Max Value
238
RW
Min Value
239
RW
Calibration
240
RW
Max Value
241
RW
Min Value
242
RW
Calibration
243
RW
Max Value
244
RW
Min Value
245
RW
% TO GET 10V
246
RW
Destination Tag
247
RW
Destination Tag
248
RW
% TO GET 10V
249
RW
Destination Tag
250
RW
Destination Tag
251
RW
Source Tag
252
RW
Source Tag
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
Reset Value
Increase Rate
Decrease Rate
Min Value
Max Value
Raise/Lower Dest
261
262
263
264
266
268
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
Raise Input
Lower Input
Stall Threshold
Raise/Lower O/P
% S-RAMP
Mode
269
RW
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
270
RW
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
271
RW
PROP. GAIN
MN792
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
WB Block
Analog Input 2
Range
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Factory Setting
1.0000
MN
gh
Notes
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gi
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gj
Analog Input 3
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gk
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gl
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gm
Analog Input 4
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gn
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
go
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gp
Analog Input 5
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gq
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
200.00%
gr
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-200.00%
gs
Analog Output 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gt
Analog Input 1
0 to 549
100
gu
2, 3
Analog Input 5
0 to 549
301
gv
2, 3
Analog Output 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gw
Analog Input 3
0 to 549
5
gx
2, 3
Analog Input 4
0 to 549
48
gy
2, 3
Analog Output 1
0 to 549
62
gz
2, 3
Analog Output 2
0 to 549
63
h0
2, 3
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Output
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Calibration
Raise/Lower
Ramps
Advanced
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 to 549
5.00%
-5.00%
0.00%
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
-100.00%
100.00%
0
h1
h2
h3
h4
h5
h6
h7
h8
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 200.00 %
xxx.xx %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 to 3
FALSE
FALSE
95.00%
0.00%
2.50%
0
h9
ha
hb
hc
he
hg
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
1.00%
hh
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
5.00%
hi
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00
5.00
hj
Output
Parameter Table B-5
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
272
R/W
RW
Name
SPD.INT.TIME
273
RW
POS. LOOP P GAIN
274
RW
I GAIN IN RAMP
284
RW
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
285
RW
ZERO IAD LEVEL
286
287
288
289
RW
RW
RW
RW
RAMPING THRESH.
Auto Reset
External Reset
Setpoint 1
290
RO
Setpoint 2 (A3)
291
RW
Setpoint 3
292
293
294
RW
RW
RW
SIGN 0
RAMP O/P DEST
SPT SUM 1 DEST
297
298
299
300
301
302
305
306
307
308
309
329
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
Speed Error
Current Feedback
Current Demand
FIELD I FBK.
POS. I CLAMP
Contactor Delay
Trip Reset
Source Tag
External Reset
Tach Input
Input 0
GROUP ID (GID)
330
RW
UNIT ID (UID)
332
RW
Error Report
337
354
355
357
RO
RW
RW
RW
Thermistor State
Parameter Save
Ramp Rate
Max Demand
358
RW
Min Demand
359
RW
Inverted
360
RW
Inverted
361
RW
Inverted
362
RW
Modulus
363
RW
Modulus
364
RW
Source Tag
365
RW
Destination Tag
B-6 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
ALARM STATUS
PARAMETER SAVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
WB Block
Advanced
Range
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
Factory Setting
0.500 Secs
MN
hk
Notes
Advanced
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00%
hl
4
Advanced
0.0000 to 2.0000
1.0000
hm
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.50%
hw
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
1.50%
hx
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Speed Loop
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.50%
Enabled
Disabled
0.00%
hy
hz
i0
i1
Speed Loop
xxx.xx %
0.00%
i2
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i3
Setpoint Sum 1
Ramp Output
Setpoint Sum 1
Output
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Stop Rates
Alarms
Standstill
Raise/Lower
Diagnostics
Setpoint Sum 1
System Port P3
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 to 549
0 to 549
Positive
291
289
i4
i5
i6
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
0 to 549
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx % (h)
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0x0000 to 0x0007
-0.01%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
100.00%
1.0 Secs
TRUE
89
FALSE
0.0%
0.00%
0x0000
i9
ia
ib
ic
id
ie
ih
ii
ij
ik
il
j5
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0x000F
0x0000
j6
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x00C0
j8
1
Unallocated
Unallocated
Jog/Slack
Speed Loop
0 : False 1 : True
Up To Action Requested
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.00 to 105.00 %
False
Output
1
1.0 Secs
105.00%
jd
ju
jv
jx
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
-105.00%
jy
Digout 1 (B5)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
jz
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k0
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k1
Analog Output 1
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k2
Analog Output 2
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k3
Link 1
0 to 549
0
k4
2, 3
Link 1
0 to 549
0
k5
2, 3
Output
2, 3
2, 3
Output
Output
Output
Output
2, 3, 4
Output
MN792
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
366
R/W
RW
Name
Source Tag
367
RW
Destination Tag
368
RW
Source Tag
369
RW
Destination TaG
370
RW
Source Tag
371
RW
Destination Tag
374
375
376
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
454
RO
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
System Reset
Limit
Drive Running
PID O/P DEST
DERIVATIVE TC
INT.TIME.CONST
FILTER T.C.
PROP. GAIN
Positive Limit
Negative Limit
O/P SCALER(TRIM)
Enable
INT. DEFEAT
Input 1
Input 2
Ratio 1
Ratio 2
Divider 2
PID Error
PID Clamped
PID Output
Divider 1
Divider 1
Divider 0
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
Reset Value
Input 2
Source Tag
455
RW
Destination Tag
456
RW
Source Tag
457
RW
Destination Tag
458
RW
Source Tag
459
RW
Destination Tag
460
RW
Source Tag
461
RW
Destination Tag
464
RW
Offset
465
RW
Offset
467
RW
Source Tag
MN792
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 4
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 9
WB Block
Link 2
Range
0 to 549
Factory Setting
0
MN
k6
Notes
2, 3
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k7
2, 3
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k8
2, 3
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k9
2, 3
Link 4
0 to 549
0
ka
2, 3
Link 4
0 to 549
0
kb
2, 3
Unallocated
Setpoint Sum 1
Unallocated
PID Output
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Current Loop
Ramps
Setpoint Sum 1
Link 5
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0 to 549
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
0.01 to 100.00 Secs
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
0.0 to 100.0
0.00 to 105.00 %
-105.00 to 0.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Off 1 : On
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
xxx.xx %
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.00 to 200.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0 to 549
True
105.00%
False
0
0.000Secs
5.00 Secs
0.100 Secs
1.0
100.00%
-100.00%
0.2000
Enabled
Off
0.00%
0.00%
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
0.00%
False
0.00%
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
200.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0
Output
Link 5
0 to 549
0
ke
kf
kg
l4
l5
l6
l7
l8
l9
la
lb
lc
ld
le
lf
lg
lh
li
lj
lk
ll
lm
ln
lo
lp
lq
lr
m
m
mn
Link 6
0 to 549
0
mo
2, 3
Link 6
0 to 549
0
mp
2, 3
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mq
2, 3
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mr
2, 3
Link 8
0 to 549
0
ms
2, 3
Link 8
0 to 549
0
mt
2, 3
Analog Output 1
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
mw
Analog Output 2
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
mx
Link 9
0 to 549
0
mz
Output
2, 3
Output
Output
Output
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
Parameter Table B-7
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
468
R/W
RW
Name
Destination Tag
WB Block
Link 9
Range
0 to 549
Factory Setting
0
MN
n0
Notes
2, 3
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n1
2, 3
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n2
2, 3
Unallocated
PID
PID
PID
Analog Input 2
0 : False 1 : True
0 to 4
0.00 to 100.00 %
xxxx.x
xxx.xx %
False
0
20.00%
0.0
0.00%
n4
n5
n6
n7
np
Output
Dig in C4
0 to 549
496
nq
2, 3
Dig in C5
0 to 549
497
nr
2, 3
Jog/Slack
Enable
TEC Option Type
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 9
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 10
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 10
ALARM STATUS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
469
RW
Source Tag
470
RW
Destination Tag
472
473
474
475
493
RO
RW
RW
RO
RO
SPEED FBK STATE
Mode
MIN PROFILE GAIN
Profiled Gain
Output
494
RW
Destination Tag
495
RW
Destination Tag
496
497
500
RO
RO
RW
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Tec Option
Off
On
None
ns
nt
nw
Output
Output
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
TEC Option IN 1
TEC Option IN 2
TEC Option IN 3
TEC Option IN 4
TEC Option IN 5
TEC Option Fault
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
0
0
0
0
0
None
nx
ny
nz
o0
o1
o2
507
508
509
511
512
513
514
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
TEC Option VER
TEC Option OUT 1
TEC Option OUT 2
Local Key Enable
Setpoint
Jog Setpoint
Ramp Accel Time
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Op Station
Op Station
Op Station
Op Station
0x0000
0
0
TRUE
0.00%
5.00%
10.0 Secs
o3
o4
o5
o7
o8
o9
oa
515
RW
Ramp Decel Time
Op Station
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
ob
516
RW
Forward
Op Station
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
oc
517
RW
Local
Op Station
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
od
518
RW
Program
Op Station
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
oe
519
RW
Setpoint
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
of
520
RW
Jog Setpoint
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
5.00%
og
521
523
524
525
527
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
NOM Motor Volts
Armature Current
Field Current
Coast Stop
Master Bridge
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : None
1 : Rs485
2 : Profibus Dp
3 : Link
4 : Device Net
5 : Can Open
6 : Lonworks
7 : Type 7
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
0 : None
1 : Parameter
2 : Type Mismatch
3 : Self Test
4 : Hardware
5 : Missing
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
xxxxx
xxxxx
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
501
502
503
504
505
506
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Stop Rates
Current Loop
100 to 875 Volts
2.0 to 15.0 AMPS
0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Off 1 : On
500 Volts
2.0 Amps
0.2 Amps
FALSE
Off
oh
oj
ok
ol
on
B-8 Parameter Table
Output
Output, 2
Output
Output, 1
Output, 1
Output, 1
1
1
3
3
3
Output
Output, 1
MN792
Table B-1 Parameters Listed by Tag Number Continued
Tag
528
R/W
RO
Name
Last Alarm
Keypad Menu
ALARM STATUS
WB Block
Alarms
Range
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
547
549
594
605
617
618
620
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RO
RW
RO
RW
REM.SEQ.ENABLE
REM.SEQUENCE
SEQ Status
Current FBK.Amps
Field I FBK.AMPS
REM Trip Inhibit
REM Trip Delay
Remote Trip
Zero CAL Inputs
SPD.FBK.FILTER
Speed LOOP O/P
CURR Decay Rate
ARM Volts FBK
Field I Thresh
Up To Field
Invert
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
ALARM STATUS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Current Loop
Current Loop
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
0 : False, 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
xxxx.x AMPS
xxxx.x AMPS
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
Up To Action Requested
0.000 to 1.000
-200 to 200 %
0 to 200.00
MN792
Menus
Speed Loop
Stop Rates
Unallocated
Field Control
Field Control
Ramps
0x0000 : No Active Alarms
0x0001 : Over Speed
0x0002 : Missing Pulse
0x0004 : Field Over I
0x0008 : Heatsink Trip
0x0010 : Thermistor
0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)
0x0040 : SPD Feed back
0x0080 : Encoder Failed
0x0100 : Field Failed
0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed
0x0400 : Phase Lock
0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error
0x1000 : Stall Trip
0x2000 : Over I Trip
0xf005 : External Trip
0x8000 : Accts Failed
0xf001 : Autotune Error
0xf002 : Autotune Aborted
0xf200 : Config Enabled
0xf400 : No Keypad
0xf006 : Remote Trip
0xff05 : PCB Version
0xff06 : Product Code
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
Factory Setting
No Active Alarms
MN
oo
Notes
Output, 1
FALSE
0x0000
0x0C03
0.0 Amps
0.0 Amps
Enabled
10.0 Secs
FALSE
ov
ow
ox
oy
oz
p0
p1
p2
p3
p7
p9
2
1
Output
Output, 1, 3
Output, 1, 3
0.000
0.00%
0.00
0 Volts
80.00%
False
False
Output, 1
1, 2, 3, 4
Output, 2
Output
Output
Parameter Table B-9
Parameter Values Continued R/W: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name
Tag
266
245
R/W
RW
RW
Name
% S-RAMP
% TO GET 10V
248
RW
% TO GET 10V
111
61
67
30
204
23
50
51
52
53
54
128
55
129
56
605
523
25
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
5703 RCV ERROR
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
ACTUAL POS I LIM
Additional DEM
Aiming Point
Analog TACH CAL
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2
ANOUT 2 (A8)
ARM Volts FBK
Armature Current
Armature I (A9)
20
42
79
78
77
287
18
94
95
96
168
227
161
60
192
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
Armature V CAL.
At Current Limit
At Standstill
At Zero Setpoint
At Zero Speed
Auto Reset
Autotune
AUX DIGOUT 1
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
Aux Enable
AUX JOG
AUX START
BACK EMF
BEMF FBK LAG
191
RW
BEMF FBK LEAD
90
230
RW
RW
Bipolar Clamps
Calibration
233
RW
Calibration
236
RW
Calibration
239
RW
Calibration
242
RW
Calibration
121
525
39
4
83
302
225
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
Change Password
Coast Stop
Configure Enable
Constant Accel
Contactor Closed
Contactor Delay
Crawl Speed
B-10 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
WB Block
Ramps
Analog Output 1
Range
0.00 to 100.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Factory Setting
2.50%
100.00%
MN
he
gt
Analog Output 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gw
Alarms
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Inverse Time
Calibration
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 3
Analog Input 4
Analog Input 5
Aux I/O
Analog Output 1
Aux I/O
Analog Output 2
Unallocated
Calibration
Calibration
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00 to 103.00 %
0.9800 to 1.1000
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
-100.00 to 100.00 %
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
-100.00 to 100.00 %
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
d3
bp
bv
au
fo
an
be
bf
bg
bh
bi
dk
bj
dl
bk
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
PASSWORD
DIAGNOSTICS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
Calibration
Current Loop
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Ramps
Current Loop
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Calibration
Field Control
2.0 to 15.0 AMPS
0 : UNIPOLAR
1 : BIPOLAR
0.9800 to 1.1000
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
xxx.xx % (h)
10 to 5000
Enabled
-90.0%
90.00%
0.00%
103.00%
1.0000
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
10.00V
0.00%
0.00V
0.00%
0.00V
0 Volts
2.0 Amps
Bipolar
1.0000
False
True
True
True
Enabled
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
0.0%
100
ak
b6
c7
c6
c5
hz
ai
cm
cn
co
eo
gb
eh
bo
fc
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fb
Current Loop
Analog Input 1
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Disabled
1.0000
ci
ge
Analog Input 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gh
Analog Input 3
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gk
Analog Input 4
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gn
Analog Input 5
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gq
Stop Rates
Unallocated
Ramps
Unallocated
Stop Rates
Jog/Slack
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Off 1 : On
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0x0000
FALSE
Disabled
Enabled
Off
1.0 Secs
10.00%
dd
ol
b3
a4
cb
ie
g9
oj
ap
Notes
Output
Output
2, 4
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
3
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output, 1
Output
Output
2
Output
MN792
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
15
594
299
538
298
131
257
199
401
102
R/W
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
CURR Decay Rate
Current Demand
Current FBK.Amps
Current Feedback
Deadband Width
Decrease Rate
Delay
DERIVATIVE TC
Destination Tag
105
RW
Destination Tag
108
RW
Destination Tag
135
RW
Destination Tag
246
RW
Destination Tag
247
RW
Destination Tag
249
RW
Destination Tag
250
RW
Destination Tag
365
RW
Destination Tag
367
RW
Destination Tag
369
RW
Destination TaG
371
RW
Destination Tag
455
RW
Destination Tag
457
RW
Destination Tag
459
RW
Destination Tag
461
RW
Destination Tag
468
RW
Destination Tag
470
RW
Destination Tag
494
RW
Destination Tag
495
RW
Destination Tag
71
72
73
69
70
74
75
76
137
420
418
419
414
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Discontinuous
Divider 0
Divider 1
Divider 1
Divider 2
MN792
Keypad Menu
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 9
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 10
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
WB Block
Current Loop
Stop Rates
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Diagnostics
Setpoint Sum 1
Raise/Lower
Inverse Time
PID
Digital Input 1
Range
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 to 200.00
xxx.xx %
xxxx.x AMPS
xxx.xx %
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
0 to 549
Factory Setting
90.00%
0.00
0.00%
0.0 Amps
0.00%
0.0%
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
0.000Secs
90
MN
af
Notes
ib
oy
ia
dn
h5
fj
l5
cu
Output
Output, 1, 3
Output
Digital Input 2
0 to 549
118
cx
2, 3
Digital Input 3
0 to 549
119
d0
2, 3
Scaled 5703 InĆ
put
Analog Input 1
0 to 549
41
dr
2, 3
0 to 549
100
gu
2, 3
Analog Input 5
0 to 549
301
gv
2, 3
Analog Input 3
0 to 549
5
gx
2, 3
Analog Input 4
0 to 549
48
gy
2, 3
Link 1
0 to 549
0
k5
2, 3
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k7
2, 3
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k9
2, 3
Link 4
0 to 549
0
kb
2, 3
Link 5
0 to 549
0
mn
2, 3
Link 6
0 to 549
0
mp
2, 3
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mr
2, 3
Link 8
0 to 549
0
mt
2, 3
Link 9
0 to 549
0
n0
2, 3
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n2
2, 3
Dig in C4
0 to 549
496
nq
2, 3
Dig in C5
0 to 549
497
nr
2, 3
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 3
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Digout 1 (B5)
Digout 2 (B6)
Digout 3 (B7)
Current Loop
Setpoint Sum 1
PID
Setpoint Sum 1
PID
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0.00 to 200.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
12.00%
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
bz
c0
c1
bx
by
c2
c3
c4
dt
lo
lm
ln
li
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
2, 4
2, 3
Parameter Table B-11
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
84
376
82
177
R/W
RO
RO
RO
RW
Name
Drive Enable
Drive Running
Drive Start
EMF GAIN
176
RW
EMF LAG
175
RW
EMF LEAD
408
497
206
92
24
22
49
120
332
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Enable
Encoder
Encoder Alarm
Encoder Lines
Encoder RPM
ENCODER SIGN
Enter Password
Error Report
288
307
136
524
183
170
169
19
182
300
539
617
403
186
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
174
RW
External Reset
External Reset
Feed Forward
Field Current
Field Demand
Field Enable
Field Enabled
Field Fail
Field I CAL.
FIELD I FBK.
Field I FBK.AMPS
Field I Thresh
FILTER T.C.
FLD. QUENCH
MODE
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
209
RW
FLD.CTRL MODE
184
185
RO
RW
210
516
RW
RW
FLD.FIRING ANGLE
FLD.QUENCH
DELAY
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
Forward
37
329
RW
RW
FULL MENUS
GROUP ID (GID)
122
116
115
119
274
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
Health LED
Health Store
Health Word
I DMD. ISOLATE
I GAIN IN RAMP
66
65
93
33
256
309
100
410
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
IaDmd UNFILTERED
IaFbk UNFILTERED
IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
Increase Rate
Input 0
Input 1
Input 1
B-12 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
PASSWORD
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
WB Block
Diagnostics
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Field Control
Range
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Off 1 : On
0.00 to 100.00
Factory Setting
Disabled
False
Off
0.30
MN
cc
kg
ca
ex
Notes
Output
Output
Output
Field Control
0.00 to 200.00
40.00
ew
Field Control
0.10 to 50.00
2.00
ev
PID
Aux I/O
Diagnostics
Alarms
Calibration
Calibration
Speed Loop
System Port P3
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Off 1 : On
xxxxx RPM
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
10 to 5000
0 to 6000 RPM
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Enabled
On
0 RPM
Enabled
1024
1750 RPM
Positive
0x0000
0x00C0
lc
nt
fq
ck
ao
am
bd
dc
j8
Ramps
Raise/Lower
Current Loop
Calibration
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Alarms
Calibration
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Field Control
PID
Field Control
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : False 1 : True
0.10 to 50.00
0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
xxx.xx %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0.9800 to 1.1000
xxx.xx %
xxxx.x AMPS
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
0 : Quench 1 : Standby
Disabled
FALSE
2.00
0.2 Amps
0.00%
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
1.0000
0.00%
0.0 Amps
80.00%
0.100 Secs
Quench
i0
ij
ds
ok
f3
eq
ep
aj
f2
ic
oz
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Field Control
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
Disabled
eu
2
Field Control
Voltage Control
ft
2
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
Field Control
Field Control
0 : Voltage Control
1 : Current Control
xxx.xx DEG
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.00 Deg
0.0 Secs
f4
f5
Output
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
MENUS
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
DIAGNOSTICS
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
Field Control
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0 : False 1 : True
67.0%
TRUE
fu
oc
Menus
System Port P3
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0x0000 to 0x0007
Enabled
0x0000
b1
j5
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Current Loop
Advanced
0 : False 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.0000 to 2.0000
True
0x0000
0x0200
Disabled
1.0000
de
d8
d7
db
hm
Output
Output
Output
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Profile
Current Profile
Raise/Lower
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
PID
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-200.00 to 200.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.0%
0.0%
200.00%
200.00%
10.0 Secs
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
bu
bt
cl
ax
h4
il
cs
le
Output
Output
2
2
Output
Output
2
2
1
1
4
3
Output
2
Output
Output
Output, 1, 3
l7
f6
MN792
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
411
423
202
409
17
172
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Input 2
Input 2
INT. DEFEAT
INT. DEFEAT
INT. GAIN
INT. GAIN
402
203
620
359
RW
RO
RW
RW
INT.TIME.CONST
Inverse Time O/P
Invert
Inverted
360
RW
Inverted
361
RW
Inverted
21
513
520
RW
RW
RW
IR Compensation
Jog Setpoint
Jog Setpoint
218
219
496
528
RW
RW
RO
RO
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Jog/Slack
Last Alarm
375
517
RW
RW
Limit
Local
511
262
421
527
357
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
Local Key Enable
Lower Input
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
Master Bridge
Max Demand
231
RW
Max Value
234
RW
Max Value
237
RW
Max Value
MN792
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
ALARM STATUS
WB Block
PID
Setpoint Sum 1
Speed Loop
PID
Current Loop
Field Control
Range
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 100.00
Factory Setting
0.00%
0.00%
Off
Off
3.50
1.28
MN
lf
lr
fm
ld
ah
es
PID
Inverse Time
Ramps
Digout 1 (B5)
0.01 to 100.00 Secs
xxx.xx %
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
5.00 Secs
200.0%
False
FALSE
l6
fn
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k0
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k1
Calibration
Op Station
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
5.00%
5.00%
al
o9
og
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Aux I/O
Alarms
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
20.00 %
-5.00 %
Off
No Active
g2
g3
ns
oo
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
Setpoint Sum 1
Op Station
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
105.00%
TRUE
kf
od
Op Station
Raise/Lower
Current Loop
Current Loop
Speed Loop
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0.00 to 105.00 %
TRUE
FALSE
200.00%
Off
105.00%
o7
ha
lp
on
jx
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gf
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gi
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gl
0x0000 : No Active Alarms
0x0001 : Over Speed
0x0002 : Missing Pulse
0x0004 : Field Over I
0x0008 : Heatsink Trip
0x0010 : Thermistor
0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)
0x0040 : SPD Feed back
0x0080 : Encoder Failed
0x0100 : Field Failed
0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed
0x0400 : Phase Lock
0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error
0x1000 : Stall Trip
0x2000 : Over I Trip
0xf005 : External Trip
0x8000 : Accts Failed
0xf001 : Autotune Error
0xf002 : Autotune Aborted
0xf200 : Config Enabled
0xf400 : No Keypad
0xf006 : Remote Trip
0xff05 : PCB Version
0xff06 : Product Code
Notes
Output, 2, 4
jz
Alarms
1
Output
Output, 1
Output, 1
Parameter Table B-13
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
240
R/W
RW
Name
Max Value
243
RW
Max Value
259
178
RW
RW
Max Value
MAX VOLTS
358
RW
Min Demand
179
RW
MIN FLD.CURRENT
474
126
232
RW
RW
RW
MIN PROFILE GAIN
MIN SPEED
Min Value
235
RW
Min Value
238
RW
Min Value
241
RW
Min Value
244
RW
Min Value
258
130
RW
RW
Min Value
Mode
228
268
RW
RW
Mode
Mode
473
43
RW
RW
Mode
Modulus
44
RW
Modulus
45
RW
Modulus
362
RW
Modulus
363
RW
Modulus
48
88
406
521
407
464
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
NEG. I CLAMP
NEG. I CLAMP
Negative Limit
NOM Motor Volts
O/P SCALER(TRIM)
Offset
465
RW
Offset
212
RO
Operating Mode
B-14 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
WB Block
Analog Input 4
Range
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Factory Setting
100.00%
MN
go
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
200.00%
gr
Raise/Lower
Field Control
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00%
100.00%
h7
ey
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
-105.00%
jy
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
10.00%
ez
PID
Ramps
Analog Input 1
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
20.00%
0.00%
-100.00%
n6
di
gg
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gj
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gm
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gp
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-200.00%
gs
Raise/Lower
System Port P3
-100.00%
0
h6
dm
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
DIAGNOSTICS
Jog/Slack
Advanced
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 : Disabled
1 : 5703 Master
2 : 5703 Slave
3 : CELite (EIASCII)
0 : False 1 : True
0 to 3
FALSE
0
gc
hg
PID
Digout 1 (B5)
0 to 4
0 : False 1 : True
0
TRUE
n5
b7
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b8
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b9
Analog Output 1
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k2
Analog Output 2
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k3
Current Loop
Diagnostics
PID
Calibration
PID
Analog Output 1
-100.00 to 100.00 %
xxx.xx % (h)
-105.00 to 0.00 %
100 to 875 Volts
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
-90.0%
-100.00%
500 Volts
0.2000
0.00%
bc
cg
la
oh
lb
mw
Analog Output 2
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
mx
Jog/Slack
0 : Stop
1 : Stop
2 : Jog Sp. 1
3 : Jog Sp. 2
4 : Run
5 : Take Up Sp. 1
6 : Take Up Sp. 2
7 : Crawl
Stop
fw
Notes
2
Output
3
Output
MN792
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
493
R/W
RO
Name
Output
188
198
RW
RW
Over Speed Level
P3 Baud Rate
354
123
124
416
415
400
417
87
301
273
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
Parameter Save
Peek Data
Peek Scale
PID Clamped
PID Error
PID O/P DEST
PID Output
POS. I CLAMP
POS. I CLAMP
POS. LOOP P GAIN
405
475
91
216
26
518
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
Positive Limit
Profiled Gain
PROG STOP I LIM
PROG STOP LIMIT
PROG Stop Time
Program
80
16
173
RO
RW
RW
Program Stop
PROP. GAIN
PROP. GAIN
271
RW
PROP. GAIN
404
261
260
RW
RW
RW
PROP. GAIN
Raise Input
Raise/Lower Dest
264
2
514
RO
RW
RW
Raise/Lower O/P
Ramp Accel Time
Ramp Accel Time
3
515
RW
RW
Ramp Decel Time
Ramp Decel Time
118
5
293
85
355
113
286
200
208
6
412
413
7
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Ramp Hold
Ramp Input
RAMP O/P DEST
Ramp Output
Ramp Rate
Ramping
RAMPING THRESH.
Rate
Ratio 0
Ratio 1
Ratio 1
Ratio 2
Ratio 2 (A3)
187
RO
Raw Input
125
201
RO
RW
Ready
Regen Mode
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
541
RW
REM Trip Delay
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
MN792
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
WB Block
Analog Input 2
Range
xxx.xx %
Factory Setting
0.00%
MN
np
Notes
Output, 2
Calibration
125.00%
9600
f8
fi
4
2
PARAMETER SAVE
SYSTEM::PEEK
SYSTEM::PEEK
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
Unallocated
0x0078
8.00
False
0.00%
0
0.00%
90.0%
100.00%
0.00%
ju
df
dg
lk
lj
l4
ll
cf
id
hl
1
PID
PID
PID Output
PID
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
0:300 1:600 2:1200
3:2400 4:4800 5:9600
6:19200
Up To Action Requested
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
-300.00 to 300.00
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
0 to 549
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
PID
PID
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Op Station
0.00 to 105.00 %
xxxx.x
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
100.00%
0.0
100.00%
60.0 Secs
0.1 Secs
FALSE
l9
n7
cj
g0
aq
oe
Stop Rates
Current Loop
Field Control
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 100.00
False
45.00
0.10
c8
ag
et
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00
5.00
hj
PID
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Output
Raise/Lower
Ramps
Op Station
0.0 to 100.0
0 : False 1 : True
0 to 549
1.0
FALSE
0
l8
h9
h8
xxx.xx %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.00%
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
hc
a2
oa
Ramps
Op Station
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
a3
ob
Ramps
Ramps
Ramp Output
Ramps
Jog/Slack
Ramps
Ramps
Inverse Time
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
PID
PID
Speed Loop
0 : Off 1 : On
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0 to 549
xxx.xx %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Off
0.00%
291
0.00%
1.0 Secs
False
0.50%
60.0 Secs
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
.0000
da
a5
i5
cd
jv
d5
hy
fk
fs
a6
lg
lh
a7
5703
xxx.xx %
0.00%
f7
Output
Alarms
Current Loop
0 : False 1 : True
0 : 2Q (Non-regen)
1 : 4Q (Regen)
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
False
2Q(Non-regen)
dh
fl
Output
2
10.0 Secs
p1
Alarms
Output
Output
2, 3
Output
Output
4
Output
Output
Output
2, 3
Output
Output
2, 4
Parameter Table B-15
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
540
535
536
542
255
422
189
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
Name
REM Trip Inhibit
REM.SEQ.ENABLE
REM.SEQUENCE
Remote Trip
Reset Value
Reset Value
Scaled Input
537
171
RO
RW
SEQ Status
Setpoint
512
519
RW
RW
Setpoint
Setpoint
289
RW
Setpoint 1
290
RO
Setpoint 2 (A3)
291
RW
Setpoint 3
41
RW
Setpoint 4
132
RW
SETPT. RATIO
133
RW
SETPT. SIGN
292
8
9
RW
RW
RW
SIGN 0
Sign 1
Sign 2 (A3)
97
RW
Source Tag
98
RW
Source Tag
99
RW
Source Tag
134
251
RW
RW
Source Tag
Source Tag
252
RW
Source Tag
306
364
RW
RW
Source Tag
Source Tag
366
RW
Source Tag
368
RW
Source Tag
370
RW
Source Tag
454
RW
Source Tag
456
RW
Source Tag
458
RW
Source Tag
460
RW
Source Tag
467
RW
Source Tag
469
RW
Source Tag
32
RW
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
B-16 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
ALARM STATUS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 9
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 10
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
WB Block
Alarms
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Alarms
Raise/Lower
Ramps
5703
Range
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : False, 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
xxx.xx %
Factory Setting
Enabled
FALSE
0x0000
FALSE
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
MN
p0
ov
ow
p2
h3
lq
f9
Notes
Aux I/O
Field Control
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0.00 to 100.00 %
0x0C03
100.00%
ox
er
Output
Op Station
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
0.00%
o8
of
1
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i1
Speed Loop
xxx.xx %
0.00%
i2
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i3
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
b5
5703
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.0000
do
5703
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
dp
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Speed Loop
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
i4
a8
a9
Digout 1 (B5)
0 to 549
77
cp
2, 3
Digout 2 (B6)
0 to 549
122
cq
2, 3
Digout 3 (B7)
0 to 549
125
cr
2, 3
5703
Analog Output 1
0 to 549
0 to 549
89
62
dq
gz
2, 3
2, 3
Analog Output 2
0 to 549
63
h0
2, 3
Standstill
Link 1
0 to 549
0 to 549
89
0
ii
k4
2, 3, 4
2, 3
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k6
2, 3
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k8
2, 3
Link 4
0 to 549
0
ka
2, 3
Link 5
0 to 549
0
2, 3
Link 6
0 to 549
0
m
m
mo
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mq
2, 3
Link 8
0 to 549
0
ms
2, 3
Link 9
0 to 549
0
mz
2, 3
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n1
2, 3
Current Profile
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
100.00%
aw
2
2
1
Output, 1
Output, 2
Output
2, 3
MN792
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
269
R/W
RW
31
270
RW
RW
547
13
272
RW
RW
RW
14
180
89
297
81
47
WB Block
Advanced
Range
0.00 to 100.00 %
Factory Setting
1.00%
MN
hh
Notes
Current Profile
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00%
5.00%
av
hi
2
Menus
Speed Loop
Advanced
0.000 to 1.000
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.000
0.500 Secs
0.500 Secs
p7
ad
hk
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SPD.FBK.FILTER
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
SPD.INT.TIME
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPD.INT.TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SPD.PROP.GAIN
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
Speed Demand
DIAGNOSTICS
Speed Error
DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED FBK ALARM SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SPEED FBK SELECT CONFIGURE DRIVE
Speed Loop
Calibration
Stop Rates
Diagnostics
Alarms
Speed Loop
10
50.00%
0.00%
-0.01%
Enabled
Arm Volts Fbk
ae
f0
ch
i9
c9
bb
2
Output
Output
472
207
549
63
294
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
SPEED FBK STATE
Speed Feedback
Speed LOOP O/P
Speed Setpoint
SPT SUM 1 DEST
ALARM STATUS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
False
0.01%
0.00%
0.00%
289
n4
fr
p9
br
i6
Output
Output
Output, 2
Output
2, 3
86
263
28
112
224
11
68
217
27
29
374
308
253
254
506
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
SPT SUM OUTPUT
Stall Threshold
Stall Trip
Stall Trip
Stall Trip Delay
Standstill Logic
Start (C3)
Stop Limit
Stop Time
Stop Zero Speed
System Reset
Tach Input
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
TEC Option Fault
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
ALARM STATUS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Setpoint Sum 1
Output
Setpoint Sum 1
Calibration
Alarms
Alarms
Calibration
Standstill
Aux I/O
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Tec Option
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Arm Volts Fbk
1 : Analog Tach
2 : Encoder
3 : Encoder/Analog
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
-200 to 200 %
xxx.xx %
0 to 549
0.00%
95.00%
Inhibited
OK
10.0 Secs
Disabled
Off
60.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
2.00%
True
0.0%
5.00%
-5.00%
None
ce
hb
as
d4
g8
ab
bw
g1
ar
at
ke
ik
h1
h2
o2
Output
501
502
503
504
505
508
509
500
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
TEC Option IN 1
TEC Option IN 2
TEC Option IN 3
TEC Option IN 4
TEC Option IN 5
TEC Option OUT 1
TEC Option OUT 2
TEC Option Type
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
None
nx
ny
nz
o0
o1
o4
o5
nw
507
RO
TEC Option VER
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Tec Option
xxx.xx %
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : OK 1 : Failed
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Off 1 : On
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx % (h)
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : None
1 : Parameter
2 : Type Mismatch
3 : Self Test
4 : Hardware
5 : Missing
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
xxxxx
xxxxx
0 : None
1 : Rs485
2 : Profibus Dp
3 : Link
4 : Device Net
5 : Can Open
6 : Lonworks
7 : Type 7
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000
o3
MN792
Name
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output, 1
Output, 1
Output, 1
Parameter Table B-17
Table B-2 Parameters Listed by Name Continued
Tag
57
337
195
R/W
RO
RO
RW
Name
Terminal Volts
Thermistor State
Threshold (>)
196
RW
Threshold (>)
197
RW
Threshold (>)
305
181
59
64
62
58
330
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
Trip Reset
Unfil. Field FBK
UNFIL.ENCODER
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
UNIT ID (UID)
618
104
RO
RW
Up To Field
Value For False
107
RW
Value For False
110
RW
Value For False
103
RW
Value For True
106
RW
Value For True
109
RW
Value For True
155
543
285
RO
RW
RW
Version Number
Zero CAL Inputs
ZERO IAD LEVEL
284
RW
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
10
12
RW
RW
Zero SPD. Offset
Zero Threshold
B-18 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
ALARM STATUS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)
CONFIGURE DRIVE
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
WB Block
Calibration
Unallocated
Digout 1 (B5)
Range
xxx.xx % (h)
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
Factory Setting
0.0%
False
0.00%
MN
bl
jd
ff
Notes
Output
Output
2
Digout 2 (B6)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fg
2
Digout 3 (B7)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fh
2
Alarms
Calibration
Calibration
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Calibration
System Port P3
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
0x0000 to 0x000F
TRUE
0.00%
0 RPM
0.00%
0.03%
0.0%
0x0000
ih
f1
bn
bs
bq
bm
j6
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Field Control
Digital Input 1
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
False
0.00%
cw
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
cz
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
d2
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cv
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cy
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
d1
Unallocated
Advanced
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Up To Action Requested
0.00 to 200.00 %
1.50%
eb
p3
hx
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.50%
hw
Calibration
Standstill
-5.00 to 5.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
2.00%
aa
ac
Output
Output
1, 2, 3, 4
MN792
Parameter Values Continued R/W: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu
Tag
116
115
528
R/W
RO
RO
RO
Name
Health Store
Health Word
Last Alarm
Keypad Menu
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
WB Block
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Range
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
542
472
112
337
523
18
39
15
24
22
49
524
209
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Remote Trip
SPEED FBK STATE
Stall Trip
Thermistor State
Armature Current
Autotune
Configure Enable
CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
Encoder Lines
Encoder RPM
ENCODER SIGN
Field Current
FLD.CTRL MODE
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
Alarms
Unallocated
Alarms
Unallocated
Calibration
Current Loop
Unallocated
Current Loop
Calibration
Calibration
Speed Loop
Calibration
Field Control
210
521
13
14
47
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
NOM Motor Volts
SPD.INT.TIME
SPD.PROP.GAIN
SPEED FBK SELECT
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
Field Control
Calibration
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
543
61
67
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
605
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Zero CAL Inputs
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
ACTUAL POS I LIM
ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
ANOUT 1 (A7)
ANOUT 2 (A8)
ARM Volts FBK
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : OK 1 : Failed
0 : False 1 : True
2.0 to 15.0 AMPS
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 200.00 %
10 to 5000
0 to 6000 RPM
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
0 : Voltage Control
1 : Current Control
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
100 to 875 Volts
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.00 to 200.00
0 : Arm Volts Fbk
1 : Analog Tach
2 : Encoder
3 : Encoder/Analog
Up To Action Requested
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
MN792
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 3
Analog Input 4
Analog Input 5
Analog Output 1
Analog Output 2
Unallocated
0x0000 : No Active Alarms
0x0001 : Over Speed
0x0002 : Missing Pulse
0x0004 : Field Over I
0x0008 : Heatsink Trip
0x0010 : Thermistor
0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)
0x0040 : SPD Feed back
0x0080 : Encoder Failed
0x0100 : Field Failed
0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed
0x0400 : Phase Lock
0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error
0x1000 : Stall Trip
0x2000 : Over I Trip
0xf005 : External Trip
0x8000 : Accts Failed
0xf001 : Autotune Error
0xf002 : Autotune Aborted
0xf200 : Config Enabled
0xf400 : No Keypad
0xf006 : Remote Trip
0xff05 : PCB Version
0xff06 : Product Code
Factory Setting
0x0000
0x0200
No Active Alarms
MN
d8
d7
oo
Notes
Output
Output
Output, 1
FALSE
False
OK
False
2.0 Amps
Off
Disabled
90.00%
1024
1750 RPM
Positive
0.2 Amps
Voltage Control
p2
n4
d4
jd
oj
ai
b3
af
ao
am
bd
ok
ft
Output, 1
Output
Output
Output
3
Output, 1
2
67.0%
500 Volts
0.500 Secs
10
Arm Volts Fbk
fu
oh
ad
ae
bb
2
-90.0%
90.00%
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
10.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0 Volts
p3
bp
bv
be
bf
bg
bh
bi
bj
bk
2
2
3
2
3
1, 2, 3, 4
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Parameter Table B-19
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
42
79
78
77
60
525
83
299
538
298
71
72
73
69
70
74
75
76
84
376
82
206
183
169
300
539
184
122
66
65
203
88
212
R/W
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Name
At Current Limit
At Standstill
At Zero Setpoint
At Zero Speed
BACK EMF
Coast Stop
Contactor Closed
Current Demand
Current FBK.Amps
Current Feedback
DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Drive Enable
Drive Running
Drive Start
Encoder
Field Demand
Field Enabled
FIELD I FBK.
Field I FBK.AMPS
FLD.FIRING ANGLE
Health LED
IaDmd UNFILTERED
IaFbk UNFILTERED
Inverse Time O/P
NEG. I CLAMP
Operating Mode
Keypad Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
WB Block
Current Loop
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Calibration
Stop Rates
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Diagnostics
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 3
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Digout 1 (B5)
Digout 2 (B6)
Digout 3 (B7)
Diagnostics
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Field Control
Field Control
Diagnostics
Current Loop
Field Control
Alarms
Current Loop
Current Loop
Inverse Time
Diagnostics
Jog/Slack
416
415
417
87
80
264
85
113
125
89
297
207
549
63
86
68
374
308
57
181
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
PID Clamped
PID Error
PID Output
POS. I CLAMP
Program Stop
Raise/Lower O/P
Ramp Output
Ramping
Ready
Speed Demand
Speed Error
Speed Feedback
Speed LOOP O/P
Speed Setpoint
SPT SUM OUTPUT
Start (C3)
System Reset
Tach Input
Terminal Volts
Unfil. Field FBK
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
PID
PID
PID
Diagnostics
Stop Rates
Raise/Lower
Ramps
Ramps
Alarms
Stop Rates
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Setpoint Sum 1
Aux I/O
Unallocated
Diagnostics
Calibration
Calibration
B-20 Parameter Table
Range
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx % (h)
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Off 1 : On
xxx.xx %
xxxx.x AMPS
xxx.xx %
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Off 1 : On
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
xxx.xx %
xxxx.x AMPS
xxx.xx DEG
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
0 : Stop
1 : Stop
2 : Jog Sp. 1
3 : Jog Sp. 2
4 : Run
5 : Take Up Sp. 1
6 : Take Up Sp. 2
7 : Crawl
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
-200 to 200 %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
Factory Setting
False
True
True
True
0.0%
FALSE
Off
0.00%
0.0 Amps
0.00%
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Disabled
False
Off
0 RPM
0.00%
Disabled
0.00%
0.0 Amps
0.00 Deg
True
0.0%
0.0%
200.0%
-90.0%
Stop
MN
b6
c7
c6
c5
bo
ol
cb
ib
oy
ia
bz
c0
c1
bx
by
c2
c3
c4
cc
kg
ca
fq
f3
ep
ic
oz
f4
de
bu
bt
fn
cg
fw
Notes
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output, 1, 3
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output, 1, 3
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output, 2, 4
Output
Output
False
0.00%
0.00%
90.0%
False
0.00%
0.00%
False
False
0.00%
-0.01%
0.01%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Off
True
0.0%
0.0%
0.00%
lk
lj
ll
cf
c8
hc
cd
d5
dh
ch
i9
fr
p9
br
ce
bw
ke
ik
bl
f1
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output, 2
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
MN792
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
59
64
62
58
37
354
121
120
155
130
R/W
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
Name
UNFIL.ENCODER
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
FULL MENUS
Parameter Save
Change Password
Enter Password
Version Number
Mode
Keypad Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
MENUS
PARAMETER SAVE
PASSWORD
PASSWORD
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
198
RW
P3 Baud Rate
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
187
RO
Raw Input
189
RO
Scaled Input
132
RW
SETPT. RATIO
133
RW
SETPT. SIGN
332
RW
Error Report
329
RW
GROUP ID (GID)
330
RW
UNIT ID (UID)
506
RO
TEC Option Fault
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
501
502
503
504
505
508
509
500
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
TEC Option IN 1
TEC Option IN 2
TEC Option IN 3
TEC Option IN 4
TEC Option IN 5
TEC Option OUT 1
TEC Option OUT 2
TEC Option Type
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
507
128
129
94
95
96
168
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
TEC Option VER
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 1
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
Aux Enable
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
Tec Option
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
MN792
WB Block
Calibration
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Calibration
Menus
Unallocated
Factory Setting
0 RPM
0.00%
0.03%
0.0%
Enabled
5703
Range
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
Up To Action Requested
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : Disabled
1 : 5703 Master
2 : 5703 Slave
3 : CELite (EIASCII)
0:300 1:600 2:1200
3:2400 4:4800 5:9600
6:19200
xxx.xx %
Notes
Output
Output
Output
Output
0
MN
bn
bs
bq
bm
b1
ju
dd
dc
eb
dm
9600
fi
2
0.00%
f7
Output
5703
xxx.xx %
0.00%
f9
Output, 2
5703
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.0000
do
5703
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
dp
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x00C0
j8
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0x0007
0x0000
j5
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0x000F
0x0000
j6
Tec Option
0 : None
1 : Parameter
2 : Type Mismatch
3 : Self Test
4 : Hardware
5 : Missing
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
xxxxx
xxxxx
0 : None
1 : Rs485
2 : Profibus Dp
3 : Link
4 : Device Net
5 : Can Open
6 : Lonworks
7 : Type 7
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
None
o2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
None
nx
ny
nz
o0
o1
o4
o5
nw
0x0000
0.00%
0.00%
Off
Off
Off
On
o3
dk
dl
cm
cn
co
eo
Unallocated
System Port P3
0x0000
0x0000
1
1
Output
1
Output
Output, 1
Output, 1
Output, 1
Parameter Table B-21
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
227
161
497
496
535
536
537
23
25
R/W
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
Name
AUX JOG
AUX START
Enable
Jog/Slack
REM.SEQ.ENABLE
REM.SEQUENCE
SEQ Status
Analog TACH CAL
Armature I (A9)
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
WB Block
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Calibration
Calibration
20
182
21
188
541
180
263
224
10
30
90
137
136
119
17
421
527
48
301
16
201
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
Armature V CAL.
Field I CAL.
IR Compensation
Over Speed Level
REM Trip Delay
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
Stall Threshold
Stall Trip Delay
Zero SPD. Offset
Additional DEM
Bipolar Clamps
Discontinuous
Feed Forward
I DMD. ISOLATE
INT. GAIN
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
Master Bridge
NEG. I CLAMP
POS. I CLAMP
PROP. GAIN
Regen Mode
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Alarms
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
93
33
32
31
170
617
186
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
185
RW
618
172
RO
RW
IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
Field Enable
Field I Thresh
FLD. QUENCH
MODE
FLD.QUENCH
DELAY
Up To Field
INT. GAIN
173
RW
PROP. GAIN
171
RW
Setpoint
192
RW
BEMF FBK LAG
191
RW
BEMF FBK LEAD
177
RW
EMF GAIN
176
RW
EMF LAG
175
RW
EMF LEAD
174
RW
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
B-22 Parameter Table
Factory Setting
On
On
On
Off
FALSE
0x0000
0x0C03
1.0000
Bipolar
MN
gb
eh
nt
ns
ov
ow
ox
an
ap
1.0000
1.0000
0.00%
125.00%
10.0 Secs
50.00%
95.00%
10.0 Secs
0.00%
0.00%
Disabled
12.00%
2.00
Disabled
3.50
200.00%
Off
0.00%
100.00%
45.00
2Q(Non-regen)
ak
f2
al
f8
p1
f0
hb
g8
aa
au
ci
dt
ds
db
ah
lp
on
bc
id
ag
fl
Current Profile
Current Profile
Current Profile
Current Profile
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Range
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False, 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0.9800 to 1.1000
0 : UNIPOLAR
1 : BIPOLAR
0.9800 to 1.1000
0.9800 to 1.1000
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-5.00 to 5.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.10 to 50.00
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 200.00
0 : 2Q (Non-regen)
1 : 4Q (Regen)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Quench 1 : Standby
200.00%
200.00%
100.00%
100.00%
Enabled
80.00%
Quench
cl
ax
aw
av
eq
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
Field Control
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
f5
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
Field Control
Field Control
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00
False
1.28
es
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.10
et
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00%
er
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fc
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fb
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.30
ex
Field Control
0.00 to 200.00
40.00
ew
Field Control
0.10 to 50.00
2.00
ev
Field Control
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
Disabled
eu
Notes
Output
Output
2
1
Output
4
4
Output, 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
f6
Output
2
MN792
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
178
R/W
RW
Name
MAX VOLTS
179
RW
MIN FLD.CURRENT
111
92
19
540
81
28
305
204
199
200
225
218
219
228
355
253
254
514
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
5703 RCV ERROR
Encoder Alarm
Field Fail
REM Trip Inhibit
SPEED FBK ALARM
Stall Trip
Trip Reset
Aiming Point
Delay
Rate
Crawl Speed
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Mode
Ramp Rate
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
Ramp Accel Time
515
RW
Ramp Decel Time
513
511
512
516
RW
RW
RW
RW
Jog Setpoint
Local Key Enable
Setpoint
Forward
520
RW
Jog Setpoint
517
RW
Local
518
RW
Program
519
RW
Setpoint
257
307
256
262
259
258
261
255
266
287
4
288
620
126
2
3
118
5
286
422
131
420
419
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Decrease Rate
External Reset
Increase Rate
Lower Input
Max Value
Min Value
Raise Input
Reset Value
% S-RAMP
Auto Reset
Constant Accel
External Reset
Invert
MIN SPEED
Ramp Accel Time
Ramp Decel Time
Ramp Hold
Ramp Input
RAMPING THRESH.
Reset Value
Deadband Width
Divider 0
Divider 1
MN792
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
WB Block
Field Control
Range
0.00 to 100.00 %
Factory Setting
100.00%
MN
ey
Notes
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
10.00%
ez
2
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Op Station
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 103.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Inhibited
TRUE
103.00%
10.0 Secs
60.0 Secs
10.00%
20.00 %
-5.00 %
FALSE
1.0 Secs
5.00%
-5.00%
10.0 Secs
d3
ck
aj
p0
c9
as
ih
fo
fj
fk
g9
g2
g3
gc
jv
h1
h2
oa
Op Station
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
ob
Op Station
Op Station
Op Station
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
5.00%
TRUE
0.00%
TRUE
o9
o7
o8
oc
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
5.00%
og
Op Station
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
od
Op Station
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
oe
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
of
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Off 1 : On
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
10.0 Secs
FALSE
10.0 Secs
FALSE
100.00%
-100.00%
FALSE
0.00%
2.50%
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
False
0.00%
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
Off
0.00%
0.50%
0.00%
0.0%
1.0000
1.0000
h5
ij
h4
ha
h7
h6
h9
h3
he
hz
a4
i0
2, 4
2, 4
2, 4
1
1
di
a2
a3
da
a5
hy
lq
dn
lo
ln
Parameter Table B-23
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
309
100
423
375
208
6
292
8
401
418
414
408
403
410
411
409
402
474
473
406
407
405
475
404
412
413
202
547
274
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Limit
Ratio 0
Ratio 1
SIGN 0
Sign 1
DERIVATIVE TC
Divider 1
Divider 2
Enable
FILTER T.C.
Input 1
Input 2
INT. DEFEAT
INT.TIME.CONST
MIN PROFILE GAIN
Mode
Negative Limit
O/P SCALER(TRIM)
Positive Limit
Profiled Gain
PROP. GAIN
Ratio 1
Ratio 2
INT. DEFEAT
SPD.FBK.FILTER
I GAIN IN RAMP
273
RW
POS. LOOP P GAIN
268
RW
Mode
271
RW
PROP. GAIN
269
RW
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
270
RW
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
272
RW
SPD.INT.TIME
285
RW
ZERO IAD LEVEL
284
RW
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
357
RW
Max Demand
358
RW
Min Demand
7
RW
Ratio 2 (A3)
289
RW
Setpoint 1
290
RO
Setpoint 2 (A3)
291
RW
Setpoint 3
41
RW
Setpoint 4
9
RW
Sign 2 (A3)
B-24 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
WB Block
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
Speed Loop
Menus
Advanced
Range
-200.00 to 200.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00 to 200.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0.01 to 100.00 Secs
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 to 4
-105.00 to 0.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.00 to 105.00 %
xxxx.x
0.0 to 100.0
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Off 1 : On
0.000 to 1.000
0.0000 to 2.0000
Factory Setting
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
105.00%
1.0000
1.0000
Positive
Positive
0.000Secs
1.0000
1.0000
Enabled
0.100 Secs
0.00%
0.00%
Off
5.00 Secs
20.00%
0
-100.00%
0.2000
100.00%
0.0
1.0
1.0000
1.0000
Off
0.000
1.0000
MN
il
cs
lr
kf
fs
a6
i4
a8
l5
lm
li
lc
l7
le
lf
ld
l6
n6
n5
la
lb
l9
n7
l8
lg
lh
fm
p7
hm
Notes
Advanced
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00%
hl
4
Advanced
0 to 3
0
hg
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00
5.00
hj
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
1.00%
hh
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
5.00%
hi
Advanced
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.500 Secs
hk
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
1.50%
hx
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.50%
hw
Speed Loop
0.00 to 105.00 %
105.00%
jx
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
-105.00%
jy
Speed Loop
-3.0000 to 3.0000
.0000
a7
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i1
Speed Loop
xxx.xx %
0.00%
i2
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i3
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
b5
Speed Loop
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
a9
Output
Output
MN792
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
306
11
12
302
594
91
216
26
217
27
29
230
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Source Tag
Standstill Logic
Zero Threshold
Contactor Delay
CURR Decay Rate
PROG STOP I LIM
PROG STOP LIMIT
PROG Stop Time
Stop Limit
Stop Time
Stop Zero Speed
Calibration
246
RW
Destination Tag
231
RW
Max Value
232
RW
Min Value
233
RW
Calibration
234
RW
Max Value
235
RW
Min Value
493
RO
Output
236
RW
Calibration
249
RW
Destination Tag
237
RW
Max Value
238
RW
Min Value
239
RW
Calibration
250
RW
Destination Tag
240
RW
Max Value
241
RW
Min Value
242
RW
Calibration
247
RW
Destination Tag
243
RW
Max Value
244
RW
Min Value
245
RW
% TO GET 10V
362
RW
Modulus
464
RW
Offset
251
RW
Source Tag
248
RW
% TO GET 10V
363
RW
Modulus
MN792
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
WB Block
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Analog Input 1
Range
0 to 549
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.00 to 100.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Factory Setting
89
Disabled
2.00%
1.0 Secs
0.00
100.00%
60.0 Secs
0.1 Secs
60.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
2.00%
1.0000
MN
ii
ab
ac
ie
Analog Input 1
0 to 549
100
gu
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gf
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gg
Analog Input 2
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gh
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gi
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gj
Analog Input 2
xxx.xx %
0.00%
np
Analog Input 3
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gk
Analog Input 3
0 to 549
5
gx
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gl
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gm
Analog Input 4
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gn
Analog Input 4
0 to 549
48
gy
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
go
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gp
Analog Input 5
-3.0000 to 3.0000
1.0000
gq
Analog Input 5
0 to 549
301
gv
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
200.00%
gr
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-200.00%
gs
Analog Output 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gt
Analog Output 1
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k2
Analog Output 1
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
mw
Analog Output 1
0 to 549
62
gz
Analog Output 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gw
Analog Output 2
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k3
Notes
2, 3, 4
cj
g0
aq
g1
ar
at
ge
2, 3
Output, 2
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
Parameter Table B-25
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
465
R/W
RW
Name
Offset
252
RW
Source Tag
400
260
RW
RW
PID O/P DEST
Raise/Lower Dest
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
293
294
RW
RW
RAMP O/P DEST
SPT SUM 1 DEST
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
135
RW
Destination Tag
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
134
102
RW
RW
Source Tag
Destination Tag
104
RW
Value For False
103
RW
Value For True
105
RW
Destination Tag
107
RW
Value For False
106
RW
Value For True
108
RW
Destination Tag
110
RW
Value For False
109
RW
Value For True
494
RW
Destination Tag
495
RW
Destination Tag
359
RW
Inverted
43
RW
Modulus
97
RW
Source Tag
195
RW
Threshold (>)
360
RW
Inverted
44
RW
Modulus
98
RW
Source Tag
196
RW
Threshold (>)
361
RW
Inverted
45
RW
Modulus
99
RW
Source Tag
197
RW
Threshold (>)
365
RW
Destination Tag
364
RW
Source Tag
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
B-26 Parameter Table
WB Block
Analog Output 2
Range
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Factory Setting
0.00%
MN
mx
Notes
I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
Analog Output 2
0 to 549
63
h0
2, 3
I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
PID Output
Raise/Lower
Output
Ramp Output
Setpoint Sum 1
Output
Scaled 5703 InĆ
put
5703
Digital Input 1
0 to 549
0 to 549
0
0
l4
h8
2, 3
0 to 549
0 to 549
291
289
i5
i6
2, 3
2, 3
0 to 549
41
dr
2, 3
0 to 549
0 to 549
89
90
dq
cu
2, 3
2, 3
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
cw
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cv
Digital Input 2
0 to 549
118
cx
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
cz
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cy
Digital Input 3
0 to 549
119
d0
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
d2
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
d1
Dig in C4
0 to 549
496
nq
2, 3
Dig in C5
0 to 549
497
nr
2, 3
Digout 1 (B5)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
jz
Digout 1 (B5)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b7
Digout 1 (B5)
0 to 549
77
cp
2, 3
Digout 1 (B5)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
ff
2
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k0
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b8
Digout 2 (B6)
0 to 549
122
cq
2, 3
Digout 2 (B6)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fg
2
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k1
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b9
Digout 3 (B7)
0 to 549
125
cr
2, 3
Digout 3 (B7)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fh
2
Link 1
0 to 549
0
k5
2, 3
Link 1
0 to 549
0
k4
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
MN792
Table B-3 Parameters Listed by Keypad Menu Continued
Tag
470
R/W
RW
Name
Destination Tag
469
RW
Source Tag
367
RW
Destination Tag
366
RW
Source Tag
369
RW
Destination TaG
368
RW
Source Tag
371
RW
Destination Tag
370
RW
Source Tag
455
RW
Destination Tag
454
RW
Source Tag
457
RW
Destination Tag
456
RW
Source Tag
459
RW
Destination Tag
458
RW
Source Tag
461
RW
Destination Tag
460
RW
Source Tag
468
RW
Destination Tag
467
RW
Source Tag
123
124
RW
RW
Peek Data
Peek Scale
MN792
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 10
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 10
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 9
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
LINKS::LINK 9
SYSTEM::PEEK
SYSTEM::PEEK
I/O::INTERNAL
WB Block
Link 10
Range
0 to 549
Factory Setting
0
MN
n2
Notes
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n1
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k7
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k6
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k9
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k8
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 4
0 to 549
0
kb
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 4
0 to 549
0
ka
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 5
0 to 549
0
mn
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 5
0 to 549
0
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 6
0 to 549
0
m
m
mp
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 6
0 to 549
0
mo
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mr
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mq
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 8
0 to 549
0
mt
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 8
0 to 549
0
ms
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 9
0 to 549
0
n0
2, 3
I/O::INTERNAL
Link 9
0 to 549
0
mz
2, 3
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
-300.00 to 300.00
0x0078
8.00
df
dg
2, 3
Parameter Table B-27
Parameter Values Continued R/W: RO = Read Only, RW = Read / Write
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block
Tag
543
121
120
198
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Zero CAL Inputs
Change Password
Enter Password
P3 Baud Rate
Keypad Menu
CONFIGURE DRIVE
PASSWORD
PASSWORD
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
123
124
187
RW
RW
RO
Peek Data
Peek Scale
Raw Input
189
RO
Scaled Input
132
RW
SETPT. RATIO
133
RW
SETPT. SIGN
134
274
RW
RW
Source Tag
I GAIN IN RAMP
273
RW
POS. LOOP P GAIN
268
RW
Mode
271
RW
PROP. GAIN
269
RW
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
270
RW
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
272
RW
SPD.INT.TIME
285
RW
ZERO IAD LEVEL
284
RW
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
116
115
528
RO
RO
RO
Health Store
Health Word
Last Alarm
SYSTEM::PEEK
SYSTEM::PEEK
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::5703 SUPPORT
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ADAPTION
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::ADĆ
VANCED::ZERO SPD. QUENCH
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
B-28 Parameter Table
WB Block
Factory Setting
5703
Range
Up To Action Requested
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0:300 1:600 2:1200
3:2400 4:4800 5:9600
6:19200
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
-300.00 to 300.00
xxx.xx %
0x0000
0x0000
9600
MN
p3
dd
dc
fi
5703
0x0078
8.00
0.00%
df
dg
f7
Output
xxx.xx %
0.00%
f9
Output, 2
5703
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.0000
do
5703
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
dp
5703
Advanced
0 to 549
0.0000 to 2.0000
89
1.0000
dq
hm
2, 3
Advanced
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00%
hl
4
Advanced
0 to 3
0
hg
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00
5.00
hj
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
1.00%
hh
Advanced
0.00 to 100.00 %
5.00%
hi
Advanced
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.500 Secs
hk
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
1.50%
hx
Advanced
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.50%
hw
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000
0x0200
No Active
d8
d7
oo
0x0000 : No Active Alarms
0x0001 : Over Speed
0x0002 : Missing Pulse
0x0004 : Field Over I
0x0008 : Heatsink Trip
0x0010 : Thermistor
0x0020 : Over Volts (VA)
0x0040 : SPD Feed back
0x0080 : Encoder Failed
0x0100 : Field Failed
0x0200 : 3 Phase Failed
0x0400 : Phase Lock
0x0800 : 5703 RCV Error
0x1000 : Stall Trip
0x2000 : Over I Trip
0xf005 : External Trip
0x8000 : Accts Failed
0xf001 : Autotune Error
0xf002 : Autotune Aborted
0xf200 : Config Enabled
0xf400 : No Keypad
0xf006 : Remote Trip
0xff05 : PCB Version
0xff06 : Product Code
Alarms
Notes
1, 2, 3, 4
1
2
Output
Output
Output, 1
MN792
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
542
112
122
125
541
111
92
19
540
81
28
305
50
230
R/W
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
Name
Remote Trip
Stall Trip
Health LED
Ready
REM Trip Delay
5703 RCV ERROR
Encoder Alarm
Field Fail
REM Trip Inhibit
SPEED FBK ALARM
Stall Trip
Trip Reset
ANIN 1 (A2)
Calibration
246
RW
Destination Tag
231
RW
Max Value
232
RW
Min Value
51
233
RO
RW
ANIN 2 (A3)
Calibration
234
RW
Max Value
235
RW
Min Value
493
RO
Output
52
236
RO
RW
ANIN 3 (A4)
Calibration
249
RW
Destination Tag
237
RW
Max Value
238
RW
Min Value
53
239
RO
RW
ANIN 4 (A5)
Calibration
250
RW
Destination Tag
240
RW
Max Value
241
RW
Min Value
54
242
RO
RW
ANIN 5 (A6)
Calibration
247
RW
Destination Tag
243
RW
Max Value
244
RW
Min Value
55
245
RO
RW
ANOUT 1 (A7)
% TO GET 10V
362
RW
Modulus
MN792
Keypad Menu
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INHIBIT ALARMS
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 1 (A2)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 2 (A3)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 3 (A4)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 4 (A5)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG INĆ
PUTS::ANIN 5 (A6)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
WB Block
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Alarms
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 1
Range
0 : False 1 : True
0 : OK 1 : Failed
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : Enabled 1 : Inhibited
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx VOLTS
-3.0000 to 3.0000
Factory Setting
FALSE
OK
True
False
10.0 Secs
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Inhibited
TRUE
0.00V
1.0000
MN
p2
d4
de
dh
p1
d3
ck
aj
p0
c9
as
ih
be
ge
Notes
Output, 1
Output
Output
Output
Analog Input 1
0 to 549
100
gu
2, 3
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gf
Analog Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gg
Analog Input 2
Analog Input 2
xxx.xx VOLTS
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.00V
1.0000
bf
gh
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gi
Analog Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gj
Analog Input 2
xxx.xx %
0.00%
np
Output, 2
Analog Input 3
Analog Input 3
xxx.xx VOLTS
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.00V
1.0000
bg
gk
Output
Analog Input 3
0 to 549
5
gx
2, 3
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
gl
Analog Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gm
Analog Input 4
Analog Input 4
xxx.xx VOLTS
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.00V
1.0000
bh
gn
Output
Analog Input 4
0 to 549
48
gy
2, 3
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
100.00%
go
Analog Input 4
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-100.00%
gp
Analog Input 5
Analog Input 5
xxx.xx VOLTS
-3.0000 to 3.0000
10.00V
1.0000
bi
gq
Output
Analog Input 5
0 to 549
301
gv
2, 3
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
200.00%
gr
Analog Input 5
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-200.00%
gs
Analog Output 1
Analog Output 1
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00V
100.00%
bj
gt
Analog Output 1
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k2
Output
Output
Output
Parameter Table B-29
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
464
R/W
RW
Name
Offset
WB Block
Analog Output 1
Range
-100.00 to 100.00 %
Factory Setting
0.00%
MN
mw
Notes
Analog Output 1
0 to 549
62
gz
2, 3
Analog Output 2
Analog Output 2
xxx.xx VOLTS (h)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00V
100.00%
bk
gw
Output
Analog Output 2
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
k3
Analog Output 2
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
mx
Analog Output 2
0 to 549
63
h0
2, 3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Start (C3)
ANOUT 1
ANOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 1
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3
Aux Enable
AUX JOG
AUX START
Enable
Jog/Slack
REM.SEQ.ENABLE
REM.SEQUENCE
SEQ Status
Armature Current
Encoder Lines
Encoder RPM
Field Current
NOM Motor Volts
BACK EMF
Terminal Volts
Unfil. Field FBK
UNFIL.ENCODER
UNFIL.TACH INPUT
Analog TACH CAL
Armature I (A9)
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 1 (A7)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::ANALOG OUTĆ
PUTS::ANOUT 2 (A8)
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
SETUP PARAMETERS::AUX I/O
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
251
RW
Source Tag
56
248
RO
RW
ANOUT 2 (A8)
% TO GET 10V
363
RW
Modulus
465
RW
Offset
252
RW
Source Tag
69
70
68
128
129
94
95
96
168
227
161
497
496
535
536
537
523
24
22
524
521
60
57
181
59
58
23
25
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Off
On
Off
0.00%
0.00%
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
FALSE
0x0000
0x0C03
2.0 Amps
1024
1750 RPM
0.2 Amps
500 Volts
0.0%
0.0%
0.00%
0 RPM
0.0%
1.0000
Bipolar
bx
by
bw
dk
dl
cm
cn
co
eo
gb
eh
nt
ns
ov
ow
ox
oj
ao
am
ok
oh
bo
bl
f1
bn
bm
an
ap
Output
Output
Output
Armature V CAL.
Field I CAL.
IR Compensation
Over Speed Level
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
Stall Threshold
Stall Trip Delay
Zero SPD. Offset
Autotune
CUR.LIMIT/SCALER
At Current Limit
Current FBK.Amps
Field I FBK.AMPS
IaDmd UNFILTERED
IaFbk UNFILTERED
Additional DEM
Bipolar Clamps
Discontinuous
Feed Forward
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
SETUP PARAMETERS::CALIBRATION
CONFIGURE DRIVE
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT LOOP
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Calibration
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False, 1 : True
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
2.0 to 15.0 AMPS
10 to 5000
0 to 6000 RPM
0.2 to 4.0 AMPS
100 to 875 Volts
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx % (h)
0.9800 to 1.1000
0 : UNIPOLAR
1 : BIPOLAR
0.9800 to 1.1000
0.9800 to 1.1000
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-5.00 to 5.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
xxxx.x AMPS
xxxx.x AMPS
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.10 to 50.00
20
182
21
188
180
263
224
10
18
15
42
538
539
66
65
30
90
137
136
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
1.0000
1.0000
0.00%
125.00%
50.00%
95.00%
10.0 Secs
0.00%
Off
90.00%
False
0.0 Amps
0.0 Amps
0.0%
0.0%
0.00%
Disabled
12.00%
2.00
ak
f2
al
f8
f0
hb
g8
aa
ai
af
b6
oy
oz
bu
bt
au
ci
dt
ds
B-30 Parameter Table
Output
Output
2
1
Output
3
2
3
3
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
4
Output, 1
Output
Output, 1, 3
Output, 1, 3
Output
Output
4
MN792
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
119
17
421
527
48
301
16
201
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
I DMD. ISOLATE
INT. GAIN
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
Master Bridge
NEG. I CLAMP
POS. I CLAMP
PROP. GAIN
Regen Mode
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT
93
33
32
31
61
67
299
298
84
82
206
300
88
87
297
207
308
494
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
IMAX BRK1(SPD1)
IMAX BRK2(SPD2)
SPD BRK1 (LOW)
SPD BRK2 (HIGH)
ACTUAL NEG I LIM
ACTUAL POS I LIM
Current Demand
Current Feedback
Drive Enable
Drive Start
Encoder
FIELD I FBK.
NEG. I CLAMP
POS. I CLAMP
Speed Error
Speed Feedback
Tach Input
Destination Tag
495
RW
Destination Tag
71
102
RO
RW
DIGIN 1 (C6)
Destination Tag
104
RW
Value For False
103
RW
Value For True
72
105
RO
RW
DIGIN 2 (C7)
Destination Tag
107
RW
Value For False
106
RW
Value For True
73
108
RO
RW
DIGIN 3 (C8)
Destination Tag
110
RW
Value For False
109
RW
Value For True
74
359
RO
RW
DIGOUT 1 (B5)
Inverted
43
RW
Modulus
97
RW
Source Tag
195
RW
Threshold (>)
75
RO
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
SETUP PARAMETERS::CURRENT PROFILE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 2 (C7)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL INĆ
PUTS::DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
PUTS::DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIAGNOSTICS
MN792
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
LOOP
WB Block
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Current Loop
Factory Setting
Disabled
3.50
200.00%
Off
0.00%
100.00%
45.00
2Q(Non-regen)
MN
db
ah
lp
on
bc
id
ag
fl
Notes
Current Profile
Current Profile
Current Profile
Current Profile
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Dig in C4
Range
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0.00 to 200.00
0 : 2Q (Non-regen)
1 : 4Q (Regen)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0.00 to 200.00 % (h)
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Off 1 : On
xxxxx RPM
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx % (h)
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx % (h)
0 to 549
200.00%
200.00%
100.00%
100.00%
-90.0%
90.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Disabled
Off
0 RPM
0.00%
-90.0%
90.0%
-0.01%
0.01%
0.0%
496
cl
ax
aw
av
bp
bv
ib
ia
cc
ca
fq
ic
cg
cf
i9
fr
ik
nq
2
2
2
2
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
2, 3
Dig in C5
0 to 549
497
nr
2, 3
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 1
0 : Off 1 : On
0 to 549
Off
90
bz
cu
Output
2, 3
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
cw
Digital Input 1
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cv
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 2
0 : Off 1 : On
0 to 549
Off
118
c0
cx
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
cz
Digital Input 2
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
cy
Digital Input 3
Digital Input 3
0 : Off 1 : On
0 to 549
Off
119
c1
d0
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
d2
Digital Input 3
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.01%
d1
Digout 1 (B5)
Digout 1 (B5)
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False 1 : True
On
FALSE
c2
jz
Digout 1 (B5)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b7
Digout 1 (B5)
0 to 549
77
cp
2, 3
Digout 1 (B5)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
ff
2
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : Off 1 : On
On
c3
Output
Output, 1
2
Output
2, 3
Output
2, 3
Output
Parameter Table B-31
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
360
R/W
RW
Name
Inverted
44
RW
Modulus
98
RW
Source Tag
196
RW
Threshold (>)
76
361
RO
RW
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Inverted
45
RW
Modulus
99
RW
Source Tag
197
RW
Threshold (>)
209
RW
FLD.CTRL MODE
210
183
169
184
170
617
186
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
185
RW
618
172
RO
RW
FLD.VOLTS RATIO
Field Demand
Field Enabled
FLD.FIRING ANGLE
Field Enable
Field I Thresh
FLD. QUENCH
MODE
FLD.QUENCH
DELAY
Up To Field
INT. GAIN
173
RW
PROP. GAIN
171
RW
Setpoint
192
RW
BEMF FBK LAG
191
RW
BEMF FBK LEAD
177
RW
EMF GAIN
176
RW
EMF LAG
175
RW
EMF LEAD
174
RW
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
178
RW
MAX VOLTS
179
RW
MIN FLD.CURRENT
203
204
199
200
212
RO
RW
RW
RW
RO
Inverse Time O/P
Aiming Point
Delay
Rate
Operating Mode
B-32 Parameter Table
Keypad Menu
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 2 (B6)
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE
PUTS::DIGOUT 3 (B7)
CONFIGURE DRIVE
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
WB Block
Digout 2 (B6)
Range
0 : False 1 : True
Factory Setting
FALSE
MN
k0
Notes
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
Digout 2 (B6)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b8
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
Digout 2 (B6)
0 to 549
122
cq
2, 3
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
Digout 2 (B6)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fg
2
Digout 3 (B7)
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False 1 : True
Off
FALSE
c4
k1
Output
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
Digout 3 (B7)
0 : False 1 : True
TRUE
b9
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
Digout 3 (B7)
0 to 549
125
cr
2, 3
I/O::DIGITAL OUTĆ
Digout 3 (B7)
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0.00%
fh
2
Field Control
Voltage Control
ft
2
67.0%
0.00%
Disabled
0.00 Deg
Enabled
80.00%
Quench
fu
f3
ep
f4
eq
Output
Output
Output
2
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
Field Control
0 : Voltage Control
1 : Current Control
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
xxx.xx %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
xxx.xx DEG
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Quench 1 : Standby
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
Field Control
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
f5
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONTROL
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
SETUP PARAMETERS::FIELD CONĆ
TROL::FLD.CURRENT VARS::FLD.WEAK VARS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
SETUP PARAMETERS::INVERSE TIME
DIAGNOSTICS
Field Control
Field Control
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00
False
1.28
es
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.10
et
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00%
er
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fc
Field Control
10 to 5000
100
fb
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00
0.30
ex
Field Control
0.00 to 200.00
40.00
ew
Field Control
0.10 to 50.00
2.00
ev
Field Control
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
Disabled
eu
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
100.00%
ey
Field Control
0.00 to 100.00 %
10.00%
ez
2
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Inverse Time
Jog/Slack
xxx.xx %
0.00 to 103.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Stop
1 : Stop
2 : Jog Sp. 1
3 : Jog Sp. 2
4 : Run
5 : Take Up Sp. 1
6 : Take Up Sp. 2
7 : Crawl
200.0%
103.00%
10.0 Secs
60.0 Secs
Stop
fn
fo
fj
fk
fw
Output, 2, 4
2, 4
2, 4
2, 4
Output
f6
Output
2
MN792
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
225
218
219
228
355
253
254
365
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Crawl Speed
Jog Speed 1
Jog Speed 2
Mode
Ramp Rate
Take Up 1
Take Up 2
Destination Tag
364
RW
Source Tag
470
RW
Destination Tag
469
RW
Source Tag
367
RW
Destination Tag
366
RW
Source Tag
369
RW
Destination TaG
368
RW
Source Tag
371
RW
Destination Tag
370
RW
Source Tag
455
RW
Destination Tag
454
RW
Source Tag
457
RW
Destination Tag
456
RW
Source Tag
459
RW
Destination Tag
458
RW
Source Tag
461
RW
Destination Tag
460
RW
Source Tag
468
RW
Destination Tag
467
RW
Source Tag
37
547
514
RW
RW
RW
FULL MENUS
SPD.FBK.FILTER
Ramp Accel Time
515
RW
Ramp Decel Time
513
511
512
516
RW
RW
RW
RW
Jog Setpoint
Local Key Enable
Setpoint
Forward
520
RW
Jog Setpoint
MN792
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SETUP PARAMETERS::JOG/SLACK
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 10
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 10
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 2
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 3
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 4
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 5
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 6
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 7
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 8
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 9
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::INTERNAL
LINKS::LINK 9
MENUS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::LOCAL
RAMP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::SET UP
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
WB Block
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Jog/Slack
Link 1
Range
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
-100.00 to 100.00 %
-100.00 to 100.00 %
0 to 549
Factory Setting
10.00%
20.00 %
-5.00 %
FALSE
1.0 Secs
5.00%
-5.00%
0
MN
g9
g2
g3
gc
jv
h1
h2
k5
Notes
Link 1
0 to 549
0
k4
2, 3
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n2
2, 3
Link 10
0 to 549
0
n1
2, 3
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k7
2, 3
Link 2
0 to 549
0
k6
2, 3
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k9
2, 3
Link 3
0 to 549
0
k8
2, 3
Link 4
0 to 549
0
kb
2, 3
Link 4
0 to 549
0
ka
2, 3
Link 5
0 to 549
0
mn
2, 3
Link 5
0 to 549
0
2, 3
Link 6
0 to 549
0
m
m
mp
Link 6
0 to 549
0
mo
2, 3
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mr
2, 3
Link 7
0 to 549
0
mq
2, 3
Link 8
0 to 549
0
mt
2, 3
Link 8
0 to 549
0
ms
2, 3
Link 9
0 to 549
0
n0
2, 3
Link 9
0 to 549
0
mz
2, 3
Menus
Menus
Op Station
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.000 to 1.000
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
Enabled
0.000
10.0 Secs
b1
p7
oa
Op Station
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
ob
Op Station
Op Station
Op Station
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
5.00%
TRUE
0.00%
TRUE
o9
o7
o8
oc
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
5.00%
og
2, 3
2, 3
1
1
Parameter Table B-33
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
517
R/W
RW
Name
Local
518
RW
Program
519
RW
Setpoint
416
415
417
401
418
414
408
403
410
411
409
402
474
473
406
407
405
475
404
412
413
400
264
257
307
256
262
259
258
261
255
260
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
PID Clamped
PID Error
PID Output
DERIVATIVE TC
Divider 1
Divider 2
Enable
FILTER T.C.
Input 1
Input 2
INT. DEFEAT
INT.TIME.CONST
MIN PROFILE GAIN
Mode
Negative Limit
O/P SCALER(TRIM)
Positive Limit
Profiled Gain
PROP. GAIN
Ratio 1
Ratio 2
PID O/P DEST
Raise/Lower O/P
Decrease Rate
External Reset
Increase Rate
Lower Input
Max Value
Min Value
Raise Input
Reset Value
Raise/Lower Dest
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
SETUP PARAMETERS::OP STATION::START
UP VALUES
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPECIAL BLOCKS::PID
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAISE/LOWER
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
293
85
113
266
287
4
288
620
126
2
3
118
5
286
422
135
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RAMP O/P DEST
Ramp Output
Ramping
% S-RAMP
Auto Reset
Constant Accel
External Reset
Invert
MIN SPEED
Ramp Accel Time
Ramp Decel Time
Ramp Hold
Ramp Input
RAMPING THRESH.
Reset Value
Destination Tag
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS::RAMPS
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::CONFIGURE 5703
86
131
420
419
309
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
SPT SUM OUTPUT
Deadband Width
Divider 0
Divider 1
Input 0
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
B-34 Parameter Table
WB Block
Op Station
Range
0 : False 1 : True
Factory Setting
TRUE
MN
od
Op Station
0 : False 1 : True
FALSE
oe
Op Station
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.00%
of
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID Output
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower
Output
Ramp Output
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Ramps
Scaled 5703
Input
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.000 to 10.000 Secs
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 : Off 1 : On
0.01 to 100.00 Secs
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 to 4
-105.00 to 0.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0.00 to 105.00 %
xxxx.x
0.0 to 100.0
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 to 549
xxx.xx %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 to 549
False
0.00%
0.00%
0.000Secs
1.0000
1.0000
Enabled
0.100 Secs
0.00%
0.00%
Off
5.00 Secs
20.00%
0
-100.00%
0.2000
100.00%
0.0
1.0
1.0000
1.0000
0
0.00%
10.0 Secs
FALSE
10.0 Secs
FALSE
100.00%
-100.00%
FALSE
0.00%
0
lk
lj
ll
l5
lm
li
lc
l7
le
lf
ld
l6
n6
n5
la
lb
l9
n7
l8
lg
lh
l4
hc
h5
ij
h4
ha
h7
h6
h9
h3
h8
Output
Output
Output
0 to 549
xxx.xx %
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0 : False 1 : True
0.00 to 100.00 %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 : Off 1 : On
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00 to 100.00 %
-300.00 to 300.00 %
0 to 549
291
0.00%
False
2.50%
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
False
0.00%
10.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
Off
0.00%
0.50%
0.00%
41
i5
cd
d5
he
hz
a4
i0
2, 3
Output
Output
xxx.xx %
0.00 to 100.00 % (h)
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00%
0.0%
1.0000
1.0000
0.00%
ce
dn
lo
ln
il
di
a2
a3
da
a5
hy
lq
dr
Notes
Output
2, 3
Output
2, 3
Output
MN792
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
100
423
375
208
6
292
8
294
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Name
Input 1
Input 2
Limit
Ratio 0
Ratio 1
SIGN 0
Sign 1
SPT SUM 1 DEST
Keypad Menu
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SETUP PARAMETERS::SETPOINT SUM 1
SYSTEM::CONFIGURE I/O::BLOCK DIAGRAM
49
13
14
47
RW
RW
RW
RW
ENCODER SIGN
SPD.INT.TIME
SPD.PROP.GAIN
SPEED FBK SELECT
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
CONFIGURE
549
63
64
62
202
357
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
Speed LOOP O/P
Speed Setpoint
UNFIL.SPD.ERROR
UNFIL.SPD.FBK
INT. DEFEAT
Max Demand
358
RW
Min Demand
7
RW
Ratio 2 (A3)
289
RW
Setpoint 1
290
RO
Setpoint 2 (A3)
291
RW
Setpoint 3
41
RW
Setpoint 4
9
RW
Sign 2 (A3)
79
78
77
306
11
12
525
80
89
302
594
91
216
26
217
27
29
130
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
At Standstill
At Zero Setpoint
At Zero Speed
Source Tag
Standstill Logic
Zero Threshold
Coast Stop
Program Stop
Speed Demand
Contactor Delay
CURR Decay Rate
PROG STOP I LIM
PROG STOP LIMIT
PROG Stop Time
Stop Limit
Stop Time
Stop Zero Speed
Mode
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
SETUP PARAMETERS::SPEED LOOP::SETĆ
POINTS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
SETUP PARAMETERS::STANDSTILL
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SETUP PARAMETERS::STOP RATES
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP
MN792
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
DRIVE
WB Block
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Setpoint Sum 1
Output
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Speed Loop
Range
-200.00 to 200.00 %
-200.00 to 200.00 %
0.00 to 200.00 %
-3.0000 to 3.0000
-3.0000 to 3.0000
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0 to 549
Factory Setting
0.00%
0.00%
105.00%
1.0000
1.0000
Positive
Positive
289
MN
cs
lr
kf
fs
a6
i4
a8
i6
Notes
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
0.001 to 30.000 Secs
0.00 to 200.00
0 : Arm Volts Fbk
1 : Analog Tach
2 : Encoder
3 : Encoder/Analog
-200 to 200 %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
xxx.xx %
0 : Off 1 : On
0.00 to 105.00 %
Positive
0.500 Secs
10
Arm Volts Fbk
bd
ad
ae
bb
2
2
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.03%
Off
105.00%
p9
br
bs
bq
fm
jx
Output, 2
Output
Output
Output
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
-105.00%
jy
Speed Loop
-3.0000 to 3.0000
.0000
a7
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i1
Speed Loop
xxx.xx %
0.00%
i2
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
i3
Speed Loop
-105.00 to 105.00 %
0.00%
b5
Speed Loop
0 : Negative 1 : Positive
Positive
a9
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Standstill
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
Stop Rates
System Port P3
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 to 549
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
xxx.xx %
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0 to 200.00
0.00 to 200.00 %
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.0 to 600.0 Secs
0.1 to 600.0 Secs
0.00 to 100.00 %
0 : Disabled
1 : 5703 Master
2 : 5703 Slave
3 : CELite (EIASCII)
True
True
True
89
Disabled
2.00%
FALSE
False
0.00%
1.0 Secs
0.00
100.00%
60.0 Secs
0.1 Secs
60.0 Secs
10.0 Secs
2.00%
0
c7
c6
c5
ii
ab
ac
ol
c8
ch
ie
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Loop
Loop
Loop
Loop
Loop
Loop
2, 3
Output
Output
Output
Output
2, 3, 4
Output
Output
Output
cj
g0
aq
g1
ar
at
dm
Parameter Table B-35
Table B-4 Parameters Listed by WB Block Continued
Tag
332
R/W
RW
Name
Error Report
WB Block
System Port P3
Range
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
Factory Setting
0x00C0
MN
j8
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0x0007
0x0000
j5
System Port P3
0x0000 to 0x000F
0x0000
j6
TEC Option Fault
Keypad Menu
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)::P3 SETĆ
UP::BISYNCH SUPPORT
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
329
RW
GROUP ID (GID)
330
RW
UNIT ID (UID)
506
RO
Tec Option
None
o2
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
TEC Option IN 1
TEC Option IN 2
TEC Option IN 3
TEC Option IN 4
TEC Option IN 5
TEC Option OUT 1
TEC Option OUT 2
TEC Option Type
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
Tec Option
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
None
nx
ny
nz
o0
o1
o4
o5
nw
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
TEC Option VER
SPEED FBK STATE
Thermistor State
Configure Enable
ARM Volts FBK
Contactor Closed
Drive Running
System Reset
Parameter Save
Version Number
SERIAL LINKS::TEC OPTION
ALARM STATUS
ALARM STATUS
CONFIGURE DRIVE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
PARAMETER SAVE
SERIAL LINKS::SYSTEM PORT (P3)
Tec Option
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
Unallocated
0 : None
1 : Parameter
2 : Type Mismatch
3 : Self Test
4 : Hardware
5 : Missing
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
xxxxx
xxxxx
0 : None
1 : Rs485
2 : Profibus Dp
3 : Link
4 : Device Net
5 : Can Open
6 : Lonworks
7 : Type 7
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
501
502
503
504
505
508
509
500
507
472
337
39
605
83
376
374
354
155
0x0000
False
False
Disabled
0 Volts
Off
False
True
o3
n4
jd
b3
B-36 Parameter Table
0 : Off 1 : On
0 : False 1 : True
0 : False 1 : True
Up To Action Requested
0x0000 to 0xFFFF
cb
kg
ke
ju
eb
Notes
1
Output
Output, 1
Output, 1
Output, 1
Output
Output
2
Output
Output
Output
Output
1
Output
MN792
Appendix C
Block Diagram
For 4-20mA,
Set Min Value =25%
Max Value = 125%
Analog Input 2 = -25%
0-20mA Input
Analog Input 1
Destination Tag [246]
[230] Calibration
[231] MAX Value
[232] MIN Value
ANIN 1 (A2) [50]
100
±10VDC Input w/o Ramp
Analog Input 2
Output [493]
[233] Calibration
[234] MAX Value
[235] MIN Value
ANIN 2 (A3) [51]
±10VDC Input with Ramp
Analog Input 3
Destination Tag [249]
309
[236] Calibration
[237] MAX Value
[238] MIN Value
ANIN 3 (A4) [52]
Optional Reverse I Limit
Analog Input 4
48
Destination Tag [250]
[239] Calibration
[240] MAX Value
[238] MIN Value
ANIN 4 (A5) [53]
External I Limit
Analog Input 5
Destination Tag [247]
[242] Calibration
[243] MAX Value
[244] MIN Value
ANIN 5 (A6) [54]
Jog/Slack
Digital Input 1
Destination Tag [102]
[103] Value True
[104] Value False
DIGIN 1 (C6) [71]
Jog/Slack Mode
Digital Input 2
Destination Tag [105]
[106] Value True
[107] Value False
DIGIN 2 (C7) [72]
Speed/Torque Select
Digital Input 3
Destination Tag [108]
[109] Value True
[110] Value False
DIGIN 3 (C8) [73]
Enable
C4
Destination Tag [494]
DIGIN E (C4) [69]
Reverse
C5
Destination Tag [495]
DIGIN R (C5) [70]
Ramps
Setpoint Sum 1
SPT Sum 1 DEST [294]
SPT Sum [86]
[6] Ratio 1
[208] Ratio 0
[8] Sign 1
[292] Sign 0
[419] Divider 1
[420] Divider 0
[131] Deadband
[375] Limit
[423] Input 2
[100] Input 1
[309] Input 0
Enable & Jog/Slack Inputs
Aux I/O
620
5703
Destination Tag [135]
Raw Input [187]
Scaled Input [189]
89
Terminal Strip Jog/Slack Settings
Jog/Slack
Operating Mode [212]
[218] Jog Speed 1
[219] Jog Speed 2
[253] Take Up 1
[254] Take Up 2
[225] Crawl Speed
[228] Mode
[355] Ramp Rate
Current Loop
497
289
[14] SPD Prop Gain
[13] SPD Int Time
[202] Int Defeat
[49] Encoder Sign
[47] Speed Fdbk Sel
[547] SPD FBK Filter
[289] Setpoint 1
[9] Sign 2 (A3)
[7] Ratio 2 (A3)
[291] Setpoint 3
[41] Setpoint 4
[357] Max Demand
[358] Min Demand
[595] Preset Torque
[604] Preset T Scale
[15] Cur Limit/Scaler At Current Limit [42]
[421] Main Cur Limit
IA Demand [66]
[16] Prop Gain
IA Feedback [65]
[17] Int Gain
IA Feedback [538]
[136] Feed Forward
IF Feedback [539]
[137] Discontinuous
Autotune [18]
[30] Additional Dem ILoop Suspend [46]
[90] Bipolar Clamps Master Bridge [527]
[201] Regen Mode
[301] Pos I Clamp
[48] Neg I Clamp
[119] I DMD Isolate
SPD Loop Output [549]
Speed Feedback [62]
Speed Setpoint [63]
UNFIL SPD Error [64]
Setpoint 2 (A3) [290]
89
41
[19] Field Fail
[111] 5703 RCV Error
[28] Stall Trip
[305] Trip Reset
[81] Speed Fdbk Alarm
[92] Encoder Alarm
[540] REM Trip Inhibit
[541] REM Trip Delay
Use Minimum field current to set
Maximum Speed in Field Weakening
Configure Drive
[521] NOM Motor Volts
[523] Armature Current
[524] Field Current
[209] Field Control Mode
[210] Field Volts Ratio
[47] Speed Feedback Select
[22] Encoder RPM
[24] Encoder Lines
[49] Encoder Sign
Optional Drive Status Outputs (Read Only)
Diagnostics
Speed Feedback [207]
Speed Error [297]
Current Demand [299]
Current Feedback [298]
POS I Clamp [87]
NEG I Clamp [88]
Actual POS I Limit [67]
Actual NEG I Limit [61]
Drive Start [82]
Drive Enable [84]
Field I Feedback [300]
TACH Input (B2) [308]
Encoder [206]
Drive Running [376]
Contactor Closed [83]
[251] Input
[245] 10V CAL
[464] Offset
[362] Modulus
ANOUT 1 (A7) [55]
Unfiltered Speed Command
Analog Output 2
[252] Input
[248] 10V CAL
[465] Offset
[363] Modulus
ANOUT 2 (A8) [56]
At Zero Speed
Digital Output 1 (B5)
77
At Zero Setpoint [78]
At Zero Speed [77]
At Standstill [79]
[97] Input
[359] Inverted
[195] Threshold
[43] Modulus
DIGOUT 1 (B5) [74]
Drive Ready
Digital Output 2 (B6)
Alarms
[134] Source Tag
[132] Setpt Ratio
[133] Setpt Sign
Stop Rates
Speed Demand [89]
Program Stop [80]
[27] Stop Time
[217] Stop Limit
[302] Contactor Delay
[26] Prog Stop Time
[216] Prog Stop Limit
[91] Prog Stop I LIM
[29] Stop Zero Speed
[306] Source Tag
[11] Standstill Logic
[12] Zero Threshold
62
63
Standstill
Start (C3) [68]
Seq Status [537]
[161] AUX Start
[227] AUX Jog
[168] AUX Enable
[94] AUX DIGOUT 1
[95] AUX DIGOUT 2
[96] AUX DIGOUT 3
[128] ANOUT1
[129] ANOUT2
[536] REM Sequence
[535] REM SEQ Enable
[496] Jog/Slack
[497] Enable
496
119
Ramp O/P DEST [293]
Ramp Output [85]
[2] Ramp Accel Time
Ramping [113]
[3] Ramp Decel Time
[4] Constant Accel
[118] Ramp Hold
[5] Ramp Input
[620] Ramp Invert
[266] % S-Ramp
[286] Ramping Thresh
[287] Auto Reset
[288] External Reset
[422] Reset Value
[126] MIN Speed
301
228
5
Unfiltered Speed Feedback
Analog Output 1
Speed Loop
Healthy [122]
Ready [125]
Health Word [115]
Health Store [116]
Remote Trip [542]
Stall Trip [112]
Last Alarm [528]
Field Control
[170] Field Enable
Field Enable [169]
[209] FLD CTRL Mode IS Field Demand [183]
[210] FLD Volts Ratio Field Firing Angle [184]
[171] Setpoint
Up To Field [618]
[173] Prop Gain
[172] Int Gain
[174] FLD Weak Enable
[175] EMF Lead
[176] EMF Lag
[177] EMF Gain
[179] MIN Field Curent
[178] MAX Volts
[191] BEMF FBK Lead
[192] BEMF FBK Lag
[185] FLD Quench Delay
[186] FLD Quench Mode
[617] FLD I Threshold
122
[98] Input
[360] Inverted
[196] Threshold
[44] Modulus
DIGOUT 2 (B6) [75]
Drive Healthy
Digital Output 3 (B7)
125
[99] Input
[361] Inverted
[197] Threshold
[45] Modulus
DIGOUT 3 (B7) [76]
Calibration
[20] Armature V Cal
Terminal Volts [57]
[21] IR Compensation Unfil Tach Input [58]
[22] Encoder RPM
Encoder [59]
[24] Encoder Lines
Back EMF [60]
[23] Analog Tach Cal
Field FBK [181]
[10] Zero SPD Offset
[25] Armature I (A9)
[180] SPD FBK Alarm Level
[263] Stall Threshold
[224] Stall Trip Delay
[188] Overspeed Level
[182] Field I Cal
[267] Position Count
[275] Position Divider
[521] NOM Motor Volts
[523] Armature Current
[524] Field Current
Baldor Series 29D Digital DC Drive
MN792
Block Diagram C-1
OP Station (Keypad)
[511] Local Key Enable
[512] Setpoint
[513] Jog Setpoint
[514] Ramp Accel Time
[515] Ramp Decel Time
[516] Inital FWD Direction
[517] Initial Local
[518] Initial Program
[519] Initial Setpoint
[520] Inital Jog Setpoint
PID
Error Report [158]
[404] PROP Gain
PID O/P DEST [400]
[402] INT Time Const
PID Output [417]
[401] Derivative TC
PID Clamped [416]
[405] Positive Limit
PID Error [415]
[406] Negative Limit
Profiled Gain [475]
[407] Output Scaler (Trim)
[410] Input 1
[411] Input 2
[412] Ratio 1
[413] Ratio 2
[418] Divider 1
[414] Divider 2
[408] Enable
[409] Int Defeat
[403] Filter TC
[473] Mode
[474] MIN Profile Gain
Raise/Lower
Raise/Lower DEST [260]
[255] Reset Value Raise/Lower O/P [264]
[256] Increase Rate
[257] Decrease Rate
[261] Raise Input
[262] Lower Input
[258] MIN Value
[259] MAX Value
[307] External Reset
TEC Option
Menus
Advanced
[37] Full Menus
[547] Speed FDBK Filter
[304] Language
miniLINK
[339] Value 1
[340] Value 2
[341] Value 3
[342] Value 4
[343] Value 5
[344] Value 6
[345] Value 7
[379] Value 8
[380] Value 9
[381] Value 10
[382] Value 11
[383] Value 12
[384] Value 13
[385] Value 14
[346] Logic 1
[347] Logic 2
[348] Logic 3
[349] Logic 4
[350] Logic 5
[351] Logic 6
[352] Logic 7
[353] Logic 8
[268] Mode
[269] Speed BRK 1 (Low)
[270] Speed BRK 2 (High)
[271] PROP Gain
[272] INT Time Const
[274] I Gain In Ramp
[273] POS Loop P Gain
[284] Zero Speed Level
[285] Zero IAD Level
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
0
PNO 112
PNO 113
PNO 114
PNO 115
PNO 116
PNO 117
PNO 118
PNO 119
PNO 120
PNO 121
PNO 122
PNO 123
PNO 124
PNO 125
PNO 126
PNO 127
[500] Type
[501] Input 1
[502] Input 2
[503] Input 3
[504] Input 4
[505] Input 5
Fault [506]
Version [507]
Output 1 [508]
Output 2 [509]
Current Profile
[32] SPD BRK 1 (Low)
[31] SPD BRK 2 (High)
[93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
[33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
System Port P3
[332] Error Report
[130] Mode
[329] Group ID
[330] Init ID
Baldor Series 29D Digital DC Drive
C-2 Block Diagram
MN792
BALDOR ELECTRIC COMPANY
P.O. Box 2400
Ft. Smith, AR 72902–2400
(479) 646–4711
Fax (479) 648–5792
www.baldor.com
CH
TEL: +41 52 647 4700
FAX:+41 52 659 2394
D
TEL: +49 89 90 50 80
FAX:+49 89 90 50 8491
UK
TEL: +44 1454 850000
FAX:+44 1454 859001
F
TEL: +33 145 10 7902
FAX:+33 145 09 0864
I
TEL: +39 11 562 4440
FAX:+39 11 562 5660
AU
TEL: +61 29674 5455
FAX:+61 29674 2495
CC
TEL: +65 744 2572
FAX:+65 747 1708
MX
TEL: +52 477 761 2030
FAX:+52 477 761 2010
 Baldor Electric Company
MN792
Printed in USA
9/03 C&J1000
Series 29 Digital DC Control
MN792